pees
anit Hesse

set pagatiiath ts team

ese it } % ts

a
Ratan
Bien
c:

att

Sra

i

pared tt
stet

mae cane

4
foykehs
i

st ee

et

raat Saet Med en
Side re

: Bete

ES r heat :
Sern tt x ai gtntie : ts
tans ve a : sii = Sahn Et a
Boece hs a

fet
Sate Lruce

Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2010 with funding from
University of Toronto

http://www.archive.org/details/memoirs29harv

MEMOIRS

OF THE

MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY

AT

HARVARD COLLEGE

VOL. XXIX.

Ss
ae

1?

CAMBRIDGE, U.S.A.
PRINTED FOR THE MUSEUM.
1908.

UNIVERSITY PREss:
JOHN WILSON AnD Son, CamBripGe, U.S.A.

a

CONTENTS.

THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES. By Arexanper AGassiz. pp. i-xxv,
1-168. 82 Plates. December, 1903.

One VotuME TExtT. ONE VOLUME PLATES.

Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative Zoology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Vou. XXIX,

THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

By ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

WITH EIGHTY-TWO PLATES.

DEX.

CAMBRIDGE, U.S.A.:

Printed for the Museum.
DECEMBER, 1903.

‘ . .

ke ay)

| es 3 ten Hite: hs oe me :

Mi
)
rye. wes Vere “

INTRODUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

HypROGRAPHY OF THE Matpives. Plates 1-8¢

TorPoGRAPHY OF THE INDIAN OceAN West OF MALABAR. Plates 7, 8

ANALYSIS OF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AmRa.” Plates 1-8c.

List oF SOUNDINGS

DESCRIPTION OF THE ATOLLS:
North Male. Plates 1,3,4; 8a, fig.6; 8b, figs. 11,19; 8c, fig. 24; 9-18; 19, fig. 1
Gaha Faro. Plates 1,3; 8a, figs. 6,8; 8b, fig. 11

Goifurfehendu.

Plates 1, 3; 8a, fig. 8; 8b, fig. 10; 19, fig. 2; 20.

Karidu. Plates 1, 3; 8b, fig. 11; 21. :
Malosmadulu Plateau. Plates 1,3; 8a, fig. 5; 8b, figs. 9, 10; ge Ae 28; 22-30;

31, fig. il
South Malosm

adulu. Plates 1, 3; 8b, fig. 10; 8c, fig. 28; 22-28; 29, fig.2 .

Middle Malosmadulu. Plates 1,3; 8b, figs. 9, 10; 29, fig. 1 ‘
North Malosmadulu. Plates 1, 3; 8a, fig. 5; 8b, fig. 9; 8c, fig. 26; 30; 31, pace 1
Makunudu. Plates 1, 2; 8a, fig. 7; 31, fig. 2; 32; 33, fig.1.

Fadiffolu. Pla

tes 1, 3; 8a, fig. 4; 8b, fig. 11; 8c, fig. 28; 33, fig. 2; 34, fg. 1

Tiladummati-Miladummadulu Plateau. Plates 1, 2, 3; 84a, figs. 2-5, 7; 34, fig. 2;

35-53; 79,

fig. 3

Miladummadulu. Plates 1, 2, 3; ses ae 4, 5,7; 34, i 2; 35-44; 79, a 3

Tiladummati.
Thavandiffulu.
Toddu. Plates
Rasdu. Plates
Ari. Plates 1,

North Nilandu.
South Nilandu.

South Male.
Felidu. Plates
Wataru Reef.

Plates 1, 2; 8a, figs. 2, 3; 45-53 .

Plates 1, 2; 8a, figs. 1, 3; 54, 55, fig. 1

5 ee Oe

We. : : Se ores aa
4; 8b, figs. 12, 14; 8c, fg 25; 55, fig. 2; 56, 57, 58, fig. 2 .
Plates 1, 4,5; 8b, fig. 14 ; 59-61; 78, fig. 1 . :
Plates 1,5; 8b, figs. 13, 17; 62, 63, 64, fig. 2; 78, fig. 2
Plates 1, 4; 8b, figs. 12, 16; 8c, figs. 19, 27; 79, fig. 2

1, 4,5; 8b, figs. 15, 16 3

Plates 1, 5; 8b, fig. 15; 58, fig. 1

Mulaku. Plates 1,5; 8b, figs. 13, 15, 18; 64, fig. 1; 65 .

Kolumadulu.

Haddummati.

Plates 1, 5; 8b, figs. 17, 18; 8c, fig. 20; 66
Plates 1, 6; 8c, figs. 20, 22; 67-70, 77, fig. 1.

Suvadiva. Plates 1, 6; 8c, figs. 22, 23; 71-75; 79, fig. 1

vill , TABLE OF CONTENTS.

DescripTIoN OF THE ATOLLS (Continued) :

Pua Mulaku. Plates 1,6; 8c, fig. 238 . . -
Addu, Plates 1, 6; 8c, figs. 21, 23; 76, 77, fig. 2
TEMPERATURE OF THE LAGOONS. . . » «© + «© © «
Bottom Deposits IN THE LAGOONS ...... .

Tue PeLacic FauNA OF THE MALDIVES .. .

LOMIDISS:S, SGatice fo Gi G- oo Oo On bed oo

INTRODUCTION.

Ir had always been my intention, on the completion of my explorations
of the atoll and coral regions of the Pacific, to make an expedition to the
Maldives, the only great group of atolls I had not visited, and which
promised interesting results; the coral reefs of the Maldives differing radi-
cally, according to the charts, from every region I had examined.’ We
spent part of December, 1901, and January, 1902, in exploring the Maldives.

The steamer “Amra,” chartered from the British India Steam Naviga-
tion Company, proved a most serviceable vessel for examining the coral
reefs of the Maldives.” She was commanded by Captain William Pigott,
R.N.R., who proved himself a most careful navigator among the maze
of atolls through which we steamed for over sixteen hundred miles. Both
he and the officers of the ‘‘Amra” showed the greatest interest in the
objects of the Expedition. Captain Pigott took charge of the sounding
machine, and himself superintended all the soundings we took (more than
eighty in number); he became exceedingly skilful at this work. Several
of the deeper soundings were taken successfully under most trying circum-
stances. The “Amra” was equipped with a deep-sea Lucas sounding
machine built for me by the Telegraph Construction and Maintenance
Company of London. The machine differs radically from the American
type of sounding machine developed by Captain Sigsbee with which I was
familiar, and which I had in commission on all my former expeditions.

1 This is the last of the series of monographs I shall publish on Coral Reefs, and I hope, as soon
as practicable, to give a résumé and connected account of the results obtained during my expeditions to
all the important coral regions of the Atlantic, Pacific, and Indian Oceans.

2 A sketch of the work of the Expedition was published at Colombo in the “Observer,” January 29,
1902, and in the American Journal of Science for March of the same year.

x INTRODUCTION.

Excellent as is the Sigsbee machine, the Lucas sounder has some advantages
in its compactness, it being self-contained and practically automatic. But
its greatest advantage lies in the use of malleable wire for sounding in
place of the hard-drawn wire in use in American machines. This greatly
simplifies the making of splices and lessens immensely the danger of
kinking while handling the wire. We had in addition a Sir William
Thomson sounding machine for moderate depths in the lagoons or at our
anchorages. I also placed on board a steam winch of the Bacon pattern
with a drum large enough to hold six hundred to eight hundred fathoms
of wire dredging rope. This winch was used for deep-sea towing down
to one hundred and fifty fathoms and for the few hauls of the dredge
we found time to take.

Dr. W. McM. Woodworth, my son Maximilian, and Mr. H. B. Bigelow
accompanied me as assistants. My son and Dr. Woodworth took a large
number of photographs. Dr. Woodworth had general charge of the collec-
tions. They were intentionally limited, as we could not hope in the
short time at our command to add much to the material obtained by
Mr. J. Stanley Gardiner during his prolonged stay at the Maldives and
Laccadives. Mr. Bigelow collected thirty species of Medusae, interesting
mainly for the geographical distribution of the genera represented. As
might be expected, they were principally Hydroids, exclusive of the Sipho-
nophores, Discophores, and Ctenophores. The pelagic Fauna was at times
very rich, and some of our deeper hauls were most productive. The surface
hauls inside the lagoons were also frequently very rich, far more than
in the lagoons of any other coral-reef region I have visited. This may
be accounted for from the open condition of the lagoons of the composite
atolls of the Maldives. No attempt was made to collect any plants, the
collections of Mr. Gardiner having supplied the material for an exhaustive
list of the Flora of the Maldives.’

Messrs. Willis and Gardiner have published a most interesting account of
the Flora of the Maldives and of Minikoi based upon the extensive collections
made by Mr. Gardiner. They have made a careful analysis of the flora,

1 The Botany of the Maldive Islands, by J. C. Willis and J. Stanley Gardiner, Ann. Royal Botanic
Gardens, Peradeniya, Vol. I., Part II., December, 1901.

INTRODUCTION. xl

showing the sources from which it has been derived and the manner in
which it has reached the islands. Messrs. Willis and Gardiner consider
the flora of the islands to be recent, and that if the Maldives “were now
to be submerged and to rise again above the waves, they would probably
acquire in time a flora almost identical with that which they now possess.” !
They look upon the effect of oceanic currents as the most important of all
the agencies in stocking oceanic islands.

To the considerable direct trade which exists between the Malabar Coast,
Calcutta, and Male is probably due the introduction of many Indian weeds?
and a large number of cultivated plants and trees. At Huludu (Addu) there

”8 The natives of

are also “traditions of an Arabian trade in times past.
Tiladummati and IThavandiffulu are most enterprising, and they have
undoubtedly introduced a number of plants and trees in the northern
groups of the Archipelago. For an archipelago with such active traders,
the agency of man has undoubtedly been an effective factor in modifying
the flora of the group and in introducing many plants and trees both from
India and Arabia. It was interesting to watch the native ships taking
advantage of the shelter of the islands to beat northward against the
northeast monsoon in comparatively smooth water, until they reached
Thavandiffulu and could fetch the southern coast of India and Ceylon.

In discussing the origin of the flora of other oceanic islands of the In-
dian Ocean, Messrs. Willis and Gardiner come to the conclusion that “ there
is probably no need to assume complete land connections across the Indian
Ocean to explain the flora of its islands, or perhaps even the affinities of
the African and Indian floras.” We might even go a step further and say
that there is no need of assuming the former existence of larger islands
like those sketched by Mr. Gardiner as occupying areas indicated by the
two thousand fathom line.*

We made a fair ethnological collection, the better part of which we owe
to the kindness of His Highness Muhammadu Imadudin, the Sultan of the
Maldives. I have also to thank the Agents of the British India Steam
Navigation Company at Colombo, Messrs. Bois Brothers and Company,

1 Loe. cit., Willis and Gardiner, p. 162. 3 Loc. cit., p. 123.
4 Loe. cit., p. 140. 4 Loe. cit., Willis and Gardiner, PI. II. fig. 1.

xii INTRODUCTION.

and Captain Fenwick for having carried out my instructions regarding
the equipment of the “Amra.” We found the steamer ready for us on
our arrival at Colombo.

To the Right Honorable Joseph Chamberlain I am indebted for his kind-
ness in giving me letters to the Government officials at Ceylon, and for
writing to His Excellency Sir West Ridgeway in regard to our proposed
visit. The Governor kindly wrote to the Sultan of the Maldives notifying
him of the objects of our Expedition, and also gave us letters to the Sultan.
His Highness took great interest in our work, gave us a circular letter to the
chiefs of the various atolls, and in addition sent a representative and an inter-
preter to accompany us on our trip. Thanks to this, we were everywhere
received with the greatest cordiality. ;

THE SuLTAN’s BARGE

We started on our explorations from Male after having, on making the
atoll, obtained a glimpse of the east coast of North Male as we skirted the
atoll, from Mirufuri to Male Island itself. This stretch of coast together
with the islands near Male and the adjoining faros’ of the lagoon to the
northwest of Male contain all that is most characteristic of the atolls of the
Maldives. A glance at the Chart gave us an approximate idea of the prob-
lems to be solved in the study of the coral reefs of the group.

1 Faro is the name given by the natives to the small atolls which rise in the interior of the large
lagoons or are found on their rims. It may be convenient to retain, as Mr. Gardiner has suggested, the
Maldivian terms “faro” and ‘ velu,’’ * for the small atolls or ring-shaped reefs with their enclosed basin.
Gardiner extends the term “velu” to the deep pools in the linear circumscribing reefs of many of the
banks. ‘This is likely to lead to confusion, as the mode of formation of the last is not necessarily the
same as that of the velu proper.

We are also confronted with the difficulty of distinguishing a faro from an atoll when the former
constitutes a separate bank which may or may not be larger than a faro forming part of a land rim and
larger than many an atoll in the Tropical Pacific.

* The Maldives and Laccadives Archipelagoes, p. 155.

INTRODUCTION. xili

After examining North Male’ we passed to Ari, then to North and South
Nilandu, crossing to Mulaku, making our way to Kolumadulu, to Haddum-
mati, to Suvadiva, and to Addu, the southernmost atoll of the Maldives. On
account of the heavy sea we were unable either on our way south or north
to stop at Fua Mulaku, a small island between Suvadiva and Addu; but,
judging from the chart and such accounts as I could obtain, it probably
does not differ from similar islands in the Maldives.

Going north we modified our course so as to visit the faces of the atolls
we had not seen on our way south, and to cross the lagoons from a different
direction, taking thus a bird’s eye-view of the atolls and islands. Our route
was further daily modified according to the position of the sun to enable
us to navigate the interior of an atoll in safety, or to take photographs as we
passed, without loss of time.

On our way north we examined the atolls of the eastern chain which we
had not seen: Wataru, Felidu, and South Male. From Male Island we ex-
amined the western parts of North Male which we had not visited before,
passed on to Gaha Faro, to Karidu, to Fadiffolu, to South Malosmadulu, to
Goifurfehendu, to Middle and North Malosmadulu, to Miladummadulu,
crossing to Makunudu and Tiladummati. We left the Maldives through
one of the passages on the east face of Ihavandiffulu, the northernmost
atoll of the group, after having steamed nearly sixteen hundred miles
among the atolls of the Maldives.

Although the waters within the groups of atolls of the Maldives have
been most carefully sounded by Commander Moresby and Lieutenant
Powell,” yet very little was known of the depths on the two sea faces of the
great plateau upon which the atolls of the Maldives have developed, or of
the depths in the channels separating them, until Mr. Gardiner’s visit. He
took a number of soundings across the central basin and a few of the chan-
nels separating the Central Maldives.’ The soundings of the Admiralty
Charts give an excellent idea of the topography of the bottom of the lagoons
of the composite atolls; their greatest depth is not much more than forty

1 Pl. 1 shows the track of the “ Amra” through the Maldives.

2 B. A. Charts Nos. 66 a-c.

8 The Fauna and Geography of the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, edited by Mr. J. Stanley
Gardiner, Vol. I., Part I., p. 19, and Introduction to the above, pp. 10, 11; Part II., p. 150, Pl. X.

XIV INTRODUCTION.

fathoms. The depths indicate considerable variation over the bottom, and
in some regions these changes in depth are very abrupt, from eight to over
twenty fathoms in short distances. The character of the bottom varies
greatly according to the locality and its vicinity to gaps, to passes, to islands
or islets or sand-bars. In many cases the bottom is hard, swept clean by
the currents, or covered with fragments coated with Nullipores, or it is coy-
ered ‘with Corallines or made up of fragments of broken corals, or of coarse
or fine coral sand. On one occasion the claspers brought up a piece of Mil-
lepore cut off from a living cluster from a depth of thirty-nine fathoms.
This is an unusual depth for a reef builder, as in the Maldives the reef corals
rarely extend below seventeen fathoms; twelve fathoms is the usual depth I
have observed, there usually begin the sand lanes and patches which sepa-
rate them, and finally end in covering the bottom.

We did not attempt to check any of the soundings on the Admiralty
Charts. Within the atolls they exist in sufficient number for all theoretical
and practical purposes, and for a party not sufficiently numerous and not
properly equipped for the most delicate surveying operations it would have
been hopeless to add any exact information to that already existing.

Our explorations were immensely facilitated from the existence of the
admirable charts published by the Admiralty of the Survey of the Maldives
by Commander Moresby and Lieutenant Powell from 1834 to 1836. The
accuracy of these charts is something wonderful when we remember the
conditions under which the surveys were made nearly seventy years ago,
with sailing vessels and rowboats. In our extensive and intricate navigation
among the Maldives we were guided absolutely by these charts and never
found them in error. Of course some minor changes have occurred on the
reef flats, such as the disappearance of an islet or of a bank, or the addition
of a sand-bar and the junction of adjoining islands or islets on the same
reef flats. Otherwise the charts stand to-day as they did seventy years ago,
a monument to the unsurpassed skill of the surveyors of those days. It
was a simple task to pick out one’s work in each atoll by an examination of
the chart, and thus much time was saved. I have endeavored to adopt the
spelling of the Admiralty Charts revised to May, 1903, but undoubtedly a few
discrepancies will have occurred from our constant use of the older editions.

INTRODUCTION. XV

In exploring any coral-reef region with a steamer a good deal of planning
is necessary to enable one to see the interesting points of an atoll. The
lagoon can be explored only with the sun in certain positions; one cannot
steam east in the morning or west in the afternoon. To take photographs
successfully the eastern face of an atoll must be explored in the morning
and the western in the afternoon, that the sun may strike shallows and
banks to define their limits and contrast their coloring with that of the
deeper navigable waters of the atoll; and finally the programme must be
so arranged as to reach an anchorage before sunset, and an anchorage so
selected as to entail but little loss of time in leaving in the morning with
the sun in a favorable position either for further exploration or to pass
out of the channels of the atolls when the flats and banks flanking them
are well defined and rendered plainly visible from the angle at which
the sun shines upon them.

A mere glance at the Admiralty Charts of the Maldives’ cannot fail to
show how very different in structure are Makunudu, Gaha Faro, Karidu,
Goifurfehendu, Rasdu, Toddu, Wataru, Fua Mulaku, and Addu from such
groups of atolls as North and South Male, Ari, North and South Nilandu,
Felidu, the Malosmadulu atolls, Miladummadulu and its northern extension
Tiladummati which might be called the Maldivian group of atolls par excel-
lence. Both these groups may be contrasted again to such atolls or groups
of atolls as Fadiffolu, Felidu, and Mulaku, which have as it were combina-
tions or modifications characteristic of the Maldivian atolls with features
common to a number of Pacific atolls. And finally they may be compared
to a third class of atolls like Kolumadulu, Haddummati, and Suvadiva,
which remind us of the larger atolls of the Pacific in the Marshall, Ellice,
Gilbert or Caroline Islands; atolls noted for the absence of shoals and of
islands in the lagoons. The groups of small typical Maldivian atolls along
the forty to thirty fathom line of the great Maldivian plateau form an
agglomeration of small atolls along that belt resembling the great land-rim
reef flats of the Pacific atolls, but they have grown up as distinct parts and
are separated by deep channels. These small atolls vary in size from a
couple of hundred feet in diameter to atolls of seven miles in length. In

1 B. A. Charts Nos. 66 a, }, ce.

Xvl INTRODUCTION.

such clusters of atolls as those of North and South Male, of Ari, of Malos-
madulu, and of other groups, their arrangement is such as to form well-
defined rims, reminding us of the rims formed by great reef flats such as
are common in the Pacific.

In such groups of atolls as Miladummadulu and its Tiladummati extension
we have the key to a rational explanation of the formation of the atolls and
groups of atolls in the Maldives. The two atolls I have just named are not
atolls in any sense of the word. They are so ill-defined that their division
for political purposes is marked on the chart by a mere dotted line. In fact,
they are composed of a great number of small atolls, often separated by con-
siderable distances, as much as five to ten miles, which have gradually grown
up on that part of the Maldivian plateau from depths of twenty-five to thirty
fathoms, and where they can be seen in all possible stages of growth.

The shape of the rings (faros) or bars or flats is not necessarily circular ; it
varies greatly and is indirectly controlled by the topography of the bottom.
Some of the faros are elliptical, pear-shaped, or crescent-shaped, differing
greatly in outline and dimensions on the outer lines of the composite atolls.
Their outer slopes are covered with corals growing with great luxuriance
from the edge or even from the surface of the flats of the ring to a depth of
from eight to twelve or fifteen fathoms. The superb growth of corals found
in all the lagoons of the Maldives is in marked contrast with the scanty
growth of corals in the lagoons of the atolls of the Pacific. We have a
simple explanation of this in the fact that the rim of the atolls in the
Maldives is full of wide and deep passages. In fact, the extent of the
passes is generally much larger than the space occupied by the small atolls
(the atollons or faros) and reef flats.

As soon as the rim flats of the rings have reached the surface, either
wholly or in part, sand-bars begin to form; these develop rapidly into islets,
and finally into large islands more or less covered with scrub vegetation and
bushes. The rings or faros either retain a central lagoon or it becomes
partly or wholly filled up. In the former case they appear as small atolls
with islands or islets on the reef flats; in the next stage there is either a
smaller lagoon on the lee face of a larger island, or else the island has grown
to occupy the whole flat of the faro with only very narrow flats on the

INTRODUCTION. xvii

lagoon faces of which corals grow. The larger islands are often covered
with fine vegetation, large trees occupying the space bordered by the outer
belt of bushes growing close to the beach. The greater number of the
many islands which dot the large lagoons of the Maldives have been formed
in the manner described, and it is comparatively easy to trace the progress
of their development in all the stages intermediate between a mere ring,
not yet rising to the surface, and a steep to island with its rich vegetation
such as we find either in the lagoons or on the outer edge of a Maldivian
composite atoll.

The small atolls which form the outer rim of the composite atolls owe
their existence to the same causes, and their development can be as easily
traced from a mere ring which has risen to the surface having more or less
extensive flats on which islands or islets or sand-bars have been thrown up.
The sea reef flats of the outer lines of atolls are usually wider than those
of the lee face, and naturally so.

From my observations I am inclined to look upon Nullipores much as
does Mr. Gardiner,’ as especially efficient in consolidating the corals and in
the protection of reef platforms and flats. Nullipores also flourish on the
sea faces of coral reefs to the greatest depths at which corals grow, but
they are far more important below that depth in lagoons.

As far as I have examined the outer slopes of the reef flats or faros
of the various banks, they are covered with a growth of corals down to a
depth of twenty to twenty-one fathoms, taking their greatest development
at from five to nine or ten fathoms and rapidly disappearing from seven-
teen to twenty-five fathoms, where the coral slope passes into a region
barren of reef corals.

Mr. Gardiner comes to the conclusion that about thirty fathoms is the
extreme limit of the growth of the effective reef-building corals. He also
noticed, what is generally the case in the Pacific, that, modified by local
conditions, corals grow more luxuriantly as the water becomes shallower
to within three to six fathoms of the surface. From his observations”
Gardiner concludes Darwin is correct in stating that the extreme depth
of reef corals is not more than twenty-five fathoms. There are great diffi-

1 Loe, cit., p. 177. 2 Loc. cit., p. 325.

xviii INTRODUCTION.

culties in ascertaining the lateral rate of increase on the outer slope
of a coral reef where it depends so largely upon local conditions within the
bathymetrical range at which corals grow. There is great difference in the
method of growth of corals on the reef flats or slopes of lagoons and
of the exterior faces of coral reefs. The method of solidifying is quite
different from the amount of sand on the flats within a lagoon, the excess
of encrusting Nullipores on the sea faces, and the mass of coral fragments
in constant movement on that face.

The rate of growth of branching corals is quite rapid, as is readily seen
in the channels, cleared out every few years by the natives, leading through
the outer reefs to the canals existing between them and the land. Mr.
Gardiner has calculated from his observations that the coral reefs of
Hulule might grow at the rate of a fathom in sixty years.’ On a bank
of twenty-five to thirty fathoms depth” patches of corals would grow over
its surface wherever conditions were especially advantageous, and the outer
patches might, according to the direction of the current, form a rim, such
parts as were lower forming the passages through the encircling reef. This,
according to him, would account for such atolls as Addu, Goifurfehendu,
Gaha Faro, Makunudu, Wataru, Rasdu, as well as for atolls of greater size,
like Felidu, Ihavandiffulu, Mulaku, and others of the central Maldives
where the corals built up also small atolls on the rims; while on the great
Tiladummati-Miladummadulu Bank the oceanic conditions prevailing have
maintained the individuality of the separate faros.

Mr. Gardiner says no faro has reefs or shoals. This cannot be said
of Rasdu, of the many faros of the northern part of Tiladummati, from
Hanimadu to Kelai and to Gafuri; they are full of small shoals and banks
and sand-bars. Gardiner is right in looking upon the condition of the shoals
and reefs of the bank as greatly influenced by the extent of the circulation
of the water. If the bank is represented by a small lagoon it is of course
limited, but if by a great lagoon as Suvadiva, or a more or less open bank

1 Loe. cit., p. 332.

2 It seems to me that the presence of such genera as Lophohelia on deep banks does not necessarily
imply that they play so important a part in building up the deep coral banks of the Atlantic as to raise

them from four hundred and thirty-five to fifty fathoms, the depth Mr. Gardiner assumes as the upper
limit of growth of reef corals.

INTRODUCTION. xix

as in Tiladummati and Miladummadulu, the circulation becomes almost
oceanic. The reef and islands of portions of each bank will show the effect
of the greater or more limited circulation. This is admirably shown by the
condition of the reefs and heads described by Mr. Gardiner’ as existing
in the “jungle of reefs” in North Malos.

Gardiner calls attention to the contrast of the slight growth of corals off
a reef in an enclosed atoll or clusters like Haddummati or Kolumadulu to
the luxuriant growth off a reef in open banks like Miladummadulu. This,
in such large, comparatively open atolls, is often due quite as much to many
minor local causes as to the prevailing oceanic conditions.

In the Maldives the increase in size of the islands on the outer land rim
of atolls goes on much as we have observed it in the Gilbert, Ellice, Marshall,
and Paumotu Islands. Small islets or islands on the same reef flats are
gradually united by the formation of sand spits on the lee face of the islands,
thus forming bays on the sea face of an atoll; the spits gradually approach,
become connected, and the filling up of the bay from the sea face unites
adjacent islands; their former disconnected state is merely indicated by a
difference in the growth of the vegetation, a distinction which gradually
disappears with years. The bay may also be formed on the lee side by the
throwing up on the sea face of a bar on the edge of the reef flat between
separate islands, and the bay may then be filled up both from the lee and
weather side and thus unite separate islands or sand-bars.

The existence of lagoons completely shut off from the sea in some of the
atolls of the northern part of the Maldives is readily explained by their mode
of formation ; this can be traced in all its stages, from the time the atoll con-
sists of a crescent-shaped island occupying only a portion of the reef flat of
the ring, the remainder of the reef flat of the ring still enclosing a compara-
tively deep lagoon sometimes with six to seven fathoms of water. The
island throws out spits from the horns of the crescent until there is only a
narrow pass left between them, and finally this gap is closed by a sand or
shingle beach and we have the ideal atoll,— a closed ring of land enclosing
a deep lagoon, which exists so rarely but is always the atoll to which one
refers when discussing the coral-reef question. These phenomena are well

1 Loe. cit., p. 166.

XX INTRODUCTION.

illustrated in the long line of crescent-shaped atolls occurring on the east
side of Miladummadulu from Nalandu south as far as Bomasdu. Such a
change, from an open crescentic island flanked by a lagoon to a closed land
rim surrounding a lagoon, may take place with considerable rapidity.
Bodu Mandu is represented on the chart as an open crescent-shaped
island; we found it seventy years later a closed land ring completely sur-
rounding a small lagoon with a depth of two fathoms.

The formation of fresh-water or brackish sinks edged with mangroves’ in
some of the atolls can be traced to the same process which has formed
enclosed lagoons. They occur on Kendikolu, Ekasdu, Nalandu, Madidu,
and Filadu. The sinks differ from the lagoons only in being shallow, hav-
ing been cut off by spits and bars extending across portions of the adjacent
reef flats, covered only by water of a couple of feet or more in depth, while
the enclosed lagoons were cut off from lagoons of atolls of considerable
depth, six to seven fathoms or more.

What has been written above seems to me to point to the uselessness of
our present definition of atolls. There is every possible gradation between
a curved, crescent-shaped open bank of greater or less size and an absolutely
closed ring of land surrounding a lagoon without direct communication with
the sea. The evidence of a great number of atolls scattered on an extensive
bank or plateau like that of Tiladummati and Miladummadulu shows that
reef corals will grow upon any foundation where they find the proper depth,
and that local conditions will determine their existence as fringing reefs,
barrier reefs, or atolls. In fact, in the Maldives, reefs that once formed an
atoll may in time, when the atoll or faro is changed into an island, become
fringing reefs, —a transformation which is quite common both on the outer
lines of islands and on islands in the interior of the larger basins.

The composite atolls of the Maldives have arisen upon minor elevations
upon the greater Maldive plateau which have given to the reef-building corals
a base at the proper depth from which they have risen to the surface. In
such smaller plateaus as North Male, Ari, and others, there is found on the
secondary plateaus in their turn a number of bases on which the atolls and
faros have grown. In the central and most of the northern plateaus the con-

1 Messrs. Gardiner and Willis have called attention to the scarcity of mangroves on the Maldives.

INTRODUCTION. XX

dition of exposure to oceanic currents is such that an immense body of water
is constantly flowing across the plateau during both the northeast and the
southwest monsoons. Where the plateaus are smaller or not so open to the
flow of currents as in such atolls as Addu, Karidu, Goifurfehendu, Gaha
Faro, Wataru, Makunudu, and others, we have only a single atoll developed ;
again in suéh plateaus as those upon which Kolumadulu, Haddummati, and
Suvadiva have developed, the conditions are oceanic, more similar to those
we find in the widely separated atolls of the Ellice, Gilbert, or Marshall
Islands. At the same time the lagoons of the southern atolls are far less
open to oceanic circulation than those of the northern plateaus, and thus we
find fewer banks or islands in the lagoons, and only here and there a trace
of those remarkable rings which are so characteristic a feature in Maldivian
coral-reef scenery. I have seen nothing so striking in my experience of
coral reefs as these rings with a light-colored rim standing out from the
deep blue water surrounding them, like ghosts of an atoll which had sunk,
and enclosing a lighter blue or emerald-colored lagoon indicative of its depth
below the surface.

The conditions existing at the Maldives are repeated to a certain extent
on the Yucatan Plateau, where the Alacran reef, a regular atoll, rises from
it at a depth of about thirty fathoms. It is true that it is the only atoll
on this extensive plateau; but there are also other irregularly shaped
patches of coral reefs. The absence of atolls may be traced to the fact
that the plateau is not within an area of such regular trades as are the
northeast and southwest monsoons in the region of the Maldives. The
central banks in the Tonga Archipelago, the Haapai and Nomuka groups,
with their irregularly shaped lagoon reefs and land-rim flats, remind us also
somewhat of Maldivian conditions.

The moderate strength of the prevailing winds in the Maldives has
greatly influenced many of the characteristic features of its atolls. The
effect of the southwest and of the northeast monsoons cannot be compared
to that of the trades in the Pacific. We have nothing in the Maldives corre-
sponding to the incessant breakers of the huge rollers which pound upon the
reef flats of the Paumotus and of the atolls and barrier reefs of the central
and western Pacific. The boulders thrown upon the reef flats are mere pyg-

XXll INTRODUCTION.

mies compared to the gigantic masses moved on some of the reef flats of the
Pacific Islands. The boulder belts of the Maldives seem like a newly
macadamized road as compared to the quarry blocks which often line miles
of the beaches of some Pacific atolls. But the same forces are at work in
the Maldives only on a diminutive scale, even during the prevalence of the
southwest monsoon. The beaches both sand and shingle are as a whole
remarkably steep; they rarely rise to more than five or six feet, though in
some of the northern atolls they are fully twelve feet high. Mr. Gardiner
informs me he has seen dunes rising to twenty-eight or thirty feet in height.

The Maldives are remarkable for the small amount of coral breccia and
conglomerate or beach rock which is rehandled. The material moved upon
the reef flats is nearly all coral sand,—a great contrast to the Pacific atolls,
where the wearing and crushing and rehandling of the reef rock ledges, both
old and recent, are the most prominent features in the modification of the
reef flats of the Gilbert, Ellice, Marshall, and Paumotu Islands.

There exist in the Maldives, it is true, a number of shingle beaches and
boulder beaches on some of the islands exposed to the full action of the
southwest monsoon both in the southern and northern part of the group;
but these beaches are insignificant as compared with the wide reef flats and
beaches of the Pacific atolls, which are strewn for miles with shingle and
boulders often of a great size. This marked difference is due in the one
case to the comparatively feeble sea and rollers of the southwest monsoon,
in the other to the huge rollers of the southeast and northeast trades acting
continuously with a force which bears no comparison to the forces at work
in the Indian Ocean.

Mr. J. Stanley Gardiner spent over three months at Minikoi; he has
given a detailed account of the atoll.1. According to him the sea is rapidly
encroaching upon the east face of the island. He looks upon the Minikoi
conglomerate, found at the base of the outer beach, as a reef rock similar to
the conglomerate I have observed at so many of the Pacific atolls?; show-
ing that Minikoi, as well as the Pacific atolls, must at one time have been
subject to a slight elevation (which he places at twenty-four feet). The

1 Loe. cit., p. 13.
2 A. Agassiz, Mem. M. C. Z., Vol. XXVIII, Pls. 8, 11, 12, 40, 63, 185, 136, 158, 163, 171.

INTRODUCTION. XXill

boulder zone, as he calls the belt of masses of conglomerate, is what remains
of the elevated coral rock which has not been washed or dissolved away.
It is far more prominent at Minikoi than in the Maldives, but it does not
attain the importance it has in many of the Pacific atolls. Judging from what
I have observed in the Pacific, Mr. Gardiner is justified in assuming the ex-
istence of a lagoon in Minikoi at the time of its elevation, and in considering
the atoll to have been stationary for a considerable period of time on account
of the broad reef flat round most of its circumference.’

It is unfortunate that Mr. Gardiner should speak of a perfect atoll or of
a perfect reef. He thus characterizes not only Minikoi, but also Kiltan,
Chetlat, and Kavaratti among the Laccadives, and speaks of Cardamum as an
atoll either in a late or an early stage. Judging from the charts and in
analogy with the formation of Minikoi, he considers their present land con-
figuration due to elevation and subsequent erosion, as has been shown to
be the case for many Pacific atolls. We might indeed speak of Niau in the
Paumotus as a perfect atoll where the rim is continuous, or of Pinaki or
Maraki where we have only a small narrow boat passage opening through
the otherwise continuous wooded rim of the atoll. These atolls represent
a stage of growth which ultimately will end in the filling of the lagoon and
leaving a central shallow sink or pool as the only trace of the former
existence of a lagoon.

While it is impracticable to subdivide atolls representing areas more or
less circumscribed by belts of land and of reefs awash, or submerged, they
vary from submerged banks through all the intermediate stages of banks
with crescent-shaped rims with or without islands to the so-called perfect
atolls with reef flats and passages and land rims. It seems to me mislead-
ing to refer to Addu as differing from all the other banks of the Maldives
and Laccadives in its more perfectly typical atoll form. Certainly Minikoi,
Goifurfehendu, Rasdu, Gaha Faro, Wataru, Makunudu are as typical atolls
as Addu.

Mr. Gardiner has given an account” of the mode of formation of atolls
which calls upon solution as the essential factor for deepening the lagoon of

1 Mr. Gardiner has given a number of sections of Minikoi on page 30, loc. cit., showing the width of

the reef flats at different points of the atoll.
2 Loc. cit., pp. 180, 181.

XXiv INTRODUCTION.

an atoll after it has “become fairly perfect,”’* though he recognizes “ the
outwash of mud as an important and direct subsidiary cause.” It has con-
siderable bearing on the nature of the deposits on the outer face of an atoll.
The amount of detritus washed out of a lagoon depends again in great
measure on the position of an atoll. If sheltered or exposed to the sweep
of the monsoons, the amount of silt will greatly vary with the depth of
the lagoon, and will be more or less detrimental to the growth of corals
wherever they happen to grow, on the lagoon or sea face.

No one can cross one of the Fiji atolls of the Lau group* without being
struck with the evidence of the action of solution on the islands, islets, and
flats within the lagoon. Such atolls as Fulanga, Ongea, the Yangasa cluster,
the Argo reef, and others of the Lau group show this effect most plainly.
Islands like Kambara, Vatu Leile, Mango, are on a large scale, pitted,
honeycombed, and under-cut by the combined wearing and solvent action
of the sea. But with our present knowledge it seems difficult to assign
to each factor its proportionate value.

Wherever in the Maldives reef rock was examined I found it without
exception of the most modern character, a few exposures as horses on the
beaches and on the reef flats would seem to indicate a slight elevation of
the Maldives. If the existing conditions at the Maldives have been brought
about by subsidence, it is strange we should not find anywhere on this ex-
tensive plateau, from the northernmost atolls as far as Kolumadulu, some
trace, some outlier or some central rocks indicating the nature of the rocks
composing the underlying plateau forming the base upon which the in-
numerable atolls of the Maldives have been formed. The conditions are in
many ways similar to those of the Lau Islands on the eastern plateau of Fiji.
There the elevation has been considerable (to a height of one thousand feet),
and everywhere indications are found of the character and age of the un-
derlying strata. A similar condition exists in the Paumotus, where some of
the tertiary elevated reefs attain an elevation of about three hundred feet.
At the Maldives there is, however, only evidence of a very slight elevation.

1 This does not seem to hold good for Minikoi and other Laccadive atolls with shallow lagoons.
2 Loc. cit., p. 334.
8 A. Agassiz, Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXXIIL., pp. 43, 88.

INTRODUCTION. XXV

In addition to the information to be derived from the charts and from
Mr. Gardiner’s Memoir on the Maldives, he was kind enough on two occa-
sions, after his return from the Maldives, where he preceded me, to give me
valuable details regarding many interesting localities. I can only close by
expressing my admiration for the amount of work Mr. Gardiner was able to
accomplish with the facilities at his command, and for the pluck and energy
displayed by him and his companion, Mr. Cooper, in meeting, in native
boats, the winds and currents which impeded their progress at every point,
to say nothing of the constant discomforts to which they were subjected
during their stay in the Maldives. —

I have especially to thank Admiral Sir J. W. Wharton for the interest
he took in our expedition, and for allowing me access to those of the
original charts of Moresby deposited in the London Hydrographic Office of
the Admiralty.

Newrort, RHopE Isuanp, July 15th, 1903.

STREET IN MALE.

HYDROGRAPHY OF THE MALDIVES.

Plates 1-8 c.

Ir was greatly to our advantage to have as a guide the surveys pub-
lished by the Admiralty.!| We could obtain at a glance an accurate idea
of the points of interest needing further examination and thus worked
with great rapidity, losing no time in obtaining information by a tedious
examination on shore of points of unknown value. This was specially
important in a group of such simplicity_and uniformity of structure as
the Maldives.

It seems to me as if the conditions of portions of the Maldive plateau
were very similar to those existing upon the Yucatan Plateau inside the
one-hundred-fathom line, where from a depth of about forty fathoms rise
independent reefs such as the Triangles, Alacran Reef, the English, Opisbo,
and Arcas Banks.

There is however a great difference in the number of atolls found in the
two regions. On the Maldivian plateau in a distance of over four hundred
and fifty miles there must be hundreds of atolls; while on the Yucatan pla-
teau, three or four only of the patches can be designated as atolls in about
the same length. The number of atolls and islands existing on the Maldives
is estimated to be as great as ten thousand. This is probably an exaggera-
tion. I have counted roughly the number of atolls and rings and islands of
Ari and other groups. There are three hundred and ninety-one in the Ari

1 The Maldives were surveyed during 1834-1836 by Commander Moresby and Lieutenants Powell
and Young. These surveys were published by the Admiralty as sheets 66a, 66}, and 66c (Pls. 1-6).
The survey of Minikoi in 1891 by Commander Hoskyn is published as Admiralty Chart 2738; it also
shows the relations of Minikoi to the Indian peninsula as well as to the Maldives and Laccadives.

The Laccadives and the opposite coast of the Indian peninsula were surveyed in 1848 by officers of
the East Indian Government, and by officers of the Marine Survey of India in 1891-92; see Admiralty
Chart 2737 (PI. 8).

H. O. Chart No. 1591 shows in a convenient form the connection of the Maldives and of Minikoi ©

with the southern part of the Indian peninsula and with Ceylon (Pl. 7). From Admiralty Chart 748 B
(Pl. 7) has been constructed.

2 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

group, eighty-two in North Nilandu, one hundred and twenty-eight in South
Nilandu; but in this enumeration each lagoon reef as well as each reef flat
was counted as a unit, and no account was taken of the many islands which
sometimes occur on each flat. In groups like Ari, North Male, and North
Nilandu, the increase in number could not be great. But in an atoll like
Suvadiva and such groups as South Male, South Nilandu, Mulaku, Koluma-
~ dulu, and Haddummati, where are often a great number of small islands
forming a chain on the extensive reef flats, then the number of islands on
the reef flats we have considered as units becomes very great.

The coral reefs of the Haapai and of the Nomuka groups, the central
part of the Tonga Islands, is another region which may be compared to the
Maldives. Both the Tongan groups are independent banks separated by
narrow and moderately deep channels from the banks to the north and
south of them, and themselves separated by a channel of about five miles
with depths varying from three hundred fathoms in the central part of the
channel to three hundred and fifty and nearly five hundred at its eastern
and western extremities.

The Haapai and Nomuka groups hold to each other much the same
relation which North and South Malosmadulu have. The plateaus of these
groups are well defined by the steep falling off near the one-hundred-fathom
line; from their shallower parts rise secondary plateaus forming the coral
reefs of Nomuka and Haapai. The circular or elongated lagoon reefs of the
Haapai Plateau are flanked on the east and south by linear or circular reefs,
while the Nomuka reefs are flanked by linear reefs, only on a part of the
east face of the Nomuka Plateau.

The Maldive Islands (Pl. 7) are about four hundred miles west of
Ceylon. They extend north and south for a distance of about four hun-
dred and seventy miles; from 7° north latitude to fifty miles south of the
Equator. The central part of the archipelago (Pl. 1) consists of two chains
of groups separated by a channel, varying in width from less than ten
miles between Miladummadulu and North Malosmadulu to over twenty-
five miles between Ari and South Male.

1 Admiralty Charts 2421, 3099, 3100, 474; A. Agassiz, Mem. M. C. Z. Vol. XXVIII, pp. 175,
192-197, Pls. 214-218,

HYDROGRAPHY OF THE MALDIVES. 3

The northern extremity of the Maldives (Pl. 1) consists of a single line
of groups, Ihavandiffulu and Tiladummati flanked on the west by an isolated
atoll, Makunudu. Then follows the eastern chain of the central Maldive
basin, composed of the southern part of Miladummadulu, Fadiffolu, Gaha
Faro, North and South Male, Felidu, Wataru Reef, and Mulaku, while the
western chain of groups consists of North, Middle, and Southern Malosma-
dulu, Goifurfehendu, Ari, and North and South Nilandu. Then comes the
single southern row of groups (Pl. 1), Kolumadulu, Haddummati, Suvadiva,
and Addu.

The depth of the channel between the eastern and western chains varies
from five hundred and thirteen fathoms in the central part of the channel,
between Miladummati and North Malosmadulu, to one hundred and ninety-
four, the greatest depth between South Nilandu and Mulaku (Pl. 1). The
depth of the central basin increases gradually as we go north. It is two
hundred and seventeen fathoms between Ari and South Male; its northern
part is separated by a shallow shelf west of Nortii Male from the deeper
basin to the east of Goifurfehendu, between it and Gaha Faro, where
the greatest depth is two hundred and fifty-eight fathoms, increasing to
two hundred and sixty-six, between South Malosmadulu and Fadiffolu and
to five hundred and thirteen fathoms between North Malosmadulu and
Miladummadulu.

The depths of the channels separating the southern groups of the double
chain north of Kolumadulu indicate that the southern part of the central
plateau dips rapidly to the eastward (PI. 1). The greatest depth of Kuda-
huvadu Channel between Mulaku and Kolumadulu is nearly six hundred
and fifty fathoms, while it is only two hundred and fifty-one fathoms in
the channel between South Nilandu and Kolumadulu.

The eastward dip of the central basin can be traced from Mulaku to
Miladummadulu from the depths of the western channels which are some-
what shallower than those dividing the groups of the eastern face. On the
western flank of the central basin the depth of the centre of the channel
between South Nilandu and North Nilandu is 200 fathoms. On the eastern
flank in the centre of South and North Wataru channels we find 253 and
283 fathoms. The depth of Ariyaddu Channel is 231 fathoms, that of

4 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Fulidu Channel, 374 fathoms. The greatest depth between Goifurfehendu
and South Malosmadulu is 302 fathoms, that of North Kardiva Channel,
372 fathoms. From South Malosmadulu the central basin dips from 236 to
519 fathoms, and between Fadiffolu and Miladummadulu the greatest depth
is 769 fathoms.

The groups which constitute the western and eastern chains of the
central Maldives (Pl. 1) are elevations of considerable size; they form the
rim of an inner basin. The channels between the groups both on the east-
ern and western faces of the basin correspond as far as we know very nearly
in depth with those of the nearest part of the central basin.

Our soundings (Pl. 1) indicate that Kolumadulu is on the southern ex-
tremity of that part of the plateau of the Maldives which extends unbroken
from TIhavandiffulu south to Kolumadulu, or rather of a plateau of which
the undulations are nowhere separated by depths greater than three hun-
dred fathoms; although between Fadiffolu and Miladummadulu a tongue
of deeper water projects to the westward a considerable distance towards
North Malosmadulu.

South of Kolumadulu the conditions are different; Haddummati, Suva-
diva, and Addu occupy small plateaus separated by considerable depths
and distinct from the larger one to the north. Haddummati, although less
than twenty miles south of Kolumadulu, is divided from the northern
plateau by a channel over eleven hundred fathoms in depth (PI. 1).
Suvadiva rises from depths of over eleven hundred fathoms in the One
and half degree Channel, fifty-five miles in width, which separates it from
Haddummati; and finally the small plateau of Addu, forty-five miles south
of Suvadiva, rises from depths of nearly thirteen hundred fathoms, indi-
cated in the central part of the Equatorial Channel.

TOPOGRAPHY OF THE INDIAN OCEAN. 5

TOPOGRAPHY OF THE INDIAN OCEAN WEST OF MALABAR.

Plates 7, 8.

Tue Admiralty Chart (Pl. 7) contains a sufficient number of soundings to
throw very important light on the depths of the Indian Ocean between the
Malabar coast and the region south, and the Laccadives and Maldives. The
one-hundred-fathom line runs nearly parallel to the coast at a distance vary-
ing from twenty-five to sixty miles, and again parallel to this from twenty-
five to thirty miles further west runs the one-thousand-fathom line.

The Laccadives (Pl. 8) rise from a plateau bounded by the one-thousand-
fathom line, separated on the eastern side from the continental shelf by a
channel of from ten to forty miles in width with a depth between ten and
twelve hundred fathoms, the width of the channel and its depth gradually
increasing as we go south; so that between Kalpeni and Kiltan the distance
between the eastern edge of the Laccadives and the one-thousand-fathom
continental line is fully seventy-five miles, and the depth separating it from
the Indian coast more than thirteen hundred fathoms.

Within the one-thousand-fathom line surrounding the Laccadives plateau,
rise quite abruptly the smaller banks and plateaus upon which are the coral
reefs of the group. The five-hundred-fathom line of the plateaus and banks
are within moderate distances of the outer edge of the reef flats. This is
indicated by the charts for Cora Divh, Sesostris Bank, and Bassas de Pedro,
as well as for Cherbaniani Reef, Byramgore, Chetlat, Bitra, Peremul Par,
Kiltan, Cardamum, Piti Bank, and Agatti. The same is the case for the
more southern Laccadives, Elicalpeni Bank, Androth, Karawatti, Suheli Par,
and Kalpeni, which rise from the deeper parts of the channel, over one thou-
sand fathoms, separating the southern Laccadives from the Malabar conti-
nental shelf. It is interesting to note in the Laccadives the existence of
extensive banks similar in outline to some of the Maldive Banks or Plateaus,
such as Cora Divh, Sesostris Bank, the Bassas de Pedro, and Piti Bank with

6 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

its northern extension, Cardamum Bank, which equal in depth and nearly
equal in size the largest plateaus of the Maldivian groups, for Bassas de
Pedro is seventy miles in length, and the Piti Bank about forty. Three of
the larger banks have no islands or lagoon reefs, the others culminate in
coral reefs, having the structure of atolls; some of the small banks are no
larger than many lagoon reefs or faros in the Maldives.

The soundings (PI. 7) also indicate a narrow swale from fifteen to twenty
miles wide, limited by the one-thousand-fathom line, as uniting Ihavandiffulu
in the northern Maldives with Minikoi. A similar ridge has been sketched
out by the Valdivia,’ south of Addu, towards Diego Garcia, a distance of
nearly three hundred miles; but Addu and Diego Garcia are separated by a
much deeper channel, of twenty-five hundred fathoms in depth (PI. 7), fully
as great a depth as the average of the Indian Ocean to the east and west of
the supposed Addu ridge.

A long ridge bounded by the one-thousand-fathom line seems to unite
Kalpeni with Suheli Par with a somewhat deeper channel between it and
the Laccadives to the north, of a greatest depth of over twelve hundred
fathoms; while a much broader and deeper channel separates this rise
from Minikoi and the small banks immediately to the north with a greatest
depth of nearly thirteen hundred fathoms.

The fifteen-hundred-fathom line of the great tongue of the ocean (Pl. 7),
between Ceylon and the Maldives, extends north as far as the ninth degree.
of north latitude, to the east of Minikoi and the Laccadives about halfway
between them. On the west of the Laccadives and Maldives the fifteen-
hundred-fathom line runs close to the western shore of the latter off Ari;
it is not more than eight miles from the one-hundred-fathom line to the
west of the Laccadives; it runs in a northerly direction thirty miles west
of Agatti to west of Cora Divh.

1 Wissenshaftliche Ergebnisse d. Deutschen Tiefsee Expedition auf d. Dampfer ‘ Valdivia.’’

Erster Band, Oceanographie . . . v. Dr. G. Schott, 1902, p. 117., Taf. III.

The soundings on which the existence of this ridge are based are so widely separated that it is not
possible to determine if the deep soundings of twenty-five hundred fathoms to the west of the line run by
the “ Valdivia” do not extend across it as a deep valley fully as deep as the oceanic depths, both to the
east and west. It seems somewhat far-fetched to speak, as does Dr. Schott, of the Carolines, Marshall,
and Gilbert Islands as connected by a plateau with a depth of four thousand metres; and to speak of
coral island districts as generally connected by such plateaus.

TOPOGRAPHY OF THE INDIAN OCEAN. 7

The plateau upon which the Laccadives rise is nearly two hundred miles
in latitude and about ninety in longitude, The two-thousand-fathom line
runs nearly parallel with and at a short distance from the fifteen-hundred-
fathom line, only it does not follow the tongue of the latter to the east of
the Maldives. |

There are other isolated banks to the north of the Laccadives off the con-
tinental slope (Pl. 7). A bank of about twenty miles in length, of a least
depth of one hundred and seventy-eight fathoms, lies in latitude 14° 30'
north, longitude 75° east, it is separated from the one-hundred-fathom con-
tinental line by a depth of more than five hundred fathoms. Farther to the
north in latitude 16° 30° north, longitude 73° east, is Angria Bank, twenty-
five miles in length and twelve in breadth; it is separated from the one-
hundred-fathom line by a channel, with depths varying from one hundred
and seventy to over two hundred fathoms; see Admiralty Chart 2737.

On the same chart are plans of Chetlat and of Kiltan Islands. They
are small atolls, each with an island occupying the eastern reef flat, and a
narrow reef flat on the western face of a shallow lagoon with a couple of
boat passages leading through the western reef. These islands are steep
to on the eastern face, but on the western face shallow soundings extend
towards the one-hundred-fathom line about a quarter of a mile.

Minikoi (A. C. 2758)” is usually considered as one of the Laccadives,
yet it is only sixty-nine miles from the northernmost of the Maldives, while
it is one hundred and eight from the southernmost of the Laccadives.
This is quite an artificial subdivision, and it seems to me that Minikoi and
the Laccadives in the north stand to the Maldives much in the same rela-
tion which Addu and Suvadiva do in the south.

The Laccadives are independent plateaus within the one-thousand-fathom
line. Kalpeni, the southern bank, is separated from Minikoi by a channel
with a depth of twelve hundred and forty-seven fathoms, while Minikoi is

1 The “ Valdivia ’’ took some soundings between Colombo and Suvadiva, the greatest depth obtained
being 4754 metres. Schott, oc. cit., p. 96.

2 Mr. Gardiner * has taken Minikoi as a typical atoll to which he refers the structure of the Mal-
dives; it appears from the chart and from Mr. Gardiner’s description as quite similar to some of the
characteristic atolls of the Pacific. Not only Minikoi but the Laccadives as well as the southernmost
Maldives do not possess the characteristics of the composite Maldive atolls; on the contrary, they greatly

resemble characteristic Pacific atolls.
* Loc. cit., p. 27.

8 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

separated from the northern Maldives by a channel with not over ten hun-
dred and seventy-two fathoms, —depths not greater than those between
Haddummati and Suvadiva, or Suvadiva and Addu. From what has been
stated of the relation between Minikoi and the northern Maldives, it belongs
geographically rather to them than to the Laccadives.

The atoll of Minikoi is somewhat triangular, about five miles long, of
a greatest width of about three miles. The eastern face of the atoll is
flanked by a long narrow island; there is no other land on the outer reef
flat except a small island (Small-pox Island) on the southern part of its west
face. At the northern apex of the atoll, a passage with from ten to twelve
feet of water leads into a lagoon with a greatest depth of seven fathoms.
The western and southern sides of the lagoon are flanked by a wide shallow
reef flat full of coral heads in the southern part, with a few small shallow
banks in the central part of the atoll. Minikoi rises quite abruptly from
a depth of about one thousand fathoms.

The northern Maldives are within the limits of the northeast and south-
west monsoons; at the Equatorial Channel, however, the prevailing winds
from May to December are westerly and southerly winds; the northeast
monsoon reaches the Equator and even beyond it during January, Febru-
ary, and March. Addu is in the region of the variable winds beyond the
influence of the monsoons.

The southwest monsoon blows with greater strength than the northeast,
and it is interesting to trace the modifications brought about by these op-
posite winds on the faces of the islands exposed to their action. One can
trace on the west coasts the action of the southwest monsoon with its
eastern lee, while during the northeast monsoons the eastern face becomes
the windward face. The position of an island, lagoon reef, faro, or ring in
the interior of a group also greatly modifies the action of either of the mon-
soons upon its shores, according to the range they may have, due to the
trend of the island or of the group. Thus a great number of combinations
are formed in position and in time, all having more or less influence upon a
given area. They give us generally simple causes to account for the wast-
ing of an island or for its increase, for the existence of coral sand or of
shingle beaches, or for the presence of reaches or of belts of boulders, for

TOPOGRAPHY OF THE INDIAN OCEAN. 9

the formation of bays by the shutting off of parts of the reef flats either on
the windward or on the leeward side of an atoll, for the existence of horses
of coral reef rock across certain beaches, and for the formation of coral reef
rock patches, pitted and weather-worn, rising above the general level of
the surrounding reef flats, for the formation of sinks, for the throwing up of
dams, or even for the formation of a gap in the rim of an atoll. To climatic
conditions, as affected by the position of islands and groups of islands, we
also owe the degree of development of the flora of -certain sections, or even
its final destruction; in others these forces begin to act only when the
lagoon reefs have risen to sufficient height for the outer rim to come under
the influence of the action of the sea upon its submerged reef flat rims.

The soundings taken by the “ Amra” do not bear out the statement of
Mr. Gardiner that all the various banks of the Maldives (Pl. 7) and Lacca-
dives (Pls. 7, 8) appear to have been built on the same set of foundations,'
Several of the Laccadive banks are separated by depths of more than one
thousand fathoms, and the banks from Cora Divh to Cardamum are enclosed
by the one-thousand-fathom line. Minikoi is similarly isolated, and the
plateau of the fifteen-hundred-fathom line alone can be said to form the
foundation of the Laccadives and Maldives (Pls. 7, 8).

At any rate, the main chain of the Maldives does not lie alone upon a
relatively shallow plateau at a depth of about two hundred fathoms.’ Goi-
furfehendu is separated from South Malosmadulu by a channel of more than
three hundred fathoms, South Malosmadulu from Fadiffolu by over five
hundred fathoms, North Malosmadulu from Miladummadulu by about the
same depth, Makunudu from Tiladummati by a channel of nearly eight
hundred fathoms, Fadiffolu from Karidu by three hundred and seventy-two
fathoms, and from Miladummadulu by seven hundred and sixty-nine fath-
oms, — depths greatly in excess of those separating the banks of the central
Maldives from North Male to South Nilandu and Mulaku (Pl. 1). To the
south, Mulaku is separated from the eastern face of Kolumadulu by a depth
of nearly six hundred and fifty fathoms, and Kolumadulu from Haddum-
mati by over eleven hundred fathoms,— depths nearly as great as those
separating the banks of the southern Maldives (PI. 1).

1 Loe. cit., p. 172. 2 [.oc. cit., pp. 150, 172.

10 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Gardiner has well shown that the topography of the central Maldivian
basin almost precludes the idea that it was formed by the subsidence of a
large central island. But it seems to me he is hardly correct in stating
that the shallower water lies in the centre of the plateau and that the depth
gradually increases in the passages.?— The deepest part of the central basin
between South Male and Ari is in the centre; but as I have stated, there is
a more marked dip of the central plateau to the eastward than to the west-
ward, the eastern passages being deeper than the western ones.

That the precipitous slopes of the banks facing the central basin indicate
that they have been built up of corals or other organisms from a deeper
plateau from a depth of over one hundred fathoms does not seem to me
probable.’ I should on the contrary consider each of these banks as an inde-
pendent one as much as Makunudu, Goifurfehendu, Fadiffolu, Haddummati,
and the southern banks. The existence of such banks as North Malos-
madulu and Kolumadulu,— the former rising from a depth of about two
hundred fathoms at its southern, of nearly five hundred at its northern
extremity, and from over twelve hundred fathoms on. the western side; the
latter rising on the northwest from a depth of over two hundred and fifty
fathoms, on the northeast from over six hundred, and on the southeast from
over eleven hundred fathoms,— can only be explained on the supposition
that they are independent banks. The existence of a deeper central valley
between North Malosmadulu and Miladummadulu, off Fadiffolu and Koloma-
dulu, developed by the soundings of the ‘“‘Amra,” shows a far greater irregu-
larity in the depth of the plateau than is assumed by Mr. Gardiner,‘ and
naturally modifies to a considerable extent the conclusions he draws from
the existence of such a great level central plateau.®

According to Darwin® there has been a disseverment of large atolls into
smaller ones in the Maldives, but that “this process can be observed only in
the northern half of the group, where the atolls have imperfect margins con-
sisting of detached basin-formed reefs.” He imagines the strong currents

1 Loe. cit., p. 172. 2 Ibid.

5 Darwin * calls attention to the steepness of the slope off the Maldives in spite of the sandy nature
of the bottom of the slopes, slopes which exceed fifty-five degrees.

4 Loc. cit., p. 174. 5 Foc. cit., ps ltd. ® Coral Reefs, p. 143.
1) p P
* Coral Reefs, p. 31.

TOPOGRAPHY OF THE INDIAN OCEAN. ill

which flow across these atolls to have broken ‘through the many wide
breaches in their margin,’ and to have removed the finer sediment and
deepened the channels. Such channels as divide Middle Malosmadulu from
North and South Malosmadulu and the separate parts would then form
distinct atolls like those of Ari and Ross, or the two Nilandus. “ Further
subsidence would render these channels unfathomable, and the dissevered
portions would then resemble Felidu, Mulaku, and Horsburgh, which are
related only in proximity.”

”?

From what the soundings made by the “ Amra” teach, the ingenious
suggestions of Darwin regarding the formation of the Maldives are not
borne out. Nor does it seem possible, as he suggests, that the Maldive
Archipelago originally existed asa barrier reef of nearly the same dimensions
as that of New Caledonia. The central basin which separates the eastern
and western Maldives has no analogue in New Caledonia, and even if the
whole island were to subside, the section across the centre would in no way
resemble that of the great Maldivian basin with its fringe of independent

atoll-like groups.

12 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

ANALYSIS OF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AMRA.”
Plates 1-8 ¢.

A sounptne (No. 76) taken in the centre of Gallandu Channel between
Tiladummati and Ihavandiffulu (Pl. 8a, fig. 3) gave a depth of two hundred
and fifty-one fathoms with a bottom of coarse coral sand.

On the Admiralty Chart? are a number of soundings off Ihavandiffulu,
running into ten hundred and seventy-five fathoms, at a distance of eleven
miles to the westward, normal to the trend of the west face (Pl. 8a, fig. 1).
The outer edge of the slope must be quite flat, as nine hundred and ninety-
two fathoms was obtained five miles from the face of the atoll. The sound-
ings within a distance of five miles off the northern, the northeastern, and
southeastern faces indicate a slope similar to that off the western face. The
sounding of seven hundred and eighty-one fathoms, seven miles to the east
of Kelai, even indicates a somewhat flatter slope (Pl. 8a, fig. 2), off the
northeast horn of Tiladummati. From this a tongue of deep water runs
westward towards the ridge connecting Tiladummati with Thavandiffulu
(Pie 2).

The other lines we sounded to ascertain the slope of the oceanic faces of
the Maldives are off North Male (Pl. 8c, fig. 24), off the west face of North
Malosmadulu (PI. 8c, fig. 26), off the west face of Ari (Pl. 8c, fig. 25), off
the east face of South Male (Pl. 8c, fig. 27), and off Addu (Pl. 8¢, fig. 21),
in addition to the lines between the southern Maldives (Pl. 8c, figs. 22, 23).

Line across the channel between Miladummadulu and the northern ex-
tremity of Makunudu (PI. 8a, fig. 7).

Makunudu is separated from Miladummadulu by a channel with an
oceanic bottom of a greatest depth of nearly eight hundred fathoms; it
rises from a small secondary plateau on the western slope of the northern

1 The numbers refer to the List of Soundings, p. 29. 2 Admiralty Chart, 66 a.

ANALYSIS OF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AMRA.” 13

part of the Maldives. One mile west of the northern extremity of the faro,
southwest of Goadu Island, we sounded in five hundred and four fathoms
with a bottom of fine greenish sand with Globigerinae (No. 73). Four miles
from the same starting-point in the centre of the channel, we obtained seven
hundred and ninety-two fathoms (No. 74) with a bottom of broken shells.
One mile east from Makunudu we sounded in five hundred and sixty-six
fathoms with a bottom of coarse coral fragments (No. 75). Its western face
must be steep and cannot be far from the fifteen-hundred-fathom line.

The soundings between Miladummadulu and North Malosmadulu (Pl. 8 a,
fig. 5) seem to indicate that a tongue of deep water extends northward from
the centre of the channel between Fadiffolu and Miladummadulu (PI. 3)
towards the northern part of the central basin, and also southward towards
the western point of Fadiffolu.

We ran three lines of soundings across the northern part of the central
basin of the Maldives.

A northern line across its narrowest part between Mavila (Miladumma-
dulu) and Furidu (North Malosmadulu) (Pl. 8 a, fig. 5).

One mile west of Mavila, we sounded in four hundred and twelve fathoms
(No. 70) with a bottom consisting of green coral sand mixed with broken
shells and Pteropods. Four and a half miles from the same point in the
centre of the channel, we obtained five hundred and thirteen fathoms
(No. 71) with a bottom of fine coral sand and Globigerina ooze. One mile
east of Furidu, we obtained two hundred and eighty-six fathoms (No. 72)
with fine coral sand and Globigerinae. The soundings we took off the
west coast of North Malosmadulu (Pl. 8c, fig. 26) indicate a less steep slope
than further south, off the western part of the plateau. We obtained
off Ari (Pl. 8¢, fig. 25), at a distance of seven miles, a depth of nearly
fifteen hundred fathoms (No. 9); while off the coast of North Malosmadulu
we sounded in twelve hundred and forty-seven fathoms (No. 65), at a dis-
tance of eight miles.

A second line across the northern basin ran from Kanifuri (Fadiffolu) to
Mabaru (South Malosmadulu) (Pl. 8¢, fig. 28).

14 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

One and a half miles west of Kanifuri we found five hundred and nine-
teen fathoms (No. 57), with a bottom of sticky yellow coral ooze, with but
few Globigerinae and little sand and Pteropod shells. Five and a quarter
miles from the starting-point in the centre of the channel, we sounded in
three hundred and sixty-six fathoms (No. 58), with a bottom of green, fine
coral ooze, with few Globigerinae. A mile and a half from Mabaru Island
the depth had decreased to two hundred and thirty-six fathoms (No. 59),
with a bottom of broken shells and coral sand.

The plateau evidently dips rapidly to the eastward from the centre of
the channel.

Our third line across the northern central basin ran to the west of Gaha
Faro towards Goifurfehendu; the soundings of the other extremity of the line
from Goifurfehendu east were taken while running to Goifurfehendu after
leaving South Malosmadulu (Pl. 8a, fig. 8).

One and a half miles to the west of the western entrance to Gaha Faro,
we sounded in one hundred and forty-nine fathoms (No. 49), with a bottom
consisting of coral sand and masses of large Globigerinae.’’ Nine miles from
our starting-point, we obtained two hundred and fifty-eight fathoms (No. 50).
In continuation of this line we obtained, seven miles east of Goifurfehendu,
a depth of two hundred and thirty-seven fathoms (No. 60), with a bottom
of fine green sand and masses of Globigerinae or Globigerinae sand. One
and a half miles east of Goifurfehendu, we found two hundred and twelve
fathoms (No. 61), with fine green sand and Globigerinae sand, showing a
comparatively shallow plateau extending to the west of Gaha Faro towards
Goifurfehendu, though it deepens somewhat to the west of Goifurfehendu,
as is shown by the line from Goifurfehendu to South Malosmadulu, which
has a greatest depth of three hundred and two fathoms in the centre of the
channel separating them. The plateau again deepens to the northward,
as is shown by the depth obtained between Gaha Faro and Fadiffolu, which
varies between two hundred and forty-one and three hundred and seventy-
two fathoms (Nos. 51, 56).

1 Tn the channels open to the sea, Globigerinae often occur in such quantities that we might with
advantage call that kind of bottom Globigerina sand.

ANALYSIS OF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AMRA.” 15

Line off the west coast of the southern part of North Malosmadulu
(Pl. 8c, fig. 26).

Eight miles off the coast in a northwesterly direction from Femfuri
Faro we sounded in twelve hundred and forty-seven fathoms (No. 65).
One mile off Maregiri, we obtained three hundred and seventy-eight fathoms
(No. 66), and already found a bottom consisting of green coral sand mixed
with Pteropod shells and Globigerinae. Pteropod shells are common in
shallow soundings near the atolls; we collected them in number, as well as
Globigerinae, in nearly all our surface tows made off the outer faces of
the archipelago.

We did not sound any of the Malosmadulu Channels (Pl. 84; figs. 9, 10),
the soundings on the Admiralty Charts being sufficiently numerous to
define their depth.

According to the Admiralty Chart (No. 66a), South Malosmadulu is
separated from Middle Malosmadulu by a channel from two to three miles
wide, with soundings in the axis of the channel ranging from one hundred
and ten to one hundred and forty fathoms. Middle Malosmadulu is sepa-
rated from North Malosmadulu by Moresby Channel, somewhat wider than
the channel to the south of it, about three miles in width, with soundings
in the centre of the channel ranging from one hundred and twenty to one
hundred and thirty-five fathoms.

Line across the channel between Furudu, (Goifurfehendu) and Madu-
wari (South Malosmadulu) (PI. 8 4, fig. 10).

One mile north of our Goifurfehendu base-line we obtained two hundred
and forty-eight fathoms (No. 62), with a bottom of coarse coral sand and
broken shells. In the centre of the channel, three and one-half miles from
the starting-point, we sounded in three hundred and two fathoms (No. 63) ;
bottom of coral sand and broken shells. One mile from Maduwari we
sounded in one hundred and ninety-three fathoms (No. 64), bringing up in
the claspers a few fragments of broken corals. The bottom of this channel
is apparently covered with coarse coral sand, broken shells, and corals.

16 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Line across the channel between Fadiffolu and Miladummadulu (PI. 8a,
fig. 4). From Hurawali (Fadiffolu) to Karema (Miladummadulu).

One mile north of Hurawali we found three hundred and forty-two
fathoms (No. 67), hard bottom. Four miles north, in the centre of the
channel, we obtained seven hundred and sixty-nine fathoms (No. 68).
One mile south of Karema we sounded in three hundred and forty fathoms
(No. 69). Unfortunately, no sample of the bottom of this channel was
obtained. No. 67 indicated a hard current-swept bottom.

Line across Kardiva Channel, from Gaha Faro to Aligau (Fadiffolu) (Pl. 84,
fig. 11).

One and a half miles north of Gaha Faro we sounded in two hundred
and forty-one fathoms (No. 51), and brought up a fragment of Oculina. Six
miles north of Gaha Faro, halfway to Karidu Island, we obtained two
hundred and fifty-eight fathoms (No. 52), with a hard bottom; and a mile
and a half south of Karidu we got two hundred and ninety-eight fathoms
(No. 53), bringing up coral sand and small fragments of Pteropod shells.
One mile north of Karidu we found three hundred and twelve fathoms
(No. 54), and brought up small pieces of pumice from a hard bottom. In
the centre of the channel between Karidu and Fadiffolu, seven and a half
miles north of Karidu Island, there seems to be a distinct ridge, as we
only obtained one hundred and ninety-seven fathoms (No. 55), with a bot-
tom of clean coarse Globigerinae sand. One and one-half miles south of
Aligau (Fadiffolu), we sounded in three hundred and seventy-two fathoms
(No. 56), with a bottom consisting of coarse coral sand and Globigerinae
sand. The edge of the Maldivian plateau drops gradually to the north of
Gaha Faro from two hundred and forty-one to three hundred and seventy-
two (Nos. 51, 56) near Fadiffolu.

The northern part of the central basin is very open to the sea (Pl. 1);
between Gaha Faro and Fadiffolu it slopes to the east, only a few higher
knolls, like Karidu, and the sounding of one hundred and ninety-seven
fathoms (No. 55) to the north, indicating its boundary.

ANALYSIS OF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AMRA.” ay)

Line from North Male to Gaha Faro (PI. 8a, fig. 6).

In the centre of the channel, between Gaha Faro and North Male, we
obtained a depth of one hundred fathoms (No. 48). The claspers only
brought up a fragment of pumice, covered with Bryozoa, Algae, and
Nullipores.

Mr. Gardiner states that pumice was found on all beaches of the Mal-
dives, and that it was not known before the eruption of Krakatoa in 1883.
But pumice must have found its way on the beaches of the Maldives
earlier, as it occurs inland on many of the islands.

The bottom of all the channels separating the composite atolls of the
central Maldives appears to be quite flat, the soundings off shore drop
rapidly ; generally at a distance of a mile and a half from either face they
attain a depth but little inferior to the greatest depths in the centre
of the channels.

Line of soundings west of North Male (PI. 8c, fig. 24).

One mile due west, off the normal to the pass west of Hembadu, in the
centre of the western face of North Male, we obtained one hundred and
twenty fathoms, with coral sand (Pl. 1). At a distance of three and one-half
miles the depth only increased to one hundred and fifty-nine fathoms with
a bottom of sticky coral sand, and at seven and one-half miles we ran only
into one hundred and eighty-six fathoms, with a bottom of fine green sand
filled with Globigerinae.

Judging from this line of soundings and from the soundings existing’
between the northern part of Ari and Rasdu and Toddu, as well as to the
westward of these atolls, these atolls are on the western edge of a shallow
plateau extending west of North Male and north to Goifurfehendu. This
plateau separates the northern part of the central basin from the southern ;
it drops off very rapidly to the westward of Ari, if we may judge from the
line of soundings we ran to the west of the pass south of Mandu (Ari)
(Pl. 8c, fig. 25). Ata distance of three miles off the normal we ran into
nine hundred and eight fathoms (No. 8), and eight miles off Mandu Pass we
obtained fourteen hundred and ninety-eight fathoms (No. 9). The bottom

1 Admiralty Chart, 66 a.
2

18 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

in the first sounding was composed of light-green fine coral sand with
numerous Globigerinae. In fourteen hundred and ninety-eight fathoms
we found bluish ooze with a greater number of Globigerinae.

Line of soundings across Wadu Channel (PI. 8 4, fig. 19).

We ran a line normal to the pass between Male and Toddy Islands
(North Male), to Wadu Island (South Male). One mile southwest of Male
Island we found two hundred and sixty-five fathoms (No. 1); hard bottom.
In the centre of the channel the depth was somewhat less: two hundred
and fifty-nine fathoms (No. 2), hard bottom, and one mile from Wadu two
hundred and thirty-nine fathoms (No. 3), with broken corals and shells.
The deepest part of the channel is near North Male, the bottom of the
channel rising slightly towards South Male. The flat plateau of Wadu
channel extends well to the eastward, as we obtained three hundred and
nineteen fathoms (No. 47) nearly five miles to the eastward, about two and
one-half miles northeast off the outer reef flat of Huras, South Male.

The sounding of one thousand and five fathoms two and one half miles
from Hulule Island, given by Mr. Gardiner,’ indicates either a sharp bight
to the westward in the one-thousand-fathom line, or that Mr. Gardiner may
have used too light a weight (fifteen pounds) to run out his line. We
found the one-thousand-fathom line (No. 45) at least six miles off the cen-
tral part of the east face of South Male, and in our own soundings a sixty
pound shot none too heavy for the deeper soundings in passes where the
currents often ran with great violence.

Everywhere in the Maldives the strong currents appear to extend to the
bottom of the channels separating the banks; they sweep the bottom clean,
and must, as has been observed by Mr. Gardiner, exert considerable in-
fluence in keeping them clear, and may also have greatly contributed to
their origin.

Line running east of South Male, from Guru Pass (Pl. 8c, fig. 27).
Three miles due east of Guru Pass we sounded in nine hundred and sixty

1 Mr. Gardner’s * sounding lies between our soundings of two hundred and fifty-nine (No. 2) and
three hundred and nineteen fathoms (No. 47) off the southeast corner of Male.

* Loc. cit., p. 153.

ANALYSIS OF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AMRA.” 19

fathoms (No. 44), with a bottom of fine greenish coral sand with many
Pteropod shells and masses of Globigerinae. Eight miles from our starting-
point, we obtained twelve hundred and thirty-eight fathoms (No. 45), with
a bottom of fine grayish ooze containing mineral particles and many
Globigerinae. Twelve miles east of South Male, in continuation of the same
line, the depth has only increased to twelve hundred and seventy fathoms
(No. 46), with a bottom of fine gray Globigerinae ooze. We also sounded
one mile normal to the northeast horn of South Male, and obtained a depth
of three hundred and nineteen fathoms (No. 47), hard bottom. The only
other soundings off the east slope of the Maldive plateau are those off the
northern horn of Tiladummati and off Ihavandiffulu in Admiralty Chart, 66a,
and the soundings taken by the “Amra” on the way to Colombo from
Thavandiffulu (Nos. 77-79).

We ran two lines of soundings across the southern part of the central
basin of the Maldives, the one partly to the north, the other to the south
of the lines run across this basin by Mr. Gardiner.’ His soundings of the
central basin agree well with those of the “ Amra.”?

Northern line of soundings from Waregili (west face of South Male) to
the east face of Ari (Kadibudu) (Pl. 84, fig. 12).

Across the basin separating the eastern from the western chain of groups
we obtained, two miles off the west face of South Male, a depth of one
hundred and eighty fathoms (No. 4) with fine greenish coral sand, many
Globigerinae, and a few Pteropods. Hight miles further west we found
the same bottom in a depth of two hundred and eight fathoms (No. 4).
Sixteen miles further, a point at about the same distance east of Ari,
the depth was two hundred and seventeen fathoms (No. 6), and three
miles off the east face of Ari it had diminished to one hundred and
seventy-seven fathoms (No. 7).

These soundings show a very flat basin dropping rapidly on both sides,
within a short distance of the edges of the channel, to nearly the depth of
the central part of the channel, with a bottom of an oceanic character:

Globigerinae mixed with Pteropods.

1 Loc. cit., p. 4, fig. 2. 2 Loe. cit., p. 152, Pl. X.

20 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Southern line across the central basin ran from Konipafuri (South
Nilandu) towards Kureli (Mulaku) (Pl. 84, fig. 13).

Two and a half miles off Konipafuri we obtained one hundred and sixty-
one fathoms (No. 13) with a bottom of fine coral sand mixed with Pteropod
shells and green Globigerinae. At a distance of seven and one-half miles
from our starting-point we sounded in one hundred and eighty-one fathoms
(No. 14), the bottom consisting of fine green coral sand with many
Globigerinae and shells of Spirialis and many other Pteropods. Twelve
and one-half miles from the starting-point we obtained one hundred and
ninety-four fathoms (No. 15) with very fine green coral sand mixed with
Globigerinae shells of Spirialis and other Pteropods; and about four miles
north of Kureli we found a similar bottom in two hundred and five fathoms
(No. 16).

This channel shows, after the first abrupt drop off shore, the same general
flat bottom as across the northern part between South Male and Ari, but
with a slight increase in depth as we go east from South Nilandu to
Mulaku. The bottom of the southern part of the central basin is like the
northern part oceanic in character, composed of Globigerinae mixed with
Pteropods.

To determine the western slope of the centra: part of the Maldive
plateau we ran a line from Mandu Pass, west of Ari, into nearly fifteen
hundred fathoms (Pl. 8c, fig. 25). Three miles off the normal to Mandu
Pass we sounded in nine hundred and eight fathoms (No. 8); fine light-
green coral sand bottom and Globigerinae. Eight miles off the starting-
point we obtained a sounding of fourteen hundred and ninety-eight fathoms
(No. 9); with a bottom of light bluish-gray fine coral sand and ooze, with
many Globigerinae. This part of the Maldivian plateau falls off quite rap-
idly to the westward, more so than the northern part of the western slope
(see Nos. 65, 66; 73-75, and Admiralty Chart, 66 a).

Line across Fulidu Channel, from Fulidu Pass, east of Fulidu Island,
towards Hutekolu (South Male) (PI. 83, fig. 16).
One mile north of Fulidu Pass, east of Fulidu Island, we obtained two

ANALYSIS OF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AMRA.” 21

hundred and seventy-six fathoms (No. 41), with a bottom consisting of fine
coral sand, Pteropod shells, and masses of greenish Globigerinae. Four
miles from the starting-point, halfway across the channel, we sounded in
three hundred and seventy-four fathoms (No. 42), bringing up in the cup
fragments of white corals, coated with manganese. One and one-half miles
south of South Male Atoll (Hutekolu), we obtained two hundred and forty-
three fathoms (No. 43), bringing up in the cup small fragments of coral.
The nature of the bottom of the main channels between the composite
atolls of the east or west chain varies greatly, some of them having, like
Wadu, Eastern Kudahuvadu, Fadiffolu to Miladummadulu channels, a hard
bottom swept clear; in others the bottom is composed of Globigerinae and
Pteropods, as in Fulidu and Kardiva channels, and others of coral sand and
broken shells, as Ariyaddu, Wataru, and Gallandu, or coral sand and Glo-
bigerinae, as in Veimandu, West Kudahuvadu, Gaha Faro to Goifurfehendu.

Line of soundings from Mulaku to Wataru Reef and to Felidu (Pl. 84,
fig. 15).

Halfway between Mulaku and Wataru Reef, in the centre of the chan-
nel, we found a depth of two hundred and fifty-three fathoms (No. 39).
The northern channel separating Wataru Reef from Felidu is somewhat
deeper than the southern one; we obtained two hundred and eighty-
three fathoms (No. 40) in the centre of the channel, halfway from Wat-
aru Reef to Felidu Atoll, the bottom consisting of broken corals, shells,
and of coarse coral sand.

Line of soundings across Ariyaddu Channel from Ariadu (Ari) to the
nearest point (clump of trees) in the northern face of North Nilandu
(Pl. 84, fig. 14).

One mile from Ariadu Pass we sounded in one hundred and forty-nine
fathoms (No. 10). In the centre of the channel we obtained two hundred
and thirty-one fathoms (No. 11), the bottom consisting of fragments of
corals and of coral sand and broken shells. One mile from North Nilandu
we sounded in one hundred and seventy-seven fathoms (No. 12), with
a coarse coral sand bottom, Ariyaddu Channel showing the same flat bottom

22 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

characteristic of other channels separating the groups of the two sides of
the central basin of the Maldives. The bottom of this channel seems
to be composed wholly of coral sand and broken shells.

A sounding of two hundred fathoms being marked in the Admiralty
Chart (66%) in the centre of the channel between North and South
Nilandu, and indicating the same general depth found in other channels,
we did not think it necéssary to make any other soundings while running
across to South Nilandu from Magudu.

Mr. Gardiner sounded this channel and obtained a greatest depth of
two hundred and thirty-five fathoms in the centre of the channel.’

Line of soundings between Mulaku and Kolumadulu across the Kuda-
huvadu Channel from Mulaku to Wilifuri (Pl. 8 0, fig. 18).

Four miles south of Mulaku we obtained four hundred and three fath-
oms (No. 17), with a hard rocky bottom. Nine miles from our starting-
point in the centre of the channel, we ran into six hundred and forty-nine
fathoms (No. 18), with a fine gray ooze. Two miles from Wilifuri, we
sounded in two hundred and eighty-two fathoms (No. 19), a depth consider-
ably greater than we found at the same distance off the west face of
Mulaku.

The eastern opening of Kudahuvadu Channel is deeper than the corre-
sponding western channel separating South Nilandu from Kolumadulu. The
southern extremity of the central basin of the Maldive plateau dips rapidly
towards the east, judging from the soundings across Kudahuvadu (Nos. 17-
19, 56-38) and Veimandu (Nos. 20-23) channels.

Line of soundings across Kudahuvadu Channel, between Kandufuri
(Kolumadulu) and Maimbudu (South Nilandu) (Pl. 83, fig. 17).

We obtained one and a half miles off Kandufuri two hundred and fifty-
three fathoms (No. 36), with a bottom of coarse coral sand mixed with
broken Pteropod shells. Halfway across the channel, six and a half miles
from our starting-point, we sounded in two hundred and fifty-one fathoms

T Loe: cit., p. 152; Pl. X:

ANALYSIS OF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AMRA.” 23

(No. 37), with the same sort of bottom as nearer Kolumadulu. Within a
mile and a half from Maimbudu (South Nilandu), we obtained two hun-
dred and two fathoms (No. 38), with a bottom of fine greenish coral sand
mixed with many Globigerinae.

The bottom of the western Kudahuvadu Channel is oceanic in character,
not only in the centre, but also quite close to South Nilandu, Mulaku, and
Kolumadulu; while the bottom of eastern Kudahuvadu Channel (Nos. 17,

19) is hard and swept clean by currents.

Line across the Veimandu Channel from Timarafuri Pass (Kolumadulu)
to Munafuri (Haddummati) (Pl. 8 ¢, fig. 20).

Two and a half miles off Timarafuri we were already in seven hundred
and thirty-eight fathoms (No. 20), with a bottom of coarse coral sand and
broken shells. Seven miles off the starting-point in the centre of the
channel, the depth had increased to eleven hundred and eighteen fathoms
(No. 21); the bottom was still made up of coarse coral sand, though some-
what finer than that of the previous sounding. Two miles west of Waduni
Pass we obtained eight hundred and forty-three fathoms (No. 22). Three
quarters miles off Haddummati, we sounded in eight hundred and ninety-
seven fathoms (No. 23), with a bottom of a mixture of coarse and fine coral
sand with many Globigerinae.

Kolumadulu forms a bar across the southern extremity of the central
basin of the Maldives, on the two sides of which to the north are arranged
the great Maldive atolls, while to the south, including Kolumadulu, the
Maldives form only a single line of atolls.

These soundings are interesting as showing the very sudden drop in
depth off the plateaus on the two faces of the Veimandu Channel. They
also illustrate the gradual increase in depth of the channels separating the
single groups as we go south, and the greater isolation of these plateaus as
compared to the shallower channels which separate the higher plateaus of
the northern and of the parallel chains of groups of the Maldives.

The depth of the centre of Veimandu Channel is as great as that in the
channel separating the northern Maldives from Minikoi (PI. 7), though in
one case the channel is only sixteen miles wide, while in the other the

24 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

distance is fully seventy miles, and its greatest depth ten hundred and
fifty-seven fathoms. Still further north, the Laccadive group, small iso-
lated summits, with comparatively small atolls, resemble in every respect
the smaller and widely separated atolls of the Ellice and Gilbert groups, —
a series of independent summits separated by at least two thousand fathoms
of water and scattered over a distance of fifteen degrees of latitude. The
distance from Minikoi to the most distant Laccadive bank is not more than
four hundred and twenty miles, with depths of little over one thousand
fathoms.

Line from Haddummati to Suvadiva (the One and half degree Channel)
(PL. 8 ¢, fig. 22).

Our starting-point was halfway across the normal between the reef flats
off Gadu and Hitadu; four miles south we obtained nine hundred and
eighty-seven fathoms (No. 24), with a bottom composed of fine coral sand,
broken shells, and Globigerinae. Fourteen miles south of Haddummati,
in ten hundred and seventy-eight fathoms (No. 25), we brought up small,
flat, irregularly shaped manganese nodules, from the size of coarse sand
to half an inch in length. Twenty-nine miles south of Haddummati, about
in the centre of the channel, we sounded in eleven hundred and thirty
fathoms (No. 26), and brought up a mass of large light-green Globigerinae,
so abundant that they might be called Globigerina sand. Forty-four miles
south of the starting-point we obtained ten hundred and eighty-six fathoms
(No. 27), with the same Globigerina sand bottom as in the previous sound-
ing; and two and three-quarters miles from the northern point of Suvadiva?”
we found eight hundred and ninety-nine fathoms (No. 28), with a coarse
greenish coral sand bottom, mixed with fragments of broken shells and
corals. The channel between Haddummati and Suvadiva is a very level
plateau of an average depth of somewhat over a thousand fathoms. The

1 Tt is interesting to find this typical deep-sea oceanic deposit at such moderate depths, and
surrounded, as far as we know, by Globigerinae or Pteropod deposits. Further south, near Addu,
we also found manganese coating fragments of coral at very moderate depths (three hundred and
seventy-six fathoms). North, in the Fulidu Channel, fragments of coral coated with manganese were
obtained in three hundred and seventy-four fathoms. The coated fragments were much in the con-
dition of similar fragments dredged in the Straits of Florida at abont the same depth.

2 A small nameless faro north of Matu Island.

ANALYSIS OF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AMRA.” 25

slope both of Haddummati and Suvadiva is very abrupt. We ran into nine
hundred fathoms at from three to four miles from the edges of the group.

Soundings across the Equatorial Channel, from Suvadiva to Addu, wa
Fua Mulaku (PI. 8c, fig. 23).

Six miles south by east from the normal, across Gan Channel, we obtained
ten hundred and forty fathoms (No. 29), with a bottom consisting of fine
greenish coral sand and Globigerinae. Twenty-one miles from the same
starting-point we sounded in twelve hundred and sixty-two fathoms (No. 30),
with a bottom of greenish Globigerina ooze. Thirty-one miles from our
starting-point, and about three and one-half miles from Fua Mulaku, we
sounded in twelve hundred and ninety-two fathoms (No. 31), the bottom
consisting of fine greenish coral sand mixed with broken shells. Fua
Mulaku’ rises quite steeply from the bottom of the channel, separating
Suvadiva and Addu. .

On our way north from Addu we made a sounding about halfway from
Addu to Fua Mulaku in ten hundred and forty-eight fathoms (No. 55), with
a bottom consisting of greenish Globigerina sand. With the exception of
the manganese nodule patch the bottom of the Equatorial and of the One
and half degree Channel is oceanic. It is covered with Globigerina sand.
Coral sand and Pteropod bottom are only found on the upper slopes, in close
proximity to Suvadiva and Addu.

The two soundings of ten hundred and twenty-seven and twelve hundred
and forty-three fathoms, indicated on the chart to the west of our sound-
ings, and of thirteen hundred and twenty-nine fathoms to the east, seem
to indicate the existence of a broad plateau of comparatively uniform depth
on both sides of the line we ran.

Line south of Addu (PI. 8¢, fig. 21).

We hoped to extend a line of soundings from Addu far enough south to
show how far its slope extended, and how far the Maldivian ridge or plateau
was connected with the Chagos Archipelago (see p. 6). Unfortunately we

1 It was unfortunately too rough for us to attempt a landing on Fua Mulaku, both on our way to
and from Addu.

26 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

were unable to carry out this line, and owing to the heavy sea were com-
pelled to abandon sounding at a distance of about three miles south of Addu
(Nos. 33, 34), where we sounded in seven hundred and eighteen fathoms,
with a bottom of coral sand mixed with fragments of Pteropod shells. At
a distance of one and one-half miles south of Addu we found three hundred
and seventy-six fathoms (No. 32), with a bottom of small fragments of coral

coated with manganese.

Line from Murdu (Ihavandiffulu) to Colombo.

On our way back to Ceylon from Ihavandiffulu we took a few soundings
to fill gaps in the hydrography of that part of the Indian Ocean. Thirty-
six miles from Murdu, in latitude 7 4’ north, longitude 73° 34’ east, we
obtained fourteen hundred and sixty fathoms (No. 77), with a bottom of
fine green ooze and Globigerinae. Fifty-five miles to the eastward of this
sounding, in latitude 7° 4’ north, longitude 74° 27’ east, we obtained fif-
teen hundred and forty-seven fathoms (No. 78), with a bottom composed
of fine green Globigerina ooze. Ninety miles still further to the east, in
latitude 7° 7’ north, longitude 75° 46’ east, we ran into nine hundred and
sixty-four fathoms (No. 79), with a bottom of fine green sticky ooze filled
with Globigerinae. These soundings are intercalated with others already
on the chart, and make a fairly good section from the Maldives to Ceylon.
The soundings on the chart round the northern extremity of the Maldives
give the slope of that part of the plateau.

The line towards Colombo brings out clearly the deep wide tongue of
the Indian Ocean, of fully fifteen hundred fathoms, which extends north-
ward and separates the Maldivian plateau from the ridge of the Indian
continent and its continental shelf. |

Mr. Gardiner,’ while on the steamer “ Tleafaee,” sounded across three of
the western and two of the eastern channels of the central Maldives. His
soundings across the western Kudahuvadu Channel, being somewhat to
the east of those made by the “Amra,” are shallower; one deeper sound-
ing indicates the western terminus of a deeper bight, running west from
the centre of the eastern Kudahuvadu Channel.

bis Clty jos Sh Teh Jab oe

ANALYSIS QF THE SOUNDINGS TAKEN BY THE “AMRA.” 27

Mr. Gardiner also found thirty-five fathoms’ greater depth than is indi-
cated on the Admiralty Chart in the channel between North and South
Nilandu. His soundings across the North and South Wataru channels
are a few fathoms less than those obtained by the “ Amra,’ as are also his
soundings across Wadu Channel.

Mr. Gardiner’s soundings across Ariyaddu Channel are well to the east-
ward of the central line of the channel. They are parallel but to the west-
ward of the axis of the central basin. His lines from the centre of Ari to
Wadu Channel, across the central basin, and a southern line from Felidu to
North Nilandu, do not indicate any difference in the topography of the
southern central basins from that shown by the lines of soundings taken
by the “Amra.” There are a few discrepancies between the soundings
as indicated on his chart, Plate X., and the text, but they are not of
importance.

Lucas Sounpinc MAcdINE.

LIST OF THE SOUNDINGS

TAKEN BY THE B.I.S. S. “AMRA,” DURING A CRUISE IN THE
MALDIVES.*

DeEcEMBER 19Q1-JANuaARyY 1902.

LINE DUE WEST FROM PASS WEST OF HEMBADU NORTH MALE TOWARDS

TODDU.
= a
Position.
Serial Dates19017| | men eae aL. | ae Sao Remarks.
Number. Latitude| Longitude | Fathoms. Bottom.
North. East.
Dec. 26 | 4 29 | 73 19.8 120 | Coral sand. 1 mile W. off normal to Pass W. of
Hembadu.
Soa aan Onlieyidiall 6:0 159 |Fine clay. Coral | 34 miles W. off normal to Pass W. of
sand. embadu.
SS 4a OO 7a) WSS 186 | Fine coral — sand. | 74 miles W. off normal to Pass W. of
Green globigerinae. embadu.

LINE ACROSS WADU CHANNEL FROM PASS WEST OF MALE ISLAND TO
WADU SOUTH MALE.

1 Decne en illest Ghee 265 | Hard bottom. 1 mile S. W. off normal to Pass W. of
Male Island.
2 Co Nba] Yih L47/ 259 | Hard bottom. Half-way across Wadu Channel.
3 Goi CG Waa col Mere ane 236 | Broken corals and |1 mile N. W. of Wadu Island, So.
shells. Male.

ACROSS CHANNEL BETWEEN SOUTH MALE AND ARI.

fe} , o ,
4 | Dec. 27 | 3 56 | 73 18 180 | Finecoral sand globi- | 2 miles off central part of west face
gerinae and pterop. | of So. Male.
5 acannon | jos le, 208 | Fine coralsand globi- | 8 miles off central part of west face
gerinae and pterop. | of So. Male.
6 cea smb 40) | io) 5 4: 217 | No sample. 16 miles off central part of west face
of S. Male.
7 CO IGEN) od || A is: 177 | No sample. 3 miles off Kadibudu, centre of east
face of Ari.

* The positions are all referred to the Admiralty Charts of the Maldives, nos. 66%, 66°, 66° (sheets 1, 2, 3).
corrected February 1899. See also Plate 1.

30 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

LINE WEST OF ARI.

Position. Depth Nature

Serial | Date 1901.

In
IATA Latitude| Longitude | Fathoms.

41 | 72 38 908 | Very fine coral sand | 3 miles W. off normal to Pass south

and light green glo-| of Mandu, west face of Ari.
bigerinae.

72 33 1498 | Coral ooze and light | 8 miles W. off normal to Pass south of
blue-gray globigeri-| Mandu, west face of Ari.
nae.

LINE ACROSS ARIYADDU CHANNEL.

30 | 72 51 149 | No sample. 1 mile 8. E. of Ariadu Island, So.
face of Ari.
3 26 | 72 52 231 | Fragments of coral | About half-way across Channel from
and broken shells. ae Island to N. face of N.
ilandu.

3 22 | 72 53 177 | Coarse coral sand. 1 mile from N. Nilandu.

13 | Dec. 29|255 | 73 4 161 |Fine coral sand, | 24 miles S. Easterly from Konipa-
pterop. and green] furi, east face of South Nilandu.
globigerinae.

14 SS ER || 1 181 | Finecoralsand,many | 74 miles easterly from Konipafuri.
pterop. and green
globigerinae.

15 GSM [yeh We 194 | Fine coralsand,many| 123 miles 8. Easterly from Koni-
pterop. and green} pafuri.
globigerinae.

16 « 30)249 | 73 18 205 | Finecoralsand,many | 24 miles west from Second Pass
pterop. and green] No. of Kureli Island, W. face of
globigerinae. Mulaku.

LINE ACROSS KUDAHUVADU CHANNEL.

Mutcaku vo Norta Hasr Facr or KoLuMabuLu.

| ea omer ° ,
17 Dec. 30 | 2 41 73 22 403 | Hard bottom, clas-| 4 miles south of southern face of
pers indented. Mulaku.
18 GO | eh 210) . 649 | Hard bottom, clas-|9 miles south of Mulaku about half-
pers indented. way across to Kolumadulu.

19 eo 2i8o) MleioualS 282 | Hard bottom, clas-| 14 miles south of Mulaku.
pers indented.

|
|
i

Num

Serial
Gare Date 1901.

LIST OF SOUNDINGS.

31

LINE ACROSS VEIMANDU CHANNEL.

KotumapuLtu To HappuMMATI.

Position,

Depth

in
Latitude | Longitude | Fathoms.

North.

OFF.
210

2 6

East.

fo} ,

73 10
73 13

738 | Coarse coral sand,
broken shells.
1118 | Coarse coral sand.

843 | No sample.

Coarse coral sand
with globigerinae.

73 19 897

24 miles off Timarafuri (Koluma-
dulu).

About 7 miles off Timarafuri, half-
way across Veimandu Channel.

2 miles from Pass West of Waduni
Island (Haddummati).

About 3 of a mile to N. E. of sound-
ing No. 22.

alt

4 miles south of Pass to W. of Gadu
(south face of Haddummati).

14 miles south of Pass to W. of

29 miles south of Pass to W. of
Gadu, about half-way from Haddum-

44 miles south of Pass to W. of

LINE ACROSS ONE AND HALF DEGREE CHANNEL.
HappuMMatI TO SuVADIVA.
1 44 73 26 987 | Fine coral sand,
broken shells, glo-
bigerinae.
134 | 73 24 1078 |Small manganese
nodules. Gadu.
119 | 73 22 1130 | Coarse green globi-
gerina sand.
mati to Suvadiva.
1 4 | 73 20 1086 | Coarse light green
globigerina sand. Gadu.
057 | 73 18.5 899 | Coarse coral sand
and broken shells.

23 miles from northern face of Su-
vadiva.

LINE ACROSS EQUATORIAL CHANNEL.

Suvapiva To Fua MuLaku anp To ApDu.

29 Jan.
- 30 o

31 S

85 “e

OOM eon 1040 | Fine coral sand and
So. Lat green globigerinae.
0 5 | 73 22.5 | 1262 | Globigerina ooze.
015 | 73 28 1292 |Globigerina ooze
and broken shells.
025-5) 73 17 1048 | Coarse green globi-
gerina sand,
LINE SOUTH OF ADDU.
(fy 33) 376 | Broken coral frag-
ments coated with
manganese.
73° «9 719 | No sample.
73 «9 717 | Coral sand fragments

of pteropods.

6 miles S. 4 E. from entrance to Gan
Channel, south face of Suvadiva.

21 miles from Gan Channel.

About 34 miles north of Fua
Mulaku,

About half-way between Addu and
Fua Mulaku.

About 1} miles south of Addu.

About 3 miles south of Addu.
About 3 miles south of Addu.

32 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

LINE FROM KOLOMADULU TO SOUTH NILANDU.

Position.

. Depth Nature
Serial ee of eamarkae
Number.| Pate 1902. Latitude] Longitude reine Bottom.
North. East.
° ’ fe} /
36 | Jan. 10 |} 233 | 72 58 953 | Coarse coral sand,|1} miles off Kandufuri (Koluma-
; broken pterop. ulu). ;
37 OSE By 0 VY aks 951 | Coarse coral sand, | 64 miles from Kandufuri; half-way
broken shells. across to So. Nilandu.
38 Co UO ead a Aa ty¢) 202 |Fine coral sand,| 14 miles off Maimbudu (South Ni-
ereen globigerinae. | landu).

SOUTH WATARU CHANNEL.

39 73 23 253 | No sample. Half-way between Mulaku and Wa-
taru Reef.

Jan. 10 | 3 12

NORTH WATARU CHANNEL.

73 26.5 283 |Coarse coral sand | Half-way between Wataru and Fe-

and broken shells. | lidu.

° Ud
40 Jan. 10 | 318

LINE ACROSS FULIDU CHANNEL.

Fine coral sand. | 1 mile N. of Pass E. of Fulidu Island
Pterop. shells green} (Felidu).
globigerinae.
Fragments of corals | Half-way across from Felidu to South
coated with man-| Male.

ganese.
Fragments of coral. | 14 miles off Hutekolu, south face of
outh Male.

358 | 73 32 960 | Globigerina _ sand. | 3 miles east of Guru Pass, east face of
Pterop. shells, fine} South Male. :

green, cor. sand.

358 | 73 37 1238 | Gray globig. ooze. | 8 miles east of Guru Pass, east face of

South Male.

358 | 73 41 1270 | Gray globig. ooze. | 12 miles east of Guru Pass, east face

of South Male.

4 8 | 73 31 319 | Hard bottom, clasp-| 14 miles N. E. of Huras, N. E.

ers bent. face of South Male off entrance to
Wadu Channel.

CHANNEL BETWEEN GAHA FARO AND NORTH MALE.

° , ° , |
48 | Jan. 14 | 442.5] 73 26 100 | Piece of pumice 7 Half-way between Gaha faro and
crusted with Bry-| North Male.
ozoa, Algae, and
Nullipores.

LIST OF SOUNDINGS. 33

LINE FROM GAHA FARO TO GOIFURFEHENDU.

Position. -
28 ae, —— cere
Number. x
Latitude} Longitude | Fathoms. Bottom.

North. East.

49 Jan. 14 | 444.5] 73 19 149 | Coral sand and ¥ miles west of western islet of
: oars globigerina aha faro.
sand.

50 Se Aras: f3) 19 258 | Sample washed out. |9 miles west of western islet of
Gaha faro.
60 SSLbeM4 750-5) 7a 5 237 | Fine sand, green glo-| 7 miles east of Goifurfehendu.
bigerinae.
61 « « 1453 | 72 59.0 | 212 | Fine sand, green glo- | 14 miles east of Goifurfehendu.

bigerinae.

SOUTH KARDIVA CHANNEL.

51 | Jan. 14)448 | 73 23 241 | FragmentsofOculina, | 1} miles north of Gaha faro.

52 se se | 452.5 | 73 24 258 | Hard bottom, clasp-} 6 miles north of Gaha faro, about
ers bent. half-way to Karidu Island.

53 Somconn Ad Difpun inion oa 298 | Small fragments of} 14 miles from south face of Karidu.

pteropod shells.

NORTH KARDIVA CHANNEL.

54 | Jan.14)5 0 | 73 25 312 | Hard bottom frag-| 1 mile north of Karidu Island.
ments of pumice.

55 cos 15 6.5) 73 27 197 | Coarse globigerina a miles north of Karidu Island,
sand. alf-way to Fadiffolu.

56 CG NaI aa) Yi) eke: 372 | Coarse coral sand of | 14 miles south of Aligau (Fadiffolu).

globigerinae.

LINE ACROSS CHANNEL BETWEEN FADIFFOLU AND SOUTH MALOSMADULU.

57 | Jan. 15 }521 | 73 16.5 519 | Coral ooze. Globi- 4 miles S. W. of Kanifuri Id.
gerinae and ptero-| (Fadiffolu).
pods,
58 Gis Oe lie al Nyaa 366 | Fine’ coral ooze. a miles from Kanifuri (centre of
Few globigerinae. hannel).
59 ES | teas | ees a 236 |Broken shells and | 14 miles trom Mabaru Id. (S. Malos-
coral sand, madulu).

62 | Jan. 15 | 455.5) 72 55 248 | Coarse coral sand;|1 mile north of Furudu.
broken shells.
63 ee 1458 «| 72 54.5 302 | Broken shells. 34 miles from starting point (centre
of Channel).
64 coe be Le | mba 193 | Broken coral. 1 mile from Maduwari (S. Malos-

madulu).

34 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

SOUNDINGS WEST OF NORTH MALOSMADULU.

Position.
Date 1902,
er.

in
Latitude | Longitude | Fathoms.

Jan. 16 | 5 27 72 42 1247 | Sample washed out. | 8 miles W. of Pass south of Ma
Faro (N. Malosmadulu).
iG ae Wry eal |i er aks 378 |Green coral sand.|1 mile W. of Maregiri (N. Malos-
Globig. and pterop. | madulu).

LINE ACROSS CHANNEL BETWEEN FADIFFOLU AND MILADUMMADULU.

° ,

“67 | Jan. 17 |5 33 | 73 23 342 | Hard bottom, clasp-|1 mile N. of Hurawali (Fadiffolu).

ers bent.
68 CoG WARY} 1/8} “Ohl 769 | Sample washed out. |4 miles N. of Hurawali (centre of
Channel).
69 Ca TOS On| OueLs. 340 | Sample washed out. |1 mile S. of Karema (Miladumma-
dulu).

LINE ACROSS CHANNEL BETWEEN MILADUMMADULU AND NORTH
MALOSMADULU.

° ' '

70 | Jan.17 |548 | 73 6 412 | Coral sand. Broken} 1 mile W. of Mavila (Miladumma-
shells and pterop. | dulu).

71 SES WS S475) (0/3) 513 | Fine coral sand and| 44 miles W. of same (centre of
globigerina ooze. Channel).

72 « « 1547 | 72 59.5 | 286 | Fine coral sand and|1 mile east of Furidu (N. Malos-
globigerinae. madulu).

CHANNEL BETWEEN MILADUMMADULU AND NORTH POINT OF MAKUNUDU.

,

73 Jan. 19 | 6 24 72) 50) 504 Fine green sand | 1 mile west of Pass to W. of Goadu
elobigerinae. (Miladummadulu).

74 «8 16 24.5) 72 46 792 | Brokenshells, sample | 4 miles west of same Pass (centre of
partly washed out. | Channel).

75 GP Gy 5s 72 42 566 Coarse coral frag-| 1 mile east of Makunudu.

ments, sample partly

washed out.

GALLANDU CHANNEL.

251 | Fragments of coral | In centre of Gallandu Channel separ-
in jaw of clasper. ating Tiladummati and Ihavandiffulu.

FROM IHAVANDIFFULU TOWARDS COLOMBO.

Jan. 20 4 | 73 34 1460 | Fine green ooze, glo-} 86 miles E. of Beramundu (Ihavan-
bigerinae. diffulu).

4 | 74 27 1547 | Fine green globi-|91 miles E. of Beramundu (Ihavan-

7

gerina ooze. diffulu).

75 46 964 | Fine green globi-| 181 miles E. of Beramundu (Ihavan-
gerina ooze. diffulu).

DESCRIPTION OF THE ATOLLS.

North Male.
Plates 1, 3, 4; 8a, fig.6; 8b, figs. 11,19; 8c, fig. 24; 9-18 ; 19, fig. 1.

Norta MAtz is irregularly triangular in form (Pl. 4), with a western
convex side; the northwestern and northeastern faces are concave ; it is about
thirty-two miles long with a greatest width of twenty-two miles. Over
fifty islands, rings, and banks are enclosed within the basin of North Male ;
it is flanked both on the east and west faces by large faros, only on a few
of those of the west faces are found islets. The principal islands are on the
southeast face from Mirufuri to Wilingili Island to the west of Male Island.
There is no group in the Maldives in which there is such a large number of
rings (faros) cropping up in all directions to the surface or within three
or four fathoms from the surface. These submarine rings or embryo sub-
merged atolls are specially numerous immediately towards the north of Male
Island and in the northern part of the group to the southwest of Mirufuri
(Pl. 4). A great number of small banks are dotted over the central area
of North Male, either reaching the surface or awash or at depths of three
to four fathoms. These banks as well as the rings generally rise from
a depth of from twenty to thirty fathoms. There are comparatively few
islands scattered through the central area of North Male. Mr. Gardiner has
noticed marked discrepancies between Moresby’s Charts of North Male and
the positions he assigned to several of the reefs. This may be due to the
large areas of that atoll left unsurveyed within Moresby’s lines of sounding
and the difficulty of locating from a low level rings and low islands which
become clearly outlined from a higher station like the bridge of a steamer.
Wherever we followed lines of soundings we usually found the chart
wonderfully accurate, but naturally in the unsurveyed portions we were
frequently at sea.

36 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

The rings of the inner parts of North Male and some of the islands on
the outer rims are all built of sand, as has also been observed by Mr.
Gardiner. But on many of the outer islands remnants of elevated reef rock
are found forming the base behind which the sandy growths of the islands
have been piled up since the slight elevation of the Maldives took place.

Mr. Gardiner considers North and South Male to be in a very stable con-
dition! On North and South Male as well as Mulaku there is comparatively
little land on the east side and still less on the west side of these atolls
(Pls. 3, 4, 5).

The character of the faros which follow in rapid succession on the south-
east face of North Male varies but slightly. They differ in size, in the
width of the reef flats, in the size and depth of the lagoons, in the number
and dimensions of the islands on the faro rims, and in their position with
reference to the sea or inner face (Pl. 4).

The,east point of North Male is formed by the northern part of the wide
outer flats of an elongated faro about seven miles in length and two at its
greatest width. The inner rim of the faro is quite narrow; at its southern
extremity are found three small islands and a small secondary lagoon enclosed
in a sharp spit forming the north side of the deep pass, with from twenty to
twenty-seven fathoms, separating this faro from the one immediately to the
south of it. Mirufuri and Difuri are two small islands on the northern
parts of the east face of this eastern faro. The soundings in the lagoon of
the faro vary from four to seven fathoms (PI. 4).

Tulusdu, the island on the northeastern face of the next faro, is close to
the pass; the deepest part of the lagoon of the faro is near the northern
extremity. The rim of the faro is nearly of uniform width on the two faces
except at the northern and the southern points of the faro where the flat is
flanked by a wooded island (Pl. 4).

The outer edge of the faros on the southeast face of North Male are all
flanked by lines of coral boulders or small horse heads of modern reef rock.
The lagoon reef to the south of Tulusdu faro is marked by the small size of
its lagoon and the central position of the principal island of the faro flats.
Imma, the larger faro to the south, is a wide reef flat covered with from one

1 Loe. cit., pp. 402, 403.

NORTH MALE. 37

to six feet of water, with two large islands in the axis of the flat. The
lagoon of this faro has practically been filled up by the washing into the
central basin of coral sand from both the sea face and the lagoon side
during the prevalence of the northeast or southwest monsoons. A small
faro with an islet and a sand-bar at its eastern extremity occupies the central
part of the deep pass separating it from the faro to the north. We find
on the chart twenty-one fathoms in the channel on either side of these
obstructions (Pl. 4).

The great faro at the horn of the southeast face of North Male is sepa-
rated from Imma by a pass nearly three miles wide. It is well seen from off
the northern extremity of Hulule, where one can take in at a glance the
whole length of the lagoon and look over the flats to the east of Hulule and
to the great reef flats forming the northern horn of the faro. The northern
and southern parts of this southernmost faro (Pls. 10, 11) are occupied by
wide reef flats; a small island, lying diagonally across the flats, occupies
the central part of the northern horn of Hulule, a long island flanks the
western face of the southern horn, and a small islet lies to the southeast
near the southernmost extremity of the faro. Near the small southern
islet a line of recent reef rock rises inside of the boulder belt, from a foot
to eighteen inches above the reef flat. It is one of the outliers of the
older reef flat conglomerate which has been denuded to its present level.
This ridge is eroded, deeply pitted, undercut, and honeycombed, and is
the first indication we saw of evidence of a slight elevation of the coral
reef of the Maldives in most recent times, judging from the character of
the reef rock as it appears there and at other points in the group. The
outer eastern edge of Hulule faro is flanked by a boulder belt of fairly large
blocks. The belt passes round the southeast horn and extends along the
face of the little islet on the edge of the faro near its southeast horn.
This faro is in reality an atoll, fully as large as many a Pacific island
atoll with wide reef flats, flanked on the sea face by coral boulders enclosing
a shallow lagoon and with islands on the rim flats.

The southern part of Imma pass is occupied by a small faro and an islet
to the north of it. The small faro is separated from Furena by a narrow pass
with thirty fathoms of water. In the main channel the depths vary from

38 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

twenty-four to thirty-five fathoms. Another faro in the pass to the north
of Imma (Pl. 15, fig. 2) is crescentic. One side is formed by an island
extending into a sand-bar, while on the other the island extends into a
submerged rim; the horns of the crescent are widely separated, enclosing
a deep lagoon. The southern part of Tulusdu faro as seen from the west
appears like a narrow, shallow lagoon, enclosed between two strips of
shallow flats.

We steamed round a large faro with a wide reef flat rim nearly a mile
and a half in diameter, about four miles to the west of Difuri, and with
nine fathoms in the lagoon; a wide flat makes off the eastern part of the rim
of this faro. The great Difuri faro has even more than Tulusdu and
Hulule the characteristics of an atoll; as seen from the west, the lagoon
studded with coral heads is seen to be separated from the inner waters of
North Male by a narrow rim flat extending from the northern horn to the
southern extremity. The eastern reef flat rim is in places nearly a mile
wide. To the north of this lagoon reef in the centre of the pass (PI. 4) is
situated a long comma-shaped faro nearly three miles in length and perhaps
half a mile wide at the club.

The faros of North Male are most irregular in shape, some are crescentic,
others more or less rectangular, others somewhat polygonal, or dumb-bell-
shaped, or circular with long spits, or they have assumed the shape of a
long series of loops or cusps forming angular spits. An examination of the
chart of North Male (Pl. 4) will show their great diversity in shape and
size. Yet it is a simple matter to reduce these protean shapes to a simple
and common origin. The circular faros occur in the sheltered waters of
North Male, where corals are left to grow with but little interference from
the monsoons or currents which have tended to modify their outlines on
the outer rim parts of the Maldive plateau, where they are exposed to the
full force of the prevailing winds.

To the west of the comma-shaped faro we came upon a maze of banks
and small faros; that part of North Male not being as yet surveyed, we did
not dare to push north, but shaped our course for the west face of North
Male. We found the western slope of Difuri faro much less abrupt than
that of other faros we had examined. About quarter of a mile from the

NORTH MALE. 39

edge we were in nine to ten fathoms, the slope running very gradually up to
the edge of the flat into from four to six feet of water at three quarters tide.
There was a fine growth of corals on the western face in marked contrast to
the condition of corals usually found on the flats and slopes within the
lagoons of the Pacific atolls. Nothing shows, perhaps, as plainly as this the
atoll character of these numerous faros, scattered over a great plateau. In
the lagoon of the faro, coral heads occur occasionally in small patches as well
as on the rim flat, where they are separated by wide lanes of sand. In the
lagoon of the faros the corals are retarded in their development by the same
cause, which acts so efficiently in the lagoons of atolls of other coral regions.
On the outer rim flat there are fewer patches of living corals than on the
western rim. The outer sea edge of the reef flat is edged with large coral
blocks and boulders, more or less pitted and honeycombed ; these in some
cases formed ridges of modern reef rock near the outer edge of the boulder
belt, more or less undercut, rising a couple of feet at most above the level of
the outer edge of the rim, and indicating perhaps an elevation of a few
feet, these ridges are outliers of a former higher plane of the outer rim,
which has been cut down to its present level. The depths of the rims of
the rings and of the sand banks varies greatly. They are found at all
depths from fifteen fathoms to the surface; where they have grown up to
within six or seven fathoms of the surface, the color of the water over the
rims becomes an excellent guide of their depth below it.

It is difficult to form an accurate opinion regarding the junction or
coalescence of adjoining faros on the outer faces of such an enclosed basin
as the great lagoon of North Male. It would seem natural to consider
some of the longer and narrower faros which form the outer face of the
eastern horn of Felidu, parts of the eastern face of Mulaku, of the outer rim
of Kolumadulu and of Haddummati, as having originally been composed of a
large number of small faros or banks separated by comparatively shallow
passes. With the growth of the corals from the two sides those passes
become gradually choked, and may finally have become united to form
the long narrow reef flats just mentioned, which with the exception of the
existence of small lagoons now show so little trace of their former composite
condition.

40 “THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

However, when we speculate upon the origin of the larger faros of some
of the northern groups, as Ari, North Male, Malosmadulu, and Tiladummati
(Pls. 2, 3, 4), the conditions now existing do not warrant the conclusion
that they have been formed by the junction or coalescence of adjoining
faros. The great size and depth of the lagoons of some of the faros, the
depth of the passages separating them, their great width, — all these factors
indicate that the faros have grown from depths of eighteen to twenty
fathoms on secondary elevations of the greater plateau, with much the same
shape they now have. In their upward growth they have been modified
so as to become faros differing in the width of their rims, their outline,
the depth of the lagoons, the number of banks and islets or islands thrown
up on the rim flats; or the lagoons may even have been completely filled, and
the faro changed to a great reef flat or even an island steep to with a
fringing reef, where all trace of the original faro has been lost. Of course
we do not deny that faros may join in time if they were originally separated
by comparatively shallow passes. This we see taking place by the growth
of corals in cusp-like spits from the slope of a rim flat, which enclose
shallow parts of the adjoining waters —a process somewhat similar to that
by which adjoining islands on wide reef flats become connected into a larger
island from the throwing out of sand-spits or of shingle-spits, either on the
lagoon or the sea face of the outer rim of an atoll, forming great bays which
become eventually filled; a process which takes its greatest development,
perhaps, in the Ellice, Gilbert, Marshall Islands, and also occurs in other
groups of atolls in the Pacific.

An examination of the charts (Pls. 2-6) shows a few instances where
adjoining faros in the interior of Ari, North Male, and the groups just men-
tioned may have coalesced. The distance separating the rings which crop up
within the enclosed area of Male and Ari furnishes no evidence that they
have been formed by the coalescence of adjoining faros. The irregularly
shaped banks and faros are additional evidence of their having grown up on
secondary inequalities of the plateaus of these groups.

The western rim of one of the rings on the northwest face is circular; the
other is digitate with deep indentations cutting into the wide irregular
eastern flat (PI. 4).

NORTH MALE. 4]

On the outer line of faros of North Male, Malosmadulu, and Ari (Pls. 3, 4),
with the exception of the reef flat bounding the southern face of the latter,
and in the maze of coral heads and banks of its southeastern face and the
reef flat on the northwest face of North Male there is no evidence of the
coalescence of adjoining faros; they stand out separately and distinctly,
much as they originally arose from the plateaus upon which they are
scattered,

Steaming south from Mirufuri along the eastern face of North Male, we
could see across the outer line of faros a number of well-wooded islands in
the interior of the great enclosed sheet of water to the westward from Asdu
and south to the islands to the northwest of Male Island and near it. Such
a land rim as we have described from Mirufuri to Male gave to the so-called
lagoon of North Male a totally different character from that of any other
atoll I had previously seen. The existence of well-wooded islands in the
interior of the great enclosed sheets of water of the Maldives we subse-
quently found to be a distinctive feature of the archipelago. The outer
edge of the faros on the east face of North Male is clearly marked at low
tide by a belt of boulders or by the surf breaking on the outer face of the
wide reef flat; the depth of the rim below the surface can readily be
detected from the color of the water on the flat. The inner edge, at the
time of the northeast monsoon, is only marked by the coloring of the inner
flat, a yellowish-green belt of varying width separating the light blue of
the lagoon of the faro from the deeper, darker-colored water of the larger
enclosed sheet. Extensive patches of corals spread over both the inner and
outer reef flats of the faro, gradually becoming thinner and more distant
and less luxuriant as they recede from the outer edges. Their presence
can be detected at a considerable distance from the dark, more or less
purple brown coloring of the patches.

The southern corner of North Male is occupied by the island of Male, on
which is built the capital of the Maldives. The greater part of the island is
covered by an old fort erected by the Portuguese and Dutch during their
occupancy of the islands. To the west and south extends a wide reef flat
dished near the outer edge, while on the northern and eastern faces the
island is steep to. Extensive works have at different times been built

49, THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

=

either as breakwaters or bastions, which conceal the structure of the island,
but it is identical with that of many similar islands throughout the group.
Advantage has been taken of a narrow reef flat on the northwest face
of the island to build a breakwater enclosing a small harbor with suffi-
: _. cient depth to shelter native boats of
considerable size. The southern face
of Male Island is also flanked on the
outer edge of the somewhat dished
reef flat by a belt of angular coral
blocks more or less eroded and weath-
ered, forming a low wall.
From our anchorage off Male we
could see to the northwest two of the

remarkable light green rings which

BastTIon AT MALE.

are so characteristic a feature of the
coral physiognomy of the Maldives (Pl. 4). These rings and their endless
modifications, due to their age, their size, their position on the primary or
secondary plateaus of the group, their exposure to the prevailing winds, their
depth from the surface, give us the key to the structure of the coral reefs of
the Maldives.’

The only structures to which they can at all be compared are the small
atolls known as “ boilers” in the Bermudas, and which flank the south shore
near Sinkey Bay.? But the diminutive atolls of the Bermudas owe their
origin to other causes than those which have built the rings of the Maldives.
The latter are atolls, and no matter what their size may be, they are built
up by corals, while in the Bermudas these small atolls are really only large
pot-holes, the outer rim of which is protected by the incessant growth of
Serpule and Alge on the edge. All the faros of which the nucleus con-
sists of elevated reef rock planed down to the level of the sea have

1 Darwin * considers the ringlike structure to be contingent on breaches into the lagoon being wide
and numerous, thus placing the inner side of the rings in the same condition with the outside of an
ordinary atoll exposed to the sea. Hence the margins have grown vigorously outwards, while they
have grown upwards during the subsidence to which, according to Darwin, the whole archipelago has
been subjected, subsidence and upward growth converting the central space of each little reef into
a small lagoon.

2 A. Agassiz, Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXVI., No. 2, Pls. 22-26.

* Loc. cit., p. 141.

NORTH MALE. 43

increased by sand being heaped up in the direction of the prevailing
winds or currents, forming horns eventually uniting and enclosing a part
of the greater inner lagoon. On the face of the banks, corals obtained a
foothold and consolidated the rims of the faros. Their mode of formation
can best be explained when tracing the changes undergone by the rings.

In thirty fathoms at our anchorage off Male Island the bottom was
covered with fragments of broken coral coated with Nullipores, or was quite
hard, having been swept comparatively clean by the strong current rushing
in and out of North Male through the southeast channel.

At our anchorage off the west face of Difuri about three-quarters of a
mile from the rim of the faro, we found coarse coral sand in twenty-one
fathoms of water; a haul of the dredge made in about twenty-seven fathoms
nearly in the centre of North Male brought up coral sand mixed with more
or less sticky ooze and broken shells. In all cases we found quite a dif-
ferent bottom from that which characterizes the bottom of a Pacific lagoon.

The greatest depth of North Male is thirty-seven fathoms. The majority
of the soundings indicated vary from twenty-five to thirty-one fathoms.

As a type of an inner island, we examined a small well-wooded island
(Pl. 9, fig. 2) which rises in the middle of the southeast passage into North
Male with nearly thirty fathoms on either side of it. The island is elliptical,
and is placed on the northwestern horn of an elliptical flat which stretches
out in a southeasterly direction. The flat slopes very gently to the sea, is
edged on the outer rim by a sink forming a shallow ditch of varying width,
flanked by coral boulders or masses of beach rock extending as an irregular
wall along the greater part of the outer edge of the reef flat. The greatest
width of the reef flat is from two hundred and fifty to three hundred feet.
It diminishes gradually in width to the northwestern corner, where the
island is steep to. Corals grow in great abundance at a depth of from
five to three fathoms upon the steep slopes of the reef flat; they grow
with less profusion to six or seven fathoms, where they are separated by
wide lanes and patches of sand which eventually cover the whole bot-
tom at a depth of from eight to nine fathoms. From the three-fathom
line, they also diminish in number towards the surface and spread over
the edge of the flat, which is partly bare at low water; they extend but

44 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

a short way over it, the greater part of the flat being covered by dead
corals overgrown with Nullipores. The sand beaches surrounding the
island are steep, from six to seven feet in height. The central part of
the island is lower than the top of the beaches which surround it, form-
ing a shallow sink from twelve to eighteen inches or more in depth.
Considerable moisture accumulates in this central sink, and in the rainy
season a pool is probably formed of more or less brackish water. This
structure is most characteristic of the islands of the Maldives, whether
they occur in the interior of the great sheets wf enclosed waters or on the
outer rims of the plateaus. The sink has been formed by the washing up
of the beaches round a central area, as we have seen it in the Paumotus and
elsewhere in other Pacific atolls. Before the vegetation became too dense,
beach sand was blown towards the interior and partly filled the central area,
until this was prevented by the growth of bushes and shrubs, when the
beaches merely increased in height and the sand of the upper ridge of
the beach was driven sparingly towards the centre of the island, or its
further passage stopped by the belt of denser vegetation which had come
up on the higher parts of the coral sand beach. The island of Male has gradu-
ally developed and been formed much in the same manner as this island.

The corals growing on the slopes of this island are marked for their
luxuriance ; they grow as abundantly as they do on the sea face of any
atoll. This is in striking contrast to their scanty development in the
interior of typical lagoons. It can readily be explained from the great
depths of the passes and the great mass and purity of the water passing
into the interior of the enclosed basin of North Male. Throughout the
northern and central Maldives corals grow in great profusion on the slopes
of the islands and faros within the enclosed basins of the group. The
branching corals consist mainly of species of Madrepores, of Pocillopores,
and Millepores. While the massive corals are usually Astreans, Porites,
and the like, Meeandrine are not common.

The vegetation of this island is remarkably fine. In spite of its small size
large trees are found upon it. It is a favorite resort for flying foxes; its
aspect is in striking contrast to the meagre flora found on similar islands in
the Paumotus, Ellice, or Gilbert Islands.

NORTH MALE. 45

The first rmg we examined (PI. 15) was nearly circular, about half a mile
in diameter. It rose quite abruptly from a depth of nearly twelve fathoms
and sloped very gradually to the general level of the bottom of the greater
lagoon (thirty fathoms); the outer edge of the rim being about one hundred
and fifty feet from the vertical at the base of the rim slope. The width
of the rim varied from sixty to one hundred and seventy-five feet, the
general depth of the rim varying from two feet to two fathoms; the slope
of the rim towards the interior of the enclosed lagoon was even steeper
than the outer slope. On the outer face corals grew in great profusion
from the very base to the edge of the rim and in patches on its surface.
The inner slope as well as the bottom of the lagoon consisted of coral
sand driven across the rim and gradually widening the eastern or western
rim according to the direction of the prevailing monsoon, the process at
the same time filling the central lagoon, which in this case was about
seven fathoms in depth.

The corals were of the same genera as those growing on the island in
the southeast pass into North Male, and fully as luxuriant. We did not
observe any corals on the bottom of the small lagoon ; they must be killed
by the inflowing sand. A few patches of corals extend from the outer
base of the ring into somewhat deeper water, but they fast disappear and
the slope consists again of fragments of coral and coral sand. Towards
the northeastern face of the rim flat the sea breaks, the depth of a part
of the rim not being more than a few inches below the surface. The sand
of that part of the rim is kept greatly agitated, and we should expect
there the early formation of a sand-bar or diminutive islet on the rim flat
of the ring.

The next faro we examined represented a stage in the formation of an
island considerably more advanced than that of the simple ring rim enclos-
ing a comparatively deep lagoon. It consisted of an extensive elliptical
flat (Pl. 15, fig. 1) with but three or four feet of water at low tide, its rim
flanked on the east by a small narrow island covered with bushes rising
from a steep coral sand beach; towards the west a small shallow lagoon,
judging from the color of the water, occupies a part of the reef flat.

It seems a simple process to follow the transition of the first ring we

46 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

described to such a larger reef flat. Its original large lagoon has been
filled up and left a diminutive pool; the incipient sand-bar has become a
constantly growing islet and is covered with scant vegetation derived from
the adjoining faros. It needs but an additional stage in the filling of the
lagoon and increase in the size of the islet to reach the condition of the
island we described lying in the southeast pass to the northeast of Male
Island. With the growth of the land larger trees will obtain a foothold,
and the original lagoon become transformed into a great reef flat similar
to that of the former island. This island rose quite abruptly from a depth
of twenty-five fathoms much as did the island to the eastward of Male.
It is evident from the mass of broken and dead corals towards the base of
the outer slope that the rim flat increases in width by the reaching out
of the outer talus.

Corals obtain a foothold on the upper slope of the flat and form extensive
patches reaching over its surface from the outer rim. The reef flat gradu-
ally becomes covered with fragments and small masses of coral coated with
Nullipores which bind the whole together.

These rings are apparently formed by the upward growth of circular or
elliptical patches of corals occupying slight elevations above the general
level of the surrounding plateau. These patches may grow up uniformly,
forming elliptical banks, or they may grow as annular structures, the corals
of the outer face only rising towards the surface, while those in the central
part of the patch are killed either from want of food or of clean sea water,
or are choked by the sand derived from the dead corals of the outer rim,
which is washed into the interior and covers the corals. The outer ring
growing faster than the inner dish is filled, a central lagoon is formed,
this is filled in time after the ring rim has reached the surface; the annular
structure is then changed into a bank from which all traces of the original
lagoon have disappeared and upon the outer rim of which sand-bars ‘or
islets or both have formed. There is thus eventually formed either an
island surrounded by a more or less extensive reef flat or an island and reef
flat with the remnants of a lagoon, or an island or islet on the rim of a
ring with a well-marked and deep lagoon, all different stages of growth of
an annular coral reef formed upon a base laid within the range of depths

NORTH MALE. An

at which reef-building corals begin to grow. The final stage, that of a
well-wooded island steep to, is well seen in the three small islands we
examined lying to the northeast of the first ring we visited in North Male
waters. These are all steep to; the original wide reef flats are reduced to
a narrow insignificant strip flanking the islands.

About three miles to the northwest of Male Island rises an interesting
faro with a small islet on the eastern rim of its lagoon, that has been reduced
to a minimum, nothing but a small hole being left of the original lagoon,
which has gradually been filled by coral sand driven into it over the sum-
mit of the reef flat rim until there is only an insignificant pool left to indi-
cate the original lagoon. Fine patches of corals extended from the outer
edge over the reef flat; a belt of low vegetation has found a foothold on
the islet of the faro which is protected by coral sand beaches.

Vehamafuri, another large faro to the northwest of Male Island,
deserves mention for its narrow rim; its greatest diameter is fully a mile;
the enclosed lagoon has a greatest depth of twelve fathoms. It rises from
a depth of twenty-seven fathoms. To the westward rises another much
smaller circular faro, less than a quarter of a mile in diameter, the rim of
which is fully three fathoms below the surface. On our way to the island
of Tulagiri from Vehamafuri we passed a number of faros with light green
rims and darker bluish-colored lagoons of different shades varying
according to the width of the rim, its depth below the surface, and the
depth of the iagoon.

The island of Tulagiri (Pl. 16, fig. 2) is on the southern rim of a small
faro, not quite half a mile in diameter; its southern rim is remarkably nar-
row and covered with a great many patches of corals. To the eastward of
this faro could be seen the outline of a circular faro, nearly a mile in
diameter. Two others somewhat elliptical rose to the northward. Nearly
halfway between Vehamafuri and Tulagiri rises Bundusi and a small island
to the south of it; both are steep to; the latter is nearly a mile in diameter
with extremely narrow reef flats.

Between Tulagiri and Kudahitty we passed six faros. With the excep-
tion of the northern one, which is triangular in shape, they are circular
or elliptical, with fairly wide rims and moderately deep lagoons. Kudahitty

48 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

(Pl. 17, fig. 1) is a small island on the eastern edge of a small lagoon, less
than a quarter of a mile in length. Hitty (Pl. 17, fig. 2) is a small island
a couple of miles east of the great faro on the central part of the western
edge of North Male; it is on the southern extremity of an elliptical ring
enclosing a deep lagoon. Hitty is flanked by a hook-like faro, with a broad
eastern rim and open to the north. To the north we passed a similar
double faro on our way to Hembadu. A small island covered with trees
occupies the greater part of the rim, which separates the two loops of the
adjoining faros.

On our way across the Male group, we passed a number of coral patches
or sand-bars of irregular or circular shape, at varying depths below the
surface, the color of the patch indicating fairly its depth below the surface.
Many of the flats were covered here and there with irregular patches of
corals, but as a rule they were not flourishing and not to be compared with
the vigorous growth on their slopes.

One of the rings we passed enclosed a well-marked blue lagoon indicat-
ing at least seven to eight fathoms; its rim extended to the westward in a
long spit awash, on which sand-bars were forming. The spit was separated
by a deep channel from a narrow sand bank covered with but a few feet
of water. To the north rose small faros and banks, on the rims of which
corals were growing in great profusion. One large circular faro was
specially noted for its diminutive lagoon, the only indication left of a
former larger lagoon which has gradually been filled up by the sand driven
from both sides across the rim, and deposited on the bottom of the lagoon
during the prevailing monsoons.

To the south of Hembadu we could see three interesting stages in the de-
velopment of a faro. In the immediate foreground rose a large, irregularly
circular reef flat of alight green color, its rim edged with closely packed
great violet brown patches of corals, extending down along the outer slopes
of the faro into twelve or fifteen fathoms; on the northern face a small,
bare sand bank had been thrown up on the reef rim flat. To the west
a shallow lagoon of considerable size occupied the greater part of that side
of the faro. Immediately to the north of this rose a small elliptical bank,
its surface covered with a magnificent growth of corals in six to seven feet

NORTH MALE. 49

of water, and a small sand bank thrown up on the outer edge of the rim
where the corals were awash. Still further, a large bank of the same char-
acter, but with a sand bank rising a couple of feet, and on which a few
grasses and shrubs had obtained a foothold; while in the distance a similar
bank had been blown to a sufficient size and height to be covered with
small trees and be surrounded by a considerable belt of low bushes.

Passing out of North Male through the wide passage west of Hembadu,
we could not fail to compare it with the narrow passes which characterize
the entrances into so many of the Pacific atolls. Hembadu Pass is fully
four miles in width, with from seventeen to twenty-two fathoms in depth;
and flanked by low faros, it gave one the impression of still greater width
and marked more sharply the contrast to such narrow passes as those of
the Paumotus, Ellice, Gilbert, and more northern atolls.

The passes into the central area of North Male are only low portions
of the rim separating the more elevated parts of the plateau, upon which
the faros have grown either on the outer face or in the inner area of
North Male. An examination of the soundings within North Male as well
as those of any other group of the central and northern Maldives shows
how great are the irregularities of the bottom of the secondary plateaus of
the Maldives. To the westward of Hembadu the bottom is very uneven;
on our way out of North Male through the wide pass to the west of Hem-
badu, we found rapid changes in depth, and could distinctly see the exten-
sion of the coral patches indicated on the charts scattered over a good
part of our track. They extended all the way across the northern part
of the pass, west of Hembadu. Off the eastern face of the faros of the
western face of North Male one passes rapidly from fifteen to thirty fathoms ;
in the vicinity of an agglomeration of small faros the depth varies from
twenty to thirty fathoms. The lines of soundings as they exist throughout
North Male indicate a series of elevations rising somewhat abruptly at from
twenty-four to twenty fathoms; they constitute the base upon which the
banks, faros, or islands and islets which stud North Male have been built
up. This indicates a condition of the bottom of the central area of North
Male different from the great level and unbroken flats which characterize

the bottom of the lagoons of the Pacific atolls, There the great fall in
4

50 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

depth occurs close to the lagoon face of the outer rim and it slopes suddenly
to the general dead level of the great central area of the lagoon.?

To the south of Hembadu Pass the faros on the west face of North Male
are very similar in structure, though greatly differing in shape and size.
The largest one, four miles in length by one and a half wide, immediately
to the south of the pass, is edged on the western rim by a wide reef flat,
on the eastern by a narrow rim. A small island covered with low bushes
rises in the southern part of the western rim of the reef flat. The reef
flats enclose a large lagoon nearly as long as the faro. Running south,
parallel with the western face of the outer faros, all the way to Wilingili
Island, on the southern face of North Male, we remained in sight of a
number of faros of all sizes and shapes. Their western rims are generally
wider than the eastern, with deep blue or lighter-colored lagoons, according
to their depths, often edged on the east by extremely narrow rims, some of
them a mere thread but a few feet in width, the wider reef flats being
always the outer rims, as on the east face of North Male. The western
edges of the outer rims were lined with a belt of great patches of corals
extending sometimes across the sandy rim flats of the faro.

The lagoon of the third faro south of Hembadu Pass is divided into two
by a transverse bar like the one of the northeast horn of Mulaku, figured
on the Admiralty Chart and mentioned by Mr. Gardiner. The three faros to
the south are triangular with narrow rim flats. One of them is nearly two
miles wide. The faro at the southwest angle of North Male is narrow, and
ou its eastern extremity a small island, fairly wooded, has been thrown up.
On the eastern extremity of the faro to the west of Wilingili Island a couple
of small islands have been thrown up which are not indicated on the charts.

On the west face of North Male north of Hembadu Pass, heaps of coral
boulders occur on the exposed points of the great faros which flank the
northern part of the group to the south and to the north.

1 Mr. Gardiner’s statement that in the Maldive Atolls the bottom is perfectly smooth and that no
new banks are springing up does not seem in accordance with the soundings of such groups as North
Male and North Malosmadulu. In both these groups as well as in others are many sand banks and
rings with varying depths, of from three to four feet on the rims to five or six fathoms. Nor is it the
case in the “jungle,” a tract covered with hundreds of heads within the twenty-fathom line in the
central part of North Malosmadulu. This as well as the general variation of the soundings shows a far
greater range in the depth of the bottom than one would infer from the remarks of Mr. Gardiner.

a i ee

—* —

Se

NORTH MALE. 51

The outline of the reef flat to the south of Akirifuri is very striking.
The lagoon face of the flat is formed by a series of great bays separated
by points jutting out eastward two to three miles, in marked contrast to
the rectilinear course of the western edge of the flat. This peculiar mode
of growth of the corals shows that, if the bays they formed were closed
across the east face, what might appear as a series of faros which had
coalesced or become united had a very different origin, due to the rapid
extension of coral spits at right angles to the western edge of the faro.
Similar reef flats occur in other groups of the Maldives in Felidu, in
South Nilandu, in Kolumadulu, in Suvadiva and others to a less extent.
But nowhere are these cusps developed to such an extent as in this reef
flat of the northern part of North Male.

The vegetation on Akirifuri is scanty, and much of it is dying. The
beaches of the island are steep, of very coarse yellow coral shingle with
stretches of small coral boulders at the base of the beach. The vegeta-
tion of the islands of the faro to the north of Hembadu Pass is not vig-
orous; many of the trees and bushes on the outer belt of vegetation are
dying or dead, having been more or less buried by the advancing sands
blown into the islands from the beach (PI. 19. fig. 1). Several of the
sand-bars and banks marked on the chart as covered with low vegetation
have disappeared, or the vegetation has been killed by the encroaching
sands. ;

To the westward of our track on the way to our anchorage off Kagi
we passed a narrow crescent-shaped sand bank flanked with shingle. The
vegetation on Kagi is most meagre, perhaps from its exposure to the full
force of the northeast monsoon. This island is edged by coral sand beaches.
On the southern face of Kagi corals are growing in abundance within the
usual limits of depth.

The northern extremity of Male is open to the northwest, where it is
flanked by a narrow reef flat for a distance of nearly five miles, similarly
the northern faces of South Male and of Felidu are not well protected, and
the greater part of the northeast face of Ari is open for a stretch of more
than twelve miles. The northern face of North Malosmadulu is also open,
as well as the northeast face of Ihavandiffulu and of Tiladummati.

THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Or
bo

On passing out of North Male through the eastern of the passes of the
northern face of the group, we saw no boulder belt or heaps of shingle
either on the sea faces or the pass faces of the two northern faros of North
Male.

The faro to the west of the pass is really a diminutive irregularly rec-
tangular atoll. It has a narrow entrance to the north, the western face of
which is flanked by a small sand-bar. Within the lagoon are a few heads
and diminutive faros (a faro within a faro); the greatest depth of the
lagoon indicated on the chart is eight fathoms.

The absence of vegetation on the west face of North Male to the south
of Hembadu Pass is a very marked feature, not only of that group, but
also of most of the other groups of the Maldives. There are but few small
islands on that face of the groups as compared to the number and size
of the islands clothed with vegetation found on the eastern faces of the
Maldive groups. One need only compare the many islands on the east
face of Ari, well clothed with vegetation, with the great faros of the west
face, on which only here and there rises a diminutive island. It is on the
eastern face of Ari also that the greater part of population is gathered,
sheltered to a certain extent from the strength of the southwest monsoon.
For the east face though exposed to the northeast monsoon, is, as it were,
the lee side, if we can call that face by such a name, when we have a
southwest and a northeast monsoon season. It merely indicates that the
lee face is exposed to a monsoon blowing with less strength than on the

western face.

THe SuLTAn’s BucGatow, aT ANCHOR OFF MALE.

GAHA FARO.

or
Oo

Gaha Faro.
Plates 1,3; 8a, figs. 6,8; 8b, fig. 11.

Gaha Faro is eight miles in length by four in width, four to five times
larger than many of the rings and faros of the Maldives. The greatest
depth of its lagoon is twenty-two fathoms. Gafaru Island is the only land
on the rim of this atoll, with the exception of small sand banks, one on the
southern face to the west of Gafaru and the others on the eastern spit of
the northern and the southern spit of the western entrances to Gaha Faro.
Gafaru Island is edged by shingle beaches with a few patches of coral bould-
ers on the outer edge of its southern reef flat. The reef flat enclosing the
lagoon of Gaha Faro is very narrow and shallow, the sea breaking over its
surface and along the continuous outer line of the flat broken only by a
narrow pass to the north and a similar one opening to the west. The con-
tinuous reef flat with its two passes gives Gaha Faro all the features of an
atoll which it is difficult to distinguish from a gigantic faro. Had we seen
it in the Pacific it would pass as an atoll in no way differing from the
many of its kind in the Ellice, Gilbert, or Marshall Islands. Yet in the
Maldives, Gaha Faro and similar atolls are regarded as faros. Gaha Faro is
separated from its adjoining cluster of faros on the northern point of North
Male by a channel of not more than a mile and half in width, but with a
depth of one hundred fathoms.'| While the faros of most groups are
separated by narrower channels with a greatly varying depth, often not
more than seven to eight fathoms, generally about twenty fathoms in the
central part of the lagoon.

The freest possible circulation exists between the lagoon and the sea
over the shallow reef flats of the atoll. Coral patches are scattered in
abundance over the rim flats. At Gaha Faro as at many of the openings
of faros and off the mouth of the passes leading into the larger enclosed
basins, the water is often seen to be turbid, evidently carrying in suspension
a considerable amount of silt stirred up by the action of the sea on the
exposed face of the inner part of the lagoons, or of the islands and banks
within an atoll, or from its shallow bottom.

1 See the depths of the channels separating North, Middle, and South Malosmadulu which range
from one hundred to one hundred and fifty fathoms (Pls. 3; 8 8, figs. 9, 10).

54 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Goifurfehendu.

Plates 1,8; 8a, fig.8; 8b, fig. 10; 19, fig. 2; 20.

We skirted the eastern extremity of Goifurfehendu’ as well as the eastern
half of its northern face; this gave us a fair idea of the structure of the
atoll. It is elliptical, about ten miles in length and nearly five across its
widest part. The atoll is surrounded by a continuous reef flat somewhat
-wider on the north and east sides than on the southern face; it has a single
pass near the southwest horn. The deepest part of the lagoon is twenty-
three fathoms; the average depth is from eighteen to twenty fathoms. The
central part of the atoll is clear of dangers. On the eastern part of the
northern reef flat of Goifurfehendu are three large islands of which the island
of Goidu, at the very eastern point of the atoll and on the widest part
of the reef flat, is the largest. The southern extremity of Goidu Island
appears to be wasting away, a small adjoining island marked on the chart
has disappeared. A narrow sand beach extends along the central part of
Goidu parallel with the outer belt of vegetation close to the water’s edge.
At the northeast point of Goidu the upper part of a steep shingle beach
has been driven far into the outer belt of vegetation. On the northern face
of Goidu Island the vegetation is not flourishing, and it reaches the water’s
edge. The eastern face of Goidu Island is steep to close to the edge of the
outer insignificant reef flat; in places the surf beats directly upon the beach.
The projections of the northern face of Goidu form a large rectangular bay ;
the island seems to be increasing in size towards the west.

The northeastern part of Goifurfehendu atoll is exposed to the full force
of the northeast monsoon. On the outer edge of the reef flat are numerous
great patches of corals, showing that they grow abundantly on the northern
slope of the atoll. On Fehendu, the next island to the west on the wide
northern reef flat, the vegetation is fine with many clusters of large trees.
Opposite Fehendu the outer reef flat is wide, the island thus appears to
be placed well in the middle of it. Inafuri is the westernmost island of
Goifurfehendu.

Gardiner’ notes the “more purely oceanic conditions of this atoll than
any other of the more perfect atolls of small size except Addu” as well as

1 On Plates 1 and 3 Goifufehendu should be Goifurfehendu. 2 Loe. cit., p. 377.

So he OTE OR:

———

KARIDU. 55

its slight protection by the east horn of South Malosmadulu; he recognizes
the former recent connection of Fehendu and Furudu which were probably
formed by the piling up of sand on the flats fringing the lagoon. Accord-
ing to him, “the lagoon is increasing in size at the expense of its en-
circling reef,’ the outer contour of his figure being the same as that on
the Admiralty Chart, but the reef flat is charted much broader than in
Mr. Gardiner’s figures.’ Furudu Island is wasting away.’

Karidu.

IGS Thy GIG Ci HG MLS LO

Karidu is a small elliptical atoll about two miles in greatest diameter,
nearly halfway between Gaha Faro and Fadiffolu. It rises abruptly in a chan-
nel nearly thirty miles across, from a depth of about three hundred fathoms.
It would be called a faro were it placed on the face or the central area
of one of the larger of the Maldive groups. A wide curved island, follow-
ing the line of the reef flat, occupies the greater part of its southern rim,
to the west of which rises a small islet. The reef flats to the north
and south are shallow and enclose a comparatively shallow lagoon. The
point of the south face of the east end of Karidu is covered with coarse
shingle; that part of the island is steep to; the reef flat gradually widens to
the west; along the centre of the south face of Karidu rises a steep
shingle beach which extends to the base of the outer belt of low bushes.
A few large forest trees grow in the centre of the island, much of the
vegetation of Karidu is dead; many of the bushes formerly above the
beaches now stand in the water on the edge of the reef flat.

At the western extremity of Karidu the central shingle beach has
gradually passed into a coral sand beach which extends in an ill-defined
sand spit along the narrow reef flats of the northern face of Karidu. On
the reef flats corals abound; huge patches extend from the outer rim
of the atoll towards the lagoon. On the shallow northern reef flat the
breakers due to the northeast monsoon form an almost continuous line.

1 Loe. cit., fig. 90, p. 377. 2 Loe. cit., fig. 91, p. 378.

56 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

The lagoon has gradually filled; it now consists only of a large bottle-
shaped pool towards the eastern end of the atoll, probably with four or
five fathoms of water, judging by its color.

A narrow opening leads into the lagoon; the pass is indicated by a
heap of boulders on the western face and a small sand-bar on the eastern,
The island of Karidu as it exists to-day does not, owing to the wasting
away of the western extremity, occupy as large a proportion of the area
of the reef flats as is indicated on Moresby’s chart (1836).

Malosmadulu Plateau.

Plates 1, 3; 8a, fig.5; 8b, figs. 9,10; Sc, fig. 28; 22-380; 81, fig. 1.

South, Middle, and North Malosmadulu resemble Male and Ari as far
as the location of the faros and of the islands on the outer faces of the
Malosmadulu plateaus is concerned (PI. 3). Their western face is flanked
by large faros, some of them over five miles in length, separated by wide
and deep passes. In fact, the faros are atolls of considerable size with as
great a variety in size and shape as exists among widely separated atolls
in other coral reef regions. Compare, for instance, such faros as Maduni
Faro, Ekuru Faro, Ma Faro, Defili Faro, Mawa Faro, which are lagoons
surrounded by wide reef flats, with faros having one or two islands on
the rims, such as Kandu Gandu, Bodu Faro, Femfuri Faro and Turadu,}
having all the features of small independent atolls with a minimum of
land masses on the reef flats. The former really belong to the same
category as the atolls, though no islands or islets have as yet been
thrown up on the rim flats.

The east face of North Malosmadulu and the southeast face of South
Malosmadulu are flanked by a few faros and a number of islands running
at right angles to the trend of the east face of Malosmadulu; they are sepa-
rated by wide and deep passes, some of them over three miles in width.

North Malosmadulu bears a close resemblance to Ari; like it, it is fanked
on the west by large faros and on the east by numerous islands, all steep

1 Turadu, according to Gardiner, has become modified into a linear reef flat; loc. cit., p: 380, fig. 94.

MALOSMADULU PLATEAU. 57

to, well wooded, and separated by deep passes. It has, like Ari, many faros
and rings within the enclosed basin of the group; the central basin, inside
the twenty-fathom line, is crowded with a mass of faros, islands, banks,
bars, rings, and heads, which constitute a perfect labyrinth and render the
navigation of that part of North Malosmadulu impracticable.

The islands near our track, both in South, Middle, and North Malosmadulu,
seem to have been built on one pattern. At first they are small banks
without vegetation thrown up on the rim of a small flat or faro. The bank
gradually increases in size, occupying a larger part of the rim. The lagoon
then becomes silted up, and eventually the sand bank occupies the greater
part of the area of the faro, becoming clothed with vegetation as it increases
in size, and finally passing into a wooded island, steep to or with a narrow
reef flat, as in Wadu, Medu, and other islands in the southern part of
North Malosmadulu, or of Karidu, Mararrekellu, and Anghenufuri in Middle
Malosmadulu and Kendu, Hurudu, and others on the northern and southern
faces of South Malosmadulu.

The deepest sounding indicated in the South Malosmadulu group is thirty-
eight fathoms; the greater number of the soundings are between twenty-five
and thirty fathoms. In North Malosmadulu thirty-one fathoms is the
deepest sounding indicated on the chart, and outside of the area enclosed
by the twenty-fathom line the average of the soundings is between twenty
and twenty-five fathoms. In Middle Malosmadulu the deepest sounding
is twenty-seven fathoms, the soundings average about twenty fathoms.

It is interesting to compare the position of the atoll of Goifurfehendu
(Pls. 1, 3), separated from South Malosmadulu by a channel nearly six
miles in width and a greatest depth of three hundred and two fathoms, with
that of the typical Maldivian group of South Malosmadulu, separated from
Middle Malosmadulu by a channel varying in width from one to two
miles with a greatest depth of one hundred and forty fathoms, or with
that of Middle Malosmadulu, divided from North Malosmadulu by a channel
of nearly three miles in width, and a greatest depth of one hundred and
thirty-five fathoms. Contrast this with Femfuri Faro, which is north
of the southwest horn of North Malosmadulu and separated from the
faros to the north and to the south by channels, the one about a mile and

rr

58 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

a quarter wide, with a greatest depth of twenty-seven fathoms, the other
nearly two miles wide, with a depth varying from twenty-two to twenty-six
fathoms.

The relation which these faros or small atolls hold to Middle Malosmadulu
are similar to those of Goifurfehendu to South Malosmadulu, or of South
Malosmadulu to Middle and to North Malosmadulu, or of Gaha Faro to North
Male. ‘The distances and depths separating the atolls are merely questions
of quantity.

The faros, or atolls, or lagoon reefs, built up on the summits of the
plateaus rising from various depths, are all atolls, though they may differ
greatly in size and shape, they all represent variations similar in kind;
there is no fundamental difference between them. The lagoons of the
largest Maldivian atolls, like Addu, Gaha Faro, Goifurfehendu, Makunudu,
Wataru, are but little deeper than the lagoons of smaller faros like those I
have just mentioned, or of the many others scattered over the various
groups of the plateau of the Maldives.

We cannot distinguish these faros from atolls, whether isolated or
forming a part of an extensive chain, or occupying a portion of the face
of the Maldivian plateau, or scattered within the basins enclosed by these
chains. The faros and atolls have the same characteristic features, and
nowhere is this more prominently brought out than in the group of islands
forming the so-called Tiladummati and Miladummadulu atolls (Pls. 2, 3).

Other cases of isolated faros and of atolls are the Powell Islands, about
eight miles west of Miladummadulu; Makunudu, nearly ten miles off the
west coast of the same group with a depth of nearly eight hundred fathoms
in the centre of the dividing channel; Ihavandiffulu, separated from the
northern face of Tiladummati by a channel of nearly four miles in width,
with a greatest depth of two hundred and fifty-one fathoms. The large
faros at the northern extremity of Tiladummati, separated as they are
by wide and deep channels, show the impossibility of distinguishing faros
from atolls,

An extreme case, perhaps, is that of Karidu (PI. 3), distant about six-
teen miles from Fadiffolu and twelve from Gaha Faro, with greatest depths
in the channels of three hundred and seventy-two and two hundred and

SOUTH MALOSMADULU. 59

fifty-eight fathoms. This small faro, for it would be considered small
even if it formed a part of one of larger groups, differs in no way from
a large number of the characteristic faros of the Maldives. But Karidu
has all the characters of a small Pacific atoll; it is isolated, separated
by wide channels from the nearest groups, and instead of rising, as do
other Maldivian faros, from a broad bank with an average depth of from
twenty to thirty-five fathoms, it rises as the summit of a diminutive mound,
surrounded by depths of nearly three hundred fathoms. Side by side iden-
tical structures exist which have been built up in one case from the mini-
mum depths of twenty to thirty-five fathoms; and in the other, upon
summits rising from depths of over three hundred fathoms; and certainly
the former do not owe their origin to subsidence. Otherwise Karidu has
been formed by the subsidence of a plateau to a depth of nearly 300
fathoms, Gaha Faro to 100, Makunudu to nearly 800, Ihavandiffulu to
250, Middle Malosmadulu to 100 or 150, Rasdu to 120, Wataru to 200,
the hosts of small atolls on the outer faces of the Maldivian groups and of
the rings and faros within these groups to twenty or thirty-five fathoms
(Pl. 1). The different depths to which these atolls have sunk all occur
within the same district, and postulate an irregularity in the rate of sub-
sidence of different and adjoining tracts of this area which it is difficult to
imagine, and for which a very slow and regular rate of subsidence has
always been demanded. We can far more readily understand the existing
conditions as due to the different levels to which the irregular bottom of
the great Maldivian plateau has been elevated. In fact, the topography
of this wide submarine ridge is neither more nor less varied than that of
a mountain plateau.

South Malosmadulu.
Plates 1, 3; 8b, fig. 10; 8c, fig. 28 ; 22-28 ; 29, fig. 2.

South Malosmadulu (PI. 3) is irregularly triangular, its apex facing east ;
the greater part of the enclosed basin of the group, in a belt parallel to the
south face is filled with large faros, many of them more than three miles

60 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

in length. In addition a number of small banks, islands, and islets or
faros are clustered in the northeastern area of the group.

The slope of the eastern face of South Malosmadulu is, according to the
soundings (PI. 1), very gradual, far more than that of many of the other
groups. The one hundred-fathom line is at a greater distance from the
edge of the outer row of islands, faros, and reef flats. This is not the case
with the western face of either North or South Malosmadulu (PI. 1).

Some of the islands in the northeastern area of South Malosmadulu are
of considerable size, and many of them are well wooded. An island to the
westward of Mabaru is specially noted for its fine trees. The eastern
edge of the reef flat to the south of Mabaru is covered with patches of
corals, and fringed with stretches of boulders and heaps of shingle.

The extremities of Mabaru (Pl. 22, fig. 2), exposed to the action of the
northeast monsoon, are wasting away on the sea face, as are the islands
to the south, many cocoanut palms lying prostrate at the base of the
beaches.

The vegetation on the islands of the east face of North and South
Malosmadulu is far more flourishing than that of Fadiffolu, probably be-
cause it is not exposed to the force of the southwest monsoon. On the
southeast face of South Malosmadulu both the monsoons blow along the
trend of the face, so no heavy swell or sea pounds upon the beaches of
that part of South Malosmadulu.

The deep wide passes separating the islands of the southeast face of
South Malosmadulu give the impression that the islands are scattered
irregularly over an indefinite sea space, and not that they are part of the
land rim of an atoll (Pl. 23).

Aidu Island (PI. 22, fig. 1) is steep to, with deep wide passes on each
side. It is surrounded on the sea face by steep, coarse shingle beaches,
passing into coral sand beaches towards the west; it is covered with fine
vegetation. To the south of Mabaru, between it and Aidu, a large, irregu-
larly shaped faro, Wandu Faro, fully three miles in length, extends west-
ward. Two islands are found on its western rim. Another large faro, Huni
Faro, lies to the south of Aidu, with islands at the eastern and western
extremities; its lagoon has a greatest depth of six fathoms. The islands

a ee ee

SOUTH MALOSMADULU. 61

are flanked by steep coral sand beaches; the outer edge of the rim flat is
covered with large patches of thriving corals. On the sea face of Kum-
finadu are outlying patches of boulders and angular reef rock, honey-
combed, pitted, and undercut, similar to patches found elsewhere in the
Maldives, indicative of a slight former elevation.

Gardiner’ says most of the reefs to south and east show traces of a broad
line of elevated reef rock on the sea face, with extensions along the faces
of the passages which are still going on. He also states that the bottom of
South Malos is everywhere hard sand, and singularly barren of organic life,”
and that dredging points to a general growth of corals on the outer edge,
though it may only be in isolated patches.

After skirting the east face of South Malosmadulu we entered it through
the pass east of Hitadu; on either side of the island are Olugeri and
Maduwari, both steep to. The vegetation of Olugeri as seen from the pass
appears to be quite luxuriant. The west face of Maduwari (PI. 25) is
flanked with a steep beach of coarse coral shingle, so steep as to form an
almost vertical wall along part of the island. The shingle has been driven
in among the base of the trees and between the clumps of bushes well
back from the beach towards the interior of the island. The coarse coral
shingle surrounds the sea face of the island and the greater part of the
eastern face along the pass. On the lagoon side of the island it is flanked
by steep coral sand beaches. On the steep to sea face slope of Maduwari
corals are very luxuriant down to a depth of twelve fathoms, where they
become small, and are separated by belts and lanes and patches of sand
until they are completely choked and disappear in depths of sixteen to
twenty fathoms.’

The southwestern horn of South Malosmadulu is formed, according to
the chart, by Turadu, a large faro about four miles in length. The main
part of the faro has at the northeast angle a regular entrance like that
of any atoll of its size, is bounded on the southwestern and southeastern
faces by a wide reef flat, on which are two islands, and which forms the
southern rim of an elongated lagoon with from three to six fathoms in

1 Loc. cit., pp. 384, 385. 2 Loe. cit., p. 381.
8 See Gardiner’s account of this island, oc. cit., p, 164, fig. 30, and p. 384.

62 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

depth. The northern rim, according to the chart, is a very irregular
narrow belt awash here and there with a secondary lagoon at the northern
spit of this rim.

The changes at Turadu from the conditions marked on the Admiralty
Chart are, as stated by Gardiner, very marked’ and were also noted by us
at the time we passed by Dunikolu and anchored near Embudu, but I
cannot agree with Mr. Gardiner that the extensive changes observed there
are wholly due to solution.? The cyclone by which the island was struck
would account for the movement of a great mass of sand such as perhaps
formed the northern rim of Turadu in 1836.

Boats FROM TURADU.

To the northeast of Turadu rises Dunikolu, a small island with a low
coral sand beach and covered with a scanty vegetation. Near our anchor-
age stretched another, smaller faro (Velengeli), a little over a mile in
diameter, with an island on its western rim having somewhat the character
of an outer island. The wide rim of this faro enclosed a shallow lagoon
the great part of which had been filled up.

The little island of Embudu (Pls. 26, 27) to the north of our anchorage
is covered by a scanty vegetation; it is surrounded by a narrow reef flat
and is flanked by steep almost vertical beaches of fine coral sand. At their

1 Loc, cit., fig. 94, p. 380.

? Gardiner states (Joc. cit, p. 386) that in the northeast part of South Malos there seemed to
be little change within the lagoon.

SOUTH MALOSMADULU. 63

base there are patches of beach rock. The deeper slopes are covered with
a magnificent growth of corals extending down to a depth of from twelve
to fourteen fathoms, where the corals become patchy and gradually disappear
in from eighteen to twenty fathoms in a sandy bottom. The beaches are
covered with windrows of small masses of pumice varying from the size of
hazel-nuts to that of one’s fist. Many cuttle-fish bones and Spirula shells
have also been blown up above high-water mark.

On the outer edge of the rim of Mutalifoori, projecting here and there
high above the outer rim, extends a belt of coral boulders. The little island
on the western rim is bordered with low sand beaches; the rim of the
faro is comparatively wide, enclosing a small lagoon. The outer belt of
the rim flat is thickly covered with great patches of corals which, as off
Embudu, seem to be very flourishing on the slopes of the lagoon reef.
To the east of our track on the way north about a mile and a half from
Mutalifoori, we passed a large elliptical ring with from three to six fathoms
in depth and more than two miles in length. On the western side of our
track nearly opposite, another faro was passed, fringed on the outer edge
of the east face of the rim with irregular patches of boulders.

We passed close to the eastern extremity of Wakaru, a small island on
the eastern point of a large ring with from three to four fathoms in the
lagoon. On the east face of Wakaru a steep beach has been thrown high
up in the outer belt of bushes. At the eastern point the base of the beach
is flanked by stretches of beach rock.

At both Embudu and Wakaru the outer beaches have been thrown up
considerably higher than the general level of the central part of the island.
This forms a rim to an inner sink or dish from twelve to eighteen inches
or more lower than the summit of the beach. This apparent dishing is
quite common among the small central islands of the Maldives, and when
it occurs on the rim of an island which is steep to, the inner sink might
readily be mistaken for the bottom of a dry lagoon, or for an atoll the
lagoon of which had been slightly elevated above the general level of
the surrounding reef flat.

As we passed Megeli we noticed a small, low sand-bar on the southern
face of the faro to the west of it, which is not indicated on the chart.

64 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Megeli Island is crescent-shaped. It occupies the eastern part of the rim
flat of a faro of which the lagoon has been completely filled. The small
islet on the east face of Muduwari (Pl. 28, fig. 2) is covered with low
bushes.

From Muduwari north towards Kendu and the islands which form the
northern boundary of South Malosmadulu the atoll is clear. Kendu (PI. 29,
fig. 2), like the other islands to the eastward, is steep to, with steep and
high sand beaches, much higher than any sand beaches we have seen in
the central groups of the Maldives. The western point of Kendu, which
is exposed to quite a reach of the southwest monsoon, is covered with
coral boulders. The islands and faros of the north face of South Malos-
madulu are divided by deep and wide passes.

At Kiadu (PI. 28, fig. 1) the apparent depression due to the height of
the enclosing beaches is very marked. Kiadufuri is a beautiful elliptical
ring with wide reef flats enclosing a lagoon with from five to six fathoms
in depth, and an extensive sand bank on the southern face; this is not
indicated on the charts of 1836. At Hanikandu Faro, which forms the
northwestern angle of South Malosmadulu, the enclosed lagoon is said to

be twenty fathoms in depth.

Middle Malosmadulu.
Plates 1,3; 8b, figs. 9,10; 29, fig. 1.

The large triangular bank wedged in between South and North Malos-
madulu may be called Middle Malosmadulu; it is separated from them
by deep channels of from two to three miles in width, and with depths
varying from one hundred and ten to one hundred and forty fathoms in
the axis of the channels. The enclosed area of Middle Malosmadulu is free
from patches or faros. Its faces are bounded by comparatively few islands
and large faros, separated by wide and deep passages. The greatest depth
of this bank is twenty-six fathoms, with a general average of about
twenty fathoms.

We examined some of the islands and faros of the southern and north-
western faces. Karidu Island is steep to, like Kendu and the islands on

NORTH MALOSMADULU. 65

the northern face of South Malosmadulu, and flanked by high and steep
sand beaches. Kari Faro (PI. 29, fig. 1), a large faro to the west of Karidu,
has at the western extremity a broad crescent-shaped reef flat with steep
sand beaches, and a narrow elliptical lagoon of a dark blue color, from three
to four fathoms in depth; the extremity of its eastern rim is occupied by a
small sand-bar topped by a clump of vegetation.

Many of the islands of both North, Middle, and South Malosmadulu
appear as slightly dished on account of the height to which the summits
of the encircling beaches have been thrown up. Mararrekellu, an island
on the northwestern face, is, like Karidu, steep to, with steep coral sand
beaches, and covered by a scanty vegetation. Anghenufuri, marked as a
small Jagoon flat to the east of Mararrekellu, since 1836 has become en-
tirely filled. It is now an islet on the eastern flank of a small reef flat.
Many of the smaller islands of this part of Middle Malosmadulu seem to
be old faros of which the lagoons have been silted up, and subsequently the
islands have encroached on the reef flats so as to occupy the whole of the
former area of the faro and the surrounding reef flats. So that former
diminutive circular barrier reefs have gradually been changed to fringing
reefs, as Karidu has in part.

North Malosmadulu.
Plates 1,8; 8a, fig. 5; 8b, fig. 9; 8c, fig. 26 ; 80; 81, fig. 1.

The northern extremity of North Malosmadulu is open like that of Ari
(Pl. 3); on the northern part of the eastern and western faces the faros
and islands are more distant and separated by wider and deeper passes
than in the southern half of the group. Comparatively few faros, rings,
and islands occur in the interior of the northern half of North Malosmadulu,
and in a belt parallel to the southern part of the east face. But in the
central part of North Malosmadulu, towards the western face, the twenty-
fathom line encloses a large area with innumerable islands, islets, sand-bars,
faros, and coral heads. The southern part of this area is flanked by a belt
of a few more widely separated large islands and faros. The islands on
the east face of North Malosmadulu are large (as Maldive Islands go), and

o

66 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

are separated by wide and deep passes, gradually becoming wider towards
the northern part of North Malosmadulu. Some of the northern passes
are over two miles in width.

The southwestern horn of North Malosmadulu is formed by Mamanaga
(Pl. 30, fig. 1), a large triangular faro the base of which is nearly five miles.
It has a wide rim on the western face, and a lagoon with from five to six
fathoms in depth. A small sand bank has been thrown up on the northwest
horn of the faro. On the southern face to the east of Mamanaga are two
smaller faros (Velengeli and Furuwari), somewhat more than a mile in
length, with very wide eastern rims, a small lagoon towards the western
extremity, and each with a small bank on the eastern horn of the faros.
Velengeli is flanked with coarse shingle., The southwestern part of North
Malosmadulu is quite clear of faros, banks, rimgs, and islands, so that when
entering the group through the pass to the east of Mamanaga, we opened
agreat stretch of clear water to the northeast as if we had passed out into
the open sea. To the north of the southwestern horn and separated from it
by achannel fully a mile in width lies Femfuri Faro, a long triangular 1aro
fully three and a half miles in length, with the apex to the east and the
eastern horn occupied by a small island. Its northern and southern rims
are narrow, they pass gradually into a wide western reef flat.

Tura is a small island facing the wide pass on the west face of North
Malosmadulu between Femfuri Faro and Ma Faro; it is steep to, bounded by
a high steep sand beach; near the southern point extends a stretch of coarse
shingle beach, and on the western spit of the island a belt of small coral
boulders. After passing Tura one sees to the northward rising upon the
horizon the islands occupying the inner belt of North Malosmadulu to
the south of the twenty-fathom curve.

Maregiri’ Island lies south of Bodu Faro, the large faro which occupies
the western horn of North Malosmadulu. On the southwest it is flanked
by steep sand beaches from ten to twelve feet high, with stretches of
coarse shingle driven towards the interior among the bushes and between
the base of the trees beyond that belt. A narrow boulder belt flanks the
base of the beaches. At the western point there is a narrow reef flat

1 Gardiner, loc. cit., p. 387.

a ee a oe

NORTH MALOSMADULU. 67

covered with beach rock, and a patch of reef rock honeycombed and weath-
ered, pitted and undercut; elsewhere the island is steep to. Facing the pass
to the south, the beach is composed of coarse shingle and reaches of sand
with large boulders at the east point. Unfortunately we could not land
and examine the high dunes on the island mentioned by Mr. Gardiner.’

Mr. Gardiner has made a careful comparison of Moresby’s Chart: of a
stretch of the western face of North Mahlos, extending from Kukuludi Faro
to Maduni Faro, with sketches of his own.2 He finds well-marked velus in
Dina Faro and Ma Faro; none are on Moresby’s Chart.’ At Telin Faro and
Bodu Faro, the broad eastern rims of the velu shown by Moresby have
disappeared and they have become connected with the general lagoon.
The faros to the north do not indicate any special change. Mr. Gardiner
considers the enlargement of the velus as due to the solvent action of sea
water. Similar differences on the chart between Turadu and Dunikolu he
attributes to the same cause. When, as is often the case, the rims of the
velus are merely sand, their demolition and the increase of size of the
enclosed velus is not necessarily due to solution. The fillimg up a velu
would result in a reef flat. A study of the northeastern point of Tila-
dummadulu indicates an increase of the land areas of the faros.

I fully agree with Mr. Gardiner’s* view that every large reef on the bank
has grown up by itself. It does not follow, however, from the changes he
has observed, that North Malos is approaching the condition of a perfect
atoll. Wecan trace the passage of such rims composed of atolls, into long
linear reefs only in very limited areas.

We passed out of North Malosmadulu through the pass west of Tura, and
entered again by Maregiri Island (PI. 30, fig. 2; 31, fig. 1). Steaming ina
southeasterly direction, we crossed the corner of the area bounded by the’
twenty-fathom curve, and obtained an idea of the character of the “jungle
of reefs,”° crowded as it is with banks, rings, coral heads, faros, flats, and
islands and islets. The first islet we came upon was a small sand islet
with a clump of bushes in the centre, with steep coral sand beaches and

1 Loe. cit., p. 166. 2 Loc. cit., p. 169.
8 Though the original charts might have indicated such a velu from the position of the coral rocks on

the outer edges on both these faros.
* Loe. cit., p. 171. 5 Gardiner, loc. cit., p. 167.

68 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

a narrow flat, the outer edge of which is indicated by a line of small
coral boulders.

The island of Fusmundu fills the eastern rim of a well-defined faro about
a mile in length. It is flanked by high steep coral sand beaches. The outer
northwestern edge of the rim of the faro is lined with small coral boulders.
From the great height of the beaches enclosing the central part of the island
it presents a dished appearance. A few fine large trees rise in the central
part of the island, but many bushes and smaller trees of the outer belt
have been killed by the spreading sand or are in a dying condition from the
encroachment of the sea.

To the eastward we came upon Muduwari, a small nearly circular
island occupying the greater part of the flat upon which it has been thrown
up. The coral sand beaches are high and steep, the summit of the beach
rising far above the central part of the island. The island seems to be
wasting away; a small islet covered with a little vegetation once a part of
the main islet now stands isolated upon the reef flat near the eastern point
of the island.

On the central part of the north side of Hoholundu Island sand has been
blown from the summit of the high sand beaches well towards the interior,
and has overwhelmed many of the bushes of the outer belt and buried the
base of a number of the larger trees. Hoholundu Island, like the islands
we have just described, occupies the eastern rim of the flat upon which it
has developed. Hoholundu Faro is nearly a mile and a half in length.

At no time during our cruise through the Maldives did we pass
through a region containing so many banks, rings, faros, heads, islands, and
islets as on our way from Maregiri to Medu, when we cut across the only
part of the labyrinth of North Malosmadulu which seemed to promise a
clear passage. The various islands, the different kinds of flats, bars, rings,
and faros in the interior of North Malosmadulu, differ in no way from those
on the outer rim of the so-called atoll of North Malosmadulu. They have
all been formed in the same way both in the interior of the group and on
the outer belt. The outer faros and islands being more exposed to the
modifying influences due to currents and the action of the winds, have
developed more freely and with greater rapidity. Yet some of the islands

NORTH MALOSMADULU. 69

and faros of the interior compare favorably in size, in the extent of
the boulder belt, the height and steepness of the sand beaches, the width
of the rims and reef flats with similar structures on the outer belt of the
group. This is specially the case when the islands in the interior basin
are in such a position as to face a long reach either of the northeast or
southwest monsoon, and are thus placed in conditions more similar to those
of islands and faros on the exterior faces of the groups.

Medu, one of the most important islands of North Malosmadulu, is steep
to; it is surrounded by a high steep coral sand beach with many large trees
in the interior basin of the island formed by the high beaches, the summit
of which rises from four to six feet above the inner flat. The upper part of
the beach we found covered with windrows of masses of pumice. On the
wide sea slope flat corals flourish in great abundance at from six to seven
fathoms of depth, where the slope drops rapidly, and corals become less
numerous; at a depth of about twelve fathoms they disappear very
rapidly as they become separated by lanes and patches of sand and over-
whelmed by sand-bars. The vegetation of the central part of the island is
made up of numerous large trees of Breadfruit, Pandanus, Banyans, and
other forest trees surrounded by a thick outer belt of low bushes and trees ;
many of the bushes belong to genera found on the beaches of Pacific atolls.
The summit of parts of the outer coral sand beach of Medu is from fourteen
to fifteen feet high; the wide path leading across the island drops from
three to four feet towards the interior after passing the flat summit of
the beach.

The islands we passed to the north of Medu— Digeli, Tahwahtah, Roon-
gelly, as well as others we saw in the distance —all rise upon flats of con-
siderable size ; like Medu, they are surrounded by high and steep coral sand
beaches, but their vegetation is less flourishing, consisting mainly of low
bushes and shrubs.

We examined the islands on the east face of North Malosmadulu from
Kotafuri north to Kuda Kura and near Anguretin; those further south and
north, which we did not visit, present, according to the chart, no different
features from the former. The islands to the north of Kotafuri all have
long reef spits extending to the westward. The beaches of Kotafuri are

70 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

wasting, clumps of bushes and trees standing isolated on the surrounding
reef flats. A coarse shingle beach faces the south side of Wandu; towards
the east and the west the coral sand beach is high and steep. There are
no faros on the central part of the east face of North Malosmadulu and
only one on the northern and one on the southern extremity of the face ;
the other islands are generally steep to with narrow reef flats. The vegeta-
tion of these islands is not prominently developed, though occasionally a
fine clump of trees rises above the low outer belt of bushes and smaller
trees. The vegetation of Wandu is better developed than that of either
Rasmadu or Kuda Kura, the southern beach of which, like that of Kotafuri,
is wasting away. The vegetation on Makara is perhaps finer than that of
any other island on the east face of North Malosmadulu; it consists mainly
of extensive clumps of large trees. The island is surrounded by coral sand
beaches with little or no shingle; while on the other islands on the east
face of the group the eastern extremities are flanked with shingle.

On Inamadu very coarse shingle extends from the eastern point half-
way towards the western extremity on the southern face of the island,
where it suddenly changes to fine coral sand. The beaches of the
east face of North Malosmadulu are less steep than those of the islands
in the interior of the group or on the west face of North Malosmadulu.
The islands to the north of Inamadu have the same general character ;
the vegetation is fairly developed; they are all steep to on the southern and
northern faces, with spits or reef flats extending to the westward, but
steepest at the eastern points, where the reef flats are narrow and the
islands are edged with steep shingle and boulder beaches. On the north
faces the shingle and coral sand beaches are distributed much as on the
southern faces of the islands.

Kuda Kura is a long narrow island with scanty vegetation; it is nearly
in the centre of an extensive reef flat projecting to the westward. A
somewhat smaller reef flat, edged by a belt of small coral boulders, forms
the eastern point of the island, which terminates in a steep shingle beach.
An exceedingly coarse shingle beach has been thrown up on the east face
of Rasmadu, as well as on the northeastern horn of Inamadu, where the
shingle has been forced inland between the trees over the summit of

MAKUNUDU. (i

the beach. The narrow reef flats of the eastern faces of these islands are
all edged by a belt of small boulders. The eastern spits of the islands to
the south of Wandu nearly all indicate a certain amount of wasting away.

Anguretin and the adjoining islands of the northern extremity of the
east face of North Malosmadulu are noted for their fine vegetation. Like
the southern islands of the east face, they are on the whole steep to, espe-
cially on the sea face, with comparatively small reef flats. The islands
are surrounded by steep, coarse shingle beaches on the sea face, passing
into fine coral sand beaches towards the west. Both the shingle and sand
are driven far in between the base of the large trees across the outer belt
of bushes and low trees. All the islands of the east face appear slightly
dished from the heights to which the outer summits of the beaches rise
above the enclosed interior area of the island.

The deepest sounding in North Malosmadulu is thirty-one fathoms.
The average of the soundings in the group to the north of the ‘ wilder-
ness,’ as well as to the south and west, is between twenty-four and thirty
fathoms. In Middle Malosmadulu the depths vary between seventeen and
twenty-four fathoms. In Southern Malosmadulu the greatest depth indi-
eated on the chart is thirty-five fathoms. The interior of this group is
somewhat deeper than either North or Middle Malosmadulu, a great many
soundings indicating a depth greater than thirty fathoms.

Off the northern extremity of North Malosmadulu, separated by a
channel of three miles in width, are Powell’s Islands, Etingili and Alifuri,
at the two extremities of a narrow isolated bank about three miles in
length. We did not visit them. They stand to North Malosmadulu in much
the same relation as do other atolls or lagoon reefs and islands such as
Wataru Reef, Rasdu and Toddu Atolls, to Ari and Mulaku.

Makunudu.
Plates 1,2; 8a, fig. 7; 81, fig.2; 82; 33, fig. 1.

We examined the northeastern part of Makunudu (PI. 2), an atoll about
nine miles west of Miladummadulu. It is about fifteen miles long, run-
ning nearly north and south, and quite narrow,—not more than three

te THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

miles wide. The northern face of the atoll is angular; its northeastern
horn is well defined by Makunudu Island (Pl. 31, fig. 2); the rounded
southern face of the atoll forms its southern horn.

The lagoon of Makunudu is of considerable depth; seventeen fathoms
are indicated on the chart. As seen from the outer reef flat, it appears
to be thickly studded with bars, flats, and heads. There are two shallow
passes on the east face of the atoll.

Immediately south of Makunudu Island lies the small island of Fengbu
Hurah, in the centre of the east face the islet of Faro Doru (PI. 33, fig. 1),
covered with tall bushes, and on the northwestern horn a cluster of
diminutive islets covered with bushes. The reef flat which connects Fengbu
Hurah with Makunudu is flanked along its outer edge by coarse shingle,
and the islands themselves really constitute one island, connected as they
are by long sand spits, forming a more or less continuous coral sand beach
between them.

On the chart the outer reef flat of Makunudu is characterized as a
“dry reef.” As far as we examined it, and from what we could see looking
across the atoll, the outer edge of the narrow reef flat is edged by a low
wall of angular coral boulders and heaps of coarse shingle (Pl. 32); the
boulder wall is undercut and greatly weathered. This belt and the
shingle heaps form a dry reef, as it were; it extended as far as we could
trace it, south to Faro Doru, on the northern face of Makunudu, and on the
western face, judging from what we could see looking across the atoll.
We examined the wall of weathered coral boulder off the east face of
Makunudu, where it is better developed than at any other point of the
atoll. It seemed to be made up of coral reef rock and coral boulders
cemented together, undercut and greatly weathered ; rising above the gen-
eral level of the surrounding reef flats, they indicate a slight former eleva-
tion at that point. We observed at many places in the Maldives patches of
similar reef rock, all pointing to a slight elevation at many and widely
scattered localities in the Maldives. The narrow reef flat on the east face
of Makunudu Island widens out at its northern face where the low wall of
coral boulders is broken through to form a shallow boat passage leading
into a small secondary lagoon of moderate depth which connects with the

FADIFFOLU. 73

larger lagoon round the northern point of the island. The coral sand
beaches of the northern part of Makunudu Island are high and steep,
the beaches of the southeastern face are flanked at the base with reaches of
beach rock. Occasionally a larger coral boulder rises on the outer edge of
the reef flat above the general outline of the low wall.

On the outer edge of the reef flat of the northeastern horn of the atoll
(Pl. 32), thrown up along a part of the low boulder wall, lies a small island
covered with a clump of bushes. The existence of this islet in its present
position, identical with that marked on the chart, seems to indicate that no
great changes have taken place in the topography of the northern part of
Makunudu, in spite of the existence of the fringing coral boulder wall
which has been in part elevated and in part probably thrown up on the
east face by the northeast monsoon and on the west face by the southwest
monsoon.

Fadiffolu.
Plates 1, 3; 84, fig. 4; 8b, fig. 11; 8¢, fig. 28 ; 33, fig. 2; 34, fig. 1.

The southeastern face of Fadiffolu (Pl. 3) is bounded by a reef flat, the
greater part of which is nearly two miles wide. Aligau, a small island,
occupies the southwestern horn of the group; a belt of boulders edges its
southern point; the northern and western faces of the island are flanked by
sand beaches. The vegetation of Aligau (Pl. 33, fig. 2) is not flourishing ;
much of it is in a dying condition. A belt of coral boulders and heaps of
shingle extend along the outer edge of the eastern reef flat. There are
comparatively few islands on the eastern reef flat, though one of them,
Difuri,’ is over three miles long.

1 Toc. cit., fig. 103, p. 397, shows the changes observed by Mr. Gardiner in Moresby’s Chart of
Fadiffolu. It seems to me rather hazardous to base upon native records of the former existence of islets
and shoals in the centre of the lagoon any conclusions as to the breaking up of reefs and shoals in the
enclosed parts of Fadiffolu. With such deep and wide openings as exist on the southwest face of Fadiffolu
and from the existence of the broad reef flats on the eastern faces over which a great amount of water
incessantly passes, it can hardly be called “one of the more circumscribed atolls.” It is difficult to
reconcile Mr. Gardiner’s statement that “the lagoon is increasing on all sides at the expense of the
encircling reefs’? (p. 396) with the impression ‘‘ that everywhere the rim reefs were growing together
to form a single enclosing band.”

The position of Inawari (Joc. cit., p. 399) ‘ too far west on its reef ” may be due to its eastern migra-
tion, as is the case of many other sandy islands which increase cither to the east or west or migrate bodily.

74 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Were it not for the existence of velus,' the appearance of the reef flats
of the southeast face of Fadiffolu is quite that of some of the reef flats of
the Pacific atolls, with their double row of islands.

Fadiffolu is irregularly rectangular in shape with rounded corners.
The northeastern and southwestern faces are concave, the others convex.
It is nineteen miles in length and about twelve miles in width. On the
southwestern face a deep gap five miles in width separates Aligau and
Lowalafuri (Pl. 34, fig. 1), the next island to the north; between it and
Kanifuri, the large triangular reef flat which forms the western horn of the
atoll, there are only two small reef flats and a small island on the southwest
face of Fadiffolu. Near the centre of the southwestern gap rises Maduwari,
a small island, steep to, covered with low vegetation, much of which is
dead or dying, as is the case with the vegetation of so many of the islands
and islets in the northern part of Male and north of that group. Lowala-
furi is steep to; on the western face a steep shingle beach extends into the
base of the outer belt of vegetation; much of this is dying; the sea is
evidently encroaching upon the south side of the island. A lagoon extends
off the eastern face of the main island, which is joined by a sand-bar to the
islet on the eastern rim of the lagoon reef, which probably was once a part
of the larger island.

Lohi is also wasting at the southern extremity; both it and Kurangdu
are steep to on the western face. Some large trees are growing on Kurangdu,
though nearly all in a poor condition; this may be due to the effect of the
southwest monsoon.

On the west and northwest faces of Fadiffolu we have a series of inde-
pendent lagoon reefs, most of them with islands such as occur on the pla-
teaus of Tiladummati and Miladummadulu. In the latter case the faros or
atolls are often separated by gaps of from five to ten miles, while in the
former case they are only from one to three miles apart. A long reef flat
forms the western face of the northern pass into Fadiffolu. We entered
Fadiffolu by the wide pass south of Maro.

The difference in structure of the southwestern and northwestern faces

1 Two of the eastern reef flats of Fadiffolu have been figured by Mr. Gardiner and the differences
with the Admiralty Chart carefully described by him, loc. cit., p. 400, fig. 104.

FADIFFOLU. 75

of Fadiffolu is most marked when compared to similar faces of atolls like
Addu, Minikoi, Gaha Faro, or Goifurfehendu, and others where an exten-
sive lagoon flat slopes gradually from the inner face of the outer reef flat
towards the deeper part of the lagoon. In such an open group as Fadiffolu
where the lagoon reef flat is limited to the slope of the rims of the compo-
nent faros the difference becomes most striking; we seemed when at an-
chor off Mafilefuri to be off the steep slope of an isolated atoll with other
atolls looming up in the distance.

The gap between Maro and Mafilefuri forms a deep bay, shut off from
the sea face by a belt of boulders running across the gap. On the east
face of Mafilefuri a lagoon extends northward, parallel to the island. The
eastern beaches of Maro and Mafilefuri are alternate stretches of shingle
and coral sand. The islands off our anchorage, like those to the south on
the southwest face, are also wasting away. The western faces of Maro
and Mafilefuri are flanked by a steep, coarse shingle beach; the western
face is steep to; a narrow reef flat, however, exists at the northern ex-
tremity of the island.

We skirted the southern face of the triangular reef flat forming the
western horn of Fadiffolu. The extremities of the long narrow islands
on the southern edge of that flat are generally covered with coarse shingle
beaches, they run close to the southern edge. When not steep to, they
are flanked with coral sand beaches or smaller shingle. The point of one
of the islets was specially marked by the mass of small boulders at the
base of the beach, forming a low wall of modern reef rock. These
boulders were angular, undercut, pitted, honeycombed, and greatly weath-
ered. The action of the southwest monsoon on the southwest face of
Fadiffolu ij evidently very considerable. It sweeps north, unbroken,
through the open space between Ari and Goifurfehendu, so that the south-
west face of Fadiffolu is exposed to its full strength.

To the east of Kanifuri the outer edge of the reef flat is fringed by
sand banks and is protected by a belt of large boulders; on the south shore
of Deku a steep, coarse coral shingle beach encroaches upon the belt of
vegetation. Dehu appears to be wasting at its western extremity, where
patches of vegetation are standing on the reef flat, and close to the beach

76 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

portions of the belt of bushes are dying. All along the southwest face of
Fadiffolu the inclination of the belt of vegetation and its slant to the east-
ward shows the effect of the southwest monsoon. On the south shore of
Kanifuri, which is not quite so exposed to the full sweep of the southwest
monsoon, the vegetation becomes quite flourishing again. The southern
beach of Kanifuri is a steep, coarse shingle beach; the island is edged
by a narrow reef flat, and is steep to at the western extremity, which
forms the western horn of Fadiffolu. From five to seven feet of water are
found on the reef flat of the western horn of Fadiffolu.

Though there are no passes through the great southeastern reef flat of
Fadiffolu, yet a great mass of water passes over it. On the northeast
face, from Faidu the extremity of the reef flat on the southeast face, four
narrow reef flats occupy the outer rim as far as Kuredu, the northern horn
of the group.’ Two of the flats are separated by narrow passes, but the
northeastern pass is wide and of considerable depth.

There are but few rings, banks, and faros within the Fadiffolu group, all
in the western parts, the eastern parts of the atoll being quite clear. The
greatest depth of Fadiffolu is thirty-two fathoms; the greater number of
the soundings are between twenty and twenty-five fathoms.

On the west face of Kanifuri the corals were found to be most flourish-
ing off the western horn, in the belt from eight to nine fathoms, gradually
becoming less numerous towards the surface. They extend to seventeen
fathoms, where the sand-bars and lanes and patches of sand gradually
become wider, separating the coral masses into distinct clusters, until they
become irregular, decrease gradually in size, and finally disappear in the
belt of dead and dying fragments of corals at the base of the talus of the
reef flat.

The trend of the northwest face of Fadiffolu with reference to the
northeast and southwest monsoon is such that it is raked by both, while
the eastern and the western faces of most of the groups are raked by only
one of the monsoons, and remain under the lee during the season of the
other. This readily explains the distribution of the shingle, of the coral sand
beaches, and of the boulder belts on the outer edge of the rims of faros

1 Gardiner, loc. cit., p. 400, fig. 104.

FADIFFOLU. rare

or of reef flats, as well as the relative number of islands and islets scattered
either on the windward or the lee face of the different groups. We might
as a rule call the eastern the lee face, for the strength of the northeast
monsoon is not to be compared with that of the southwest monsoon upon
the western faces of the Maldive Islands. Of course the west face is the
lee during the period of the northeast monsoon. These conditions again
are somewhat modified to the south from Haddummati to Suvadiva and
Addu, where we are outside of the region of the monsoons, in the area of
calms and variable equatorial winds.

Native Boat, MAteg.

78 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

TILADUMMATI-MILADUMMADULU PLATEAU.

Plates 1, 2, 8; 84a, figs. 2-4, 5,7; 34, fig. 2; 36-53 ; 79, fig. 3.

MinapumMADULU and Tiladummati, the largest and nearly northernmost
groups of the Maldives, are in reality parts of the same plateau; their
boundary is an artificial one, a mere political division line running east and
west south of Mavaida (Pls. 2, 3). This great northern plateau is fully
eighty miles in length with a greatest breadth of twenty and a minimum
width of ten miles. It is in striking contrast to the southern groups, of
which the outer faces are more or less well defined by belts of faros or
of islands, or by reef flats as in Ari, North and South Malosmadulu, North
and South Male, North and South Nilandu (Pls. 1, 4, 5). The outer faces
are still better defined in the more southern groups like Mulaku, Felidu,
Kolumadulu, Haddummati, Suvadiva and in such smaller atolls as Addu,
Goifurfehendu, Makunudu, Ihavandiffulu, Wataru, Gaha Faro, and Karidu.

This northern part of the Maldivian plateau forms a great arc convex
to the west with a slight indentation in the central part of the western
face and one less marked to the south (Pls. 2, 3). On the east face, how-
ever, are two great bights nearly fifteen miles across, forming re-entering
curves. The southern part of the interior of the plateau is studded for
twenty miles with distant islands and faros, some of them of considerable
size. They are, however, few in number compared with the many islands,
faros, and banks often crowded together as in parts of the interior of
North and South Malosmadulu and in some of the central groups like Ari,
North and South Male, and Nilandu. In the central part of the plateau the
islands are less numerous than in the southern part; there are only fifteen
in a distance of nearly forty miles, leaving that part of the plateau quite
an open sea. In the northern extremity of the plateau the islands are
again somewhat more numerous; there are nineteen of them, all except
five of considerable size, the largest of the interior islands of Tiladummati.

TILADUMMATI-MILADUMMADULU PLATEAU. 79

The southern part of the east face of the Tiladummati-Miladummadulu
Plateau is bounded mainly by distant crescent-shaped islands or faros with
or without sinks or lagoons, and by two large reef flats, on the eastern rim
of one of which there are two islands and on the other Kendikolu Island,
one of the largest in the Maldives (Pl. 3). On the southeast face there are
two large faros with islands occupying the eastern face of the reef’ flats,
one of which, Ma Faro, is over two miles long and forms the southeastern
rim of a small atoll about three and a half miles in greatest length. There
is an opening with ten fathoms of water on the northeast face, leading
into the lagoon of the atoll, which has a greatest depth of about eight.
A couple of islets have been thrown up on the northeastern edge of the rim
flat. The other, Edu Faro, to the south, is also a small atoll bounded on the
east by a large crescentic island on the outer face of the wide eastern reef
flat, which encloses a well-defined, elongated lagoon flanked on the west
by a narrow rim flat. It resembles Karidu, but is larger. Atolls similar
to Edu Faro, differing, however, in shape, occur on the northern part of
the eastern face of Tiladummati. One of them, Hanimadu, is four miles
in length.

By far the most interesting feature of the northern horn of Tiladummati
are the three atolls which form its northeastern point (Pl. 2). Filadu, the
southern atoll, with a long bow-shaped island flanking the eastern reef
flat, with sinks in the two club-shaped extremities of the island, and a wide
pass of nearly a mile in breadth leading into a circular lagoon of nine
fathoms in depth, bounded on the south by a reef flat nearly two miles
wide. Kelai, the northern atoll, forming the eastern horn of Tiladummati, is
over four miles in length. Its eastern face is flanked by a large hook-
shaped island on the outer edge of a wide reef flat,-tapering to the west
and towards the southwest to form the narrow rim of a large lagoon,
with a greatest depth of eight fathoms. The western rim of the lagoon is
narrow, much broken, with narrow passages leading into the lagoon
through the open western rim. A small island occupies the western horn
of the faro. The western atoll, Warifuri, is a pear-shaped faro with a narrow
island on the southern edge of the narrow rim of the eastern reef flat;
the lagoon enclosed by it is circular and a wide triangular western rim

80 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

reef flat forms the northwestern horn of the faro. The lagoon has a greatest
depth of more than seven fathoms.

Nearly the whole western face of Tiladummati and of Miladummadulu
is edged with large faros with or without islands, which may vary from
a sand islet to islands of more than a mile in length.

Filadu, Kelai, and Warifuri occupy a striking position. They are placed
on the steep edge of the horn of a plateau, which on the eastern face slopes
in a distance of about five miles to seven hundred and eighty-one fathoms,
on the northern face to six hundred and one fathoms, and two hundred and
fifty fathoms in a northwesterly direction, while the depth of the central
part of the plateau within the area enclosed by these lagoon reefs is
nowhere greater than twenty-nine fathoms. So that on the theory of sub-
sidence we should have to account for the sinking of the eastern face
of Kelai, Filadu, and Baura to a depth of over seven hundred fathoms,
while the western faces were formed during a subsidence of less than thirty
fathoms. On the same theory the southern faces of Kelai, Warifuri, and
the other lagoon reefs of the northern face of Tiladummati were formed
during a subsidence of from twenty to thirty fathoms, while the northern
faces subsided from two hundred and fifty to six hundred fathoms! Again,
in the same inner basin of Tiladummati and Miladummadulu are a number
of smaller lagoon reefs, atolls in every sense of the word, which on the
theory of subsidence could only have been formed during a subsidence of
about thirty fathoms. Some of them in the central part of the group have
become islands; others are still lagoon reefs, as will be seen by a glance at
the charts. To the former category belong Muradu, Mahafai, Kumberidu,
and nearly all the islands in the central part of Tiladummati and Miladum-
madulu, such as Faidu, Madidu, Kandute, Rebudu, and a number of small
and nameless islands in the eastern and southern part of Miladummadulu.
To the latter series belong Goadu, Maruri, Wagaru with a lagoon of eight
fathoms in depth, Kabafaro, Dureadu with a lagoon of eighteen fathoms in
depth, Maddedu with a lagoon of eight fathoms, and a number of unnamed
rings and diminutive lagoon reefs in the southern part of Miladummadulu.

The conditions which have shaped the formation of the faros of the reefs
and islands of Tiladummati and Miladummadulu are similar to those which

‘

TILADUMMATI-MILADUMMADULU PLATEAU. 81

have led to the formation of the faros, the inner and outer lagoon reefs
of North and South Malosmadulu, of North and South Male, of Ari, of
Nilandu, and other Maldive groups. They show in great detail that
subsidence cannot account for the formation of atolls upon banks of such
great differences in depth as those of the Maldives, and all within short
distances of one another. It would require an irregularity and a range
in the vertical oscillations of different parts of the Maldivian plateau
entirely without precedent. The deepest soundings indicated on the chart
for the Tiladummati-Miladummadulu plateau is thirty fathoms, but the
greatest number of soundings range between twenty and twenty-four
fathoms.

Entering, as we did, Miladummadulu from the west, to the south of
Digu Faro (Pl. 2), one cannot fail to observe, looking either east or south,
how little land is visible, how open and unobstructed is this stretch of
Miladummadulu, and how exposed are its opposite shores, according to the
season, to the full action of the prevailing winds. One gets quite the
impression of being in the open sea, with a few islands looming up here
and there on the horizon. They are, however, so far apart and so few and
insignificant in size, that they afford little or no shelter from the monsoons
to islands even at a small distance. A glance at the chart cannot fail to
bring this out. Great stretches of the interior of the central and northern
part of Miladummadulu are bare of islands, with here and there a diminu-
tive patch. They give the impression of a great open tract of sea, — fully
sustained when one steams through the area delineated on the chart.

The most characteristic features of this plateau are the open nature of
the interior waters and the number and great width and depth of the
passages between the islands and faros on the outer faces of the group.
On the central part of the east face is a wide opening nearly ten miles
across; five passages are over four miles in width, four are nearly three
miles wide, twelve are over two miles, and five are two, with at least
fifteen or sixteen passes of a mile between the smaller islands and faros.
On the west face there are nine passes of more than one and a half miles,
In fact, the length of deep open water on the faces of the Tiladummati-Mila-
dummadulu group far exceeds in length that of the islands, faros, and flats

6

82 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

hol

(Pls. 2, 3), a condition which can hardly be called that of an atoll. Such a
state of things seems to indicate that coral reefs and atolls may begin at any
point or knoll or ridge or range or summit or flat of a plateau, having the
depth at which corals may begin to form, provided its waters have the
necessary temperature and the proper exposure to currents or trades.
The surface of the Maldivian plateau consists of a host of such knolls,
summits, and ridges of greater or less dimension, upon which have risen the
complicated system of islands, faros, reef flats, and atolls with which we have
become familiar during our exploration of the Maldives.

To understand the coral reefs of the Maldives, we must look upon each
ring or faro or islet or island on a reef flat as a thing by itself, just as much
entitled to be called an atoll as any of the smaller atolls found in the
Pacific, — atolls which only incidentally play a secondary part as reef flats
of the outer faces of the groups, but which in spite of their position do not
hold to the enclosed water the same relation which the reef flats or land
rim of an atoll hold to the enclosed lagoon.

Nowhere in the Maldives have we met with better examples of the modi-
fying effect of the regular southwest and northeast monsoons as compared to
the effect of winds in regions of southerly variable winds and squalls than in
the northernmost groups of the Maldives. One can readily trace the direct
action of the monsoons upon similar islands when situated either on the east
or west face or on the inner waters of the group. Of course all that part of
the Tiladummati and Miladummadulu groups which lies north of North
Malosmadulu cannot fail to be greatly affected by the action of the south-
west monsoon on the western face of the group.’ Entering Tiladummati to
the south of Muradu, we had to stem a current sweeping west with great
violence, it being the season of the northeast monsoon.

It is interesting to note the changes which have taken place in the
outlines of many of the islands on the rim reef flats of both the western and
eastern faros of the group since 1836. Some of the islands which were
isolated at that time and are represented on the charts as single distant
islands on opposite extremities of the rim of a faro have either both greatly

' Gardiner, loc. cit, p. 315, has called attention to the small importance of the agency even of
heavy yales on the edges of the reefs.

MILADUMMADULU. 83

increased in size so as nearly to become united, or they form only a single
crescent-shaped island on the outer edge of the rim reef flat. The further
change these crescentic islands undergo from the action of the monsoons are
often very striking. In fact, the crescent-shaped islands on the east face of
the group almost seem to move in the direction of the prevailing monsoon,
like great horseshoe-shaped dunes. Only their motion is limited to the
extension of the horns of the crescent in the direction of the wind until the
horns have locked, and the ring, once a crescent-shaped island partly
enclosing a small lagoon, ends in completely surrounding the lagoon and
forming the typical and mythical atoll so often described by writers on
geography, but which really is only found very rarely in the great atoll
regions of the Pacific, but finds its greatest development in the thousand
isles of the Maldives. The islands of the interior of the plateau are wasting;
the inner banks appear to be all of the same height; and from the bridge
we could see no indications, from the discoloration of the water, of banks
growing up or having come near the surface.

The crescentic islands on the eastern face of the northern part of
Tiladummati show this process of growth admirably, and there we can readily
trace the development of a large single island from two smaller islands placed
at each extremity of the atoll. We need only look at the charts and follow
the gradual junction of the two islands of Hanimadu now connected by a
low narrow sand spit, or those of Filadu or of Baura and Kelai or Noliwang
Faro, and pass to such an island as Kuludu Faro, which occupies fully one
half of the faro flat, to Komangdu and finally to Nuriwari, each occupying
a gradually greater part of the reef flat rim till the island occupies the
whole, and appears as a circular or elliptical island steep to, surrounded by
an insignificant fringing reef flat !

Miladummadulu.
Plates 1, 2,3; 8a, figs. 4,5,7; 34, fig. 2; 85-44; 79, fig. 8.

The southern part of Karema, the southernmost island on the south face
of Miladummadulu, is wasting away; many of the trees and bushes are well

84 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

out on the small reef flat of the southern end of the island.’ Karema, like
most of the islands on the outer faces of Miladummadulu, is steep to; it is
bordered by coral sand beaches. On Wataru (Pl. 34, fig. 2; 35, fig. 1), to
the northeast of Karema, a large island occupies the southern rim of the
faro. The vegetation of the island is poor; most of it is dead or dying,
the sand and shingle of the high steep beaches having been blown far in
between the trees through the outer belt of bushes. The southwest mon-
soon must strike the south face of Miladummadulu with considerable force ;
the tops of many of the cocoanut-trees are blown off, leaving nothing but
the trunks. The lagoon of Wataru is circular and occupies the northern
part of the faro; it is surrounded by comparatively wide rims and has
a greatest depth of three fathoms. On Wataru flats as well as on the
southern flat rims of the east face of Edu Faro are extensive violet and
dark green patches of corals. The south face of the southern island of
Edu Faro is bordered by steep shingle beaches, and a belt of boulders and
shingle extends along the outer edge of the reef flats. Edu Faro (PI. 35,
fig. 2) is steep to, with an extremely narrow reef flat on the sea face.
The long lagoon to the west of the wide eastern rim is shallow; its
greatest depth is only three fathoms; it is flanked on the west by a
moderately wide reef flat rim.

The two islands on the eastern face of Edu Faro (Pl. 35, fig. 2) must once
have been separated by a gap of greater width than the one now existing.
From the opposing extremities of the islands are forming extensive sand
spits and sand flats broken up into a number of bars and islands and islets,
covered with more or less vegetation. These islets, bars, and spits, as is
more clearly seen in more northerly islands of this group, will eventually
unite into one large island.

Denduni and a nameless island to the eastward‘with a wide reef flat on
the northern face present no peculiar features; they both are steep to, and
have steep coral sand beaches with an outer belt of low bushes and rather
scanty vegetation. On Huludu, a small island nearer the western face of

? Darwin, loc. cit., p. 103, mentions that one of the Maldive reefs “which within a few years existed
as an islet, bearing cocoanut-trees, was found by Lieutenant Prentice, entirely covered with live corals
and Madrepore.”” The natives believe that the islet was washed away. Darwin, however, attributes
the change to subsidence.

ae

MILADUMMADULU. 85

Miladummadulu, the vegetation is again quite flourishing ; some large forest
trees occur on the western face. Huludu is also steep to and flanked
by steep coral sand beaches. Similarly Lofara and Watu, small islands to
the south of which we passed, have steep coral sand beaches, are steep to,
and covered with scanty vegetation.

All the islands of the southern part of Miladummadulu, with their high
and steep coral sand beaches, enclosing an inner area somewhat lower than the
summit of the beaches, give one the impression of being slightly dished.

Mavila, on the west face of Miladummadulu, is a triangular island with a
reef flat on the northwestern face. It is steep to, surrounded with steep
coral sand beaches, and fairly well wooded ; some of the trees on the eastern
point are of considerable size. About six miles to the north on the west
face of Miladummadulu, and separated from it by a circular faro of fully two
miles in diameter, with a lagoon of a greatest depth of eight fathoms, rises
Digu Faro, an elliptical faro pointed to the south. The small islet with
its clump of trees indicated on the chart as existing on the southern spit of
the faro has disappeared ; nothing can be seen but a diminutive sand bank
on which a few terns were collected.

Deha Faro consists of two small islands on opposite faces of an irregular
elliptical reef flat covered with low bushes; they are bounded by coral sand
beaches ; the eastern island is wasting away; the outer belt of bushes runs
close to the water’s edge.

Maddedu (PI. 36, fig. 1), in the very centre of the southern part of the
group, is a triangular faro with a reef flat occupying the eastern part and
an island at its eastern spit; while the western half is a small lagoon,
bounded by a sunken narrow rim flat, having a greatest depth of eight
fathoms. The island is covered with low vegetation, much of it in a dying
condition ; the eastern face is wasting; the outer edge of the reef flat is
bordered by a belt of boulders; a beach of coarse coral shingle flanks the
east face.

To the southeastward of our track we passed by Tolandu, a small
steep-to island on the east face of the group, with a scanty outer belt of
low bushes surrounding the cocoanuts of the interior of the island. The
western face is a long steep coral sand beach; the base of the coarse

86 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

coral shingle beach of the northeast face is edged by a belt of boulders; as
far as we could judge from the charts, and from what we saw of the small
islands to the north and west of Ma Faro, they present no special features
of interest. The deep pass with a depth of ten fathoms leading into the
lagoon of Ma Faro, with its islets in the reef flats in addition to its larger
island flanking the east face, gives to that faro all the appearance of a
small atoll.’

Kendikolu (Pl. 37) is one of the largest reef flats of the southern part of
the east face of Miladummadulu, the greater part of which is occupied by
the island of Kendikolu, one of the largest in the Maldives. It is steep to
on the east face; the western face is occupied by a comparatively narrow
reef flat somewhat wider at the northern extremity. The southern point of
Kendikolu is bordered by steep shingle beaches, while all the way to the
north extends a magnificent steep coral sand beach. Corals grow in great
profusion on the slope off the western face of Kendikolu. The island is
noted for the long sinks which occupy the greater part of the central
portion of the island. We visited the northern one (PI. 38); it is some-
what nearer the eastern face of the island, separated from it only by a
narrow ridge of shingle and of sand. The depth of this brackish pool is
only about eighteen inches; its shores are overgrown with mangroves.
There are many Pandanus, Hibiscus, Breadfruit, and other forest trees on
Kendikolu; the vegetation is quite dense.

The islands on the eastern face of Miladummadulu to the north of Ken-
dikolu, as far as Nalandu (Pls. 2, 3), proved most interesting. In general
they are small crescentic islands occupying a greater or less area of the
edge of the rim reef flat of the faro encircling in part a small lagoon. From
this stage we find all possible conditions of development from a closed ring
surrounding a diminutive lagoon or only a sink in an island where all trace
of its mode of formation has disappeared.

Komandu (Pl. 36, fig. 2) is a circular island, steep to, with large boulders
on the south beach; a coarse shingle beach extends round the eastern face,
and a steep sand beach flanks the west side. A small reef flat covered with
shingle extends off the north point. The vegetation of both Komandu and

1 Ma Faro is three and a half miles long, Gardiner, Joc. cit., p. 395.

MILADUMMADULU. 87

of Breyfasdu (Pl. 39, fig. 1) is tall and dense; the latter has, like the
former, a stretch of large boulders on the southeast face.’ Both islands are
wasting away.

In Bomasdu (Pl. 39, fig. 2) the lagoon has become entirely silted up;
nothing is left of it except a very shallow sink almost filled with patches of
sand, which cross it in every direction. The sand beaches of the sea face
are steep; the outer edge of the reef rim flat is crowded with large patches
of flourishing corals.

Bodu Mandu (PI. 40, fig. 1), also on the east face of Miladummadulu,
is steep to; the greater part of the lagoon has been filled up to the general
level of the rim reef flat; the lagoon is shut off from the sea by a steep
shingle beach which now joins the two horns of the crescent-shaped island
and encloses a lagoon with a depth of five fathoms. In 1836 this lagoon
was, according to the chart, connected with the sea across the narrow still
slightly submerged rim reef flat, but it is now closed. In all the crescent-
shaped or linear or other islands on the reef flats of the faros of the east
face of Miladummadulu or of other groups which have increased in size and
been formed by the coalescence of smaller islands, it is always possible to
detect, by the difference in the character of the vegetation, those parts of
the land rim which are of more recent origin and have grown up on the
connecting spits or horns. No atoll we have seen shows in a simpler and
more convincing manner than Bodu Mandu how an enclosed lagoon of
considerable depth, completely shut off from the sea, has been formed by
the throwing up of a shingle dam connecting the horns of the crescent-
shaped island and enclosing a part of the old rim flat and central area
of the faro.

In Kuda Mandu (PI. 40, fig. 2), the next atoll to the north, the lagoon is
not quite shut off, it is only partly closed by a bar of shingle thrown up on
the shallow rim of the reef flat. There is to the eastward of the bar a
boat passage giving free access to the sea at all stages of the tide.

Another interesting crescent-shaped atoll is Dureadu (Pls. 41, 42, fig. 1),
situated in the centre of the narrowest part of Miladummadulu. It is a faro

1 Hainbuddu I did not visit. According to Gardiner, loc. cit., p. 394, it is unique among the
Maldives in having a definite reef flat on all sides except the west.

88 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

or atoll with a wide-rimmed reef flat that has only reached the surface, close
to the horns of the island. The rest of the rim flat is submerged, leaving
the lagoon open for the whole width of the faro, with as much as five
fathoms of water on parts of the rim. The principal island of Dureadu
is clothed with luxuriant vegetation; at the extremity of the eastern
horn rises a small island covered with large bushes and separated from
the principal island by a line of large coral boulders. The east face of
the islet and of the principal island is flanked by a shingle beach with
stretches of small coral boulders which extend also on the northern face
of the main island of the atoll. The lagoon of Dureadu is one of the
deepest of the small independent atolls in the Maldives; it is fully a mile
across with a depth of eighteen fathoms. Dureadu resembles Nalandu,
though the lagoon of the latter is much smaller and its greatest depth
is not more than two fathoms.’

All the islands we passed on the east face of Miladummadulu are steep
to; there are no reef flats or spits extending from the flats on the lee side,
as in the islands of many of the other groups. . The original flats must have
been limited to the areas now occupied by the islands or faros.

Ekasdu (Pls. 42, fig. 2; 43) is perhaps the most advanced stage of an
enclosed central lagoon. It could be well seen from aloft. The outer
beaches are all steep coarse shingle slopes. The lagoon of Ekasdu is of
a dark blue color, indicating a depth fully as great as that of the lagoon
of Bodu Mandu with a greatest depth of five fathoms.

Ereadu, the next island to the north, though less than a mile in diameter,
is the largest of the chain of small islands between Kuludu and Furnadu
on the east face of Miladummadulu. The crescent-shaped island, open
to the west, encloses within its horns an elliptical lagoon, shallow at its
southern extremity with a wide shallow western rim over which the sea
flows freely into the lagoon; parts of the rim are barely awash. EHreadu
represents one of the earliest stages in the closing off of a lagoon where

no dam or shingle heap has as yet been thrown up on the reef flat between
the horns.
1 Of the central islands it was only at Dureadu that Gardiner found on the northwest face the exist-

ence of a definite but very limited reef flat with a well-formed fissure zone of gradual slope to the
general level, loc. cit., p. 388.

MILADUMMADULU. 89

The reef flat enclosing the islands of Furnadu (PI. 44, fig. 1) and Faru-
kolu’ is nearly two miles wide and four in length; the islands are separated
by a wide reef flat with islets and sand banks thrown up on the outer
edge of the eastern face. At the extremities of the central part of the reef
flat a small shallow lagoon has been formed. The western face of the
reef flat is covered with patches of flourishing corals. The two islands
are hook-shaped; the narrow deep bays formed by the extension of the
hooks or spits to the north and south enclose a shallow part of the reef
flats, indicating clearly how the shallow sinks of such islands as Kuludu
and Kendikolu are formed. Such sinks or lagoons or rather shallow
enclosed bays of parts of the reef flats must not be confounded with the
enclosed lagoons of faros of such islands as Nalandu, Milandu, and the
small crescent-shaped islands to the south or the larger crescent-shaped
islands on the northeastern horn of Tiladummati. Sinks or enclosed bays
like those of Kuludu exist on Makandudu and to the north in Kuludu Faro,
and the two extremities of Filadu. In the northern faros, as in Kuludu,
these sinks occur on faros or atolls where the lagoons are well developed,
plainly showing the distinct differences in the mode of formation of the two.

The northwestern point of Makandudu is flanked by a large pile of coral
boulders and beach rock slabs on the east face, exposed to the northeast
monsoon ; the island is bounded by steep coral shingle beaches. The island
is steep to with a small shallow sink in the central part of the island.

The southern face of Milandu is wasting away; off the beach great
clumps of trees and bushes are standing on the reef flat. The coral
shingle has been driven by the southwest monsoon far in between the
clumps of trees and bushes. Milandu is a narrow crescent-shaped island,
somewhat dumb-bell-shaped; it lies on the outer edge of the eastern reef
flat which forms the eastern rim of the shallow lagoon enclosed between
it and the western rim flat. On the chart the greatest depth of the lagoon
is marked as two fathoms; its light green color would not indicate even
that depth. The western rim flat connecting the horns of the island is quite
shallow, the sea breaking over the greater part of it. The horns of the
island have extended westward somewhat beyond the position indicated

' Gardiner, loc. cit., p. 391, fig. 99,

90 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

on the chart, the opening into the lagoon over the western rim being much
narrower than when it was surveyed in 1836. The beaches of Milandu
are all steep, of coral shingle, even the inner beaches flanking the eastern
face of the lagoon. The dumb-bell shape of the crescent-shaped Milandu
Island indicates that at one time there were two islands on the extremities
of the reef flats of the faro; the spits making both ways and extending
north and south from them, they gradually joined and finally formed a
single crescentic island.

The structure of Nalandu (PI. 44, fig. 2), the northernmost of the
crescent-shaped islands of Miladummadulu, throws considerable light on
the mode of formation of atolls which, like Kuludu, Filadu, and others, have
both a lagoon and a sink, or enclosed bay, once forming a part of the outer
rim reef flat. Nalandu is a small island, less than a mile in diameter, with a
lagoon two fathoms deep and a pass open to the south; it also has a closed
sink or bay, one fathom in depth, communicating with the lagoon and con-
siderably larger than the lagoon itself. At low tide a great part of the sink
is bare, the bottom being fine coral ooze; it is an exceedingly pretty sheet
of water surrounded on all sides by clumps of large forest trees, with bays
and bights reaching out from all faces. The sink is separated from the
eastern part of the lagoon by a low sand point covered with a thick tangle
of bushes and trees; a wide rim covered by tall forest trees and man-
groves divides it from the sea on the eastern and western sides; it is
flanked on the north by a narrow rim flat. On the outer face Nalandu is
surrounded by steep coral shingle beaches; off the western face of the
island lies a small reef flat awash; on its outer edge a belt of boulders
and heaps of shingle have been thrown up; they pass into the boulder
and shingle spits of the horns of the island. The southeastern face of the
island, as well as the western point, is wasting away.

To the west of Ereadu begins an inner line of small, steep to islands,
with the exception of Kabafaro, which is crescent-shaped and flanked by a
small reef flat. This inner line of islands runs northerly from Ereadu to
Fivaku, nearly parallel to the eastern face of Miladummadulu, at a distance
of from two to three miles. They have no distinguishing features from
similar inner or outer islands of other groups in the Maldives.

MILADUMMADULU. 91

We passed at a short distance off Kuraidu, the northernmost of this
inner chain of islands; its southern face is flanked by steep, coarse shingle
beaches, with a mass of boulders along the southwestern point. The island
is steep to; its vegetation is scanty. Faidu and Madidu, which are more in
the central part of the group, are steep to, and both have, according to the
chart, small central sinks. They are, like Kuraidu, surrounded by steep,
coarse shingle beaches. The vegetation of both is poor; it seems to be
affected by the action of the southwest monsoon.

Looking to the northeast, while off Madidu, we are facing the great
central gap of Miladummadulu, between Fivaku and Mavaidu, nearly fifteen
miles wide, with only Nu and Numara on the horizon across this great and
deep passage.

On the western face of Miladummadulu, to the south of Bilifuri, are a
number of large faros and reef flats and islands, similar in all respects,
according to the charts, to those we examined, as well as a few small
islands scattered towards the centre of Miladummadulu to the north of
Dureadu, similar to the inner line of small islands near the east face of
the group.

Kofenbe, to the south of our track, is a large faro over two miles in
diameter, with a lagoon of a greatest depth of three fathoms, and a wide
rim flat. A large triangular island occupies the greater part of the east-
ern rim. The vegetation consists of low bushes, though on the eastern
face there are a few clumps of large trees. The island is flanked by steep
coarse coral shingle beaches.

The island of Bilifuri occupies a good part of the eastern rim flat of
the faro. The southern extremity of the island seems to be extending west-
ward asa sand spit forming the northern face of a small bay surrounded
with large forest trees. The southern spit itself is flanked by a coarse coral
shingle beach. The island is covered by fine trees and a thick outer belt of
bushes and smaller trees. Along the eastern face of the island the steep
shingle beaches are of still coarser material, with an outer belt of coral
boulders as large, if not larger, than any we have seen thus far in the
Maldives. Close to the northern point of the island the narrow entrance to
the lagoon is still plainly visible, and as we swept past it we obtained an

92 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

excellent view of the western shore of the island and of the part of the lagoon
enclosed by the wide rim of the reef flat on the western face of the faro.
The lagoon of Bilifuri is quite shallow; its depth is not more than one and
a half to two fathoms; its light-green color scarcely marking the outline
of the lagoon, blended as it is with the greenish tints of the wide rim
enclosing it, and covered with a few feet of water; on the northern
face of the rim flat the sea breaks along the outer edge and all the way
across. Beyond the diminutive pass into the lagoon the outer edge of’
the rim reef flat is flanked by a belt of heaps of shingle and of small
boulders. Magnificent coral patches dot the outer rim of Bilifuri as well
as of the eastern rim flat of the large faro to the north of it on the western
face of Miladummadulu. This large faro is over four miles in length,
pear-shaped ; the larger of the enclosed lagoons is open at the northern
extremity of the faro; near the southern face a smaller circular lagoon
less than half a mile in diameter is enclosed by the wide crescentic reef
flat rim of the faro. The narrow sand bank on the eastern face of the
faro is scantily covered with trees and an outer belt of small bushes.
The beaches of the narrow islet of the faro to the north of Bilifuri are
flanked with beach rock, and near the northern point with a few boulders
at the base of the steep, coarse shingle beaches. Much of the beach rock
and some of the boulder reaches are undercut, pitted, honeycombed, and
greatly weathered. Stretches of this weathered coral boulder belt extend
along the northeastern face of the faro; they indicate a former slightly
greater elevation.

As we passed out of Miladummadulu west of Goadu, we steamed by the
long narrow channel leading into the lagoon at the tip of the northwest
horn of the faro to the west of Goadu, a mere strip of light-blue water
flanked on both sides by a light-greenish flat rim.

Kandute and Goadu are the two northernmost islands of the west face of
Miladummadulu. To the north of them a large elliptical faro nearly five
miles in length, with a spur off its eastern face, marks the artificial northern
boundary drawn east to west between Tiladummati and Miladummadulu.
Kandute and Goadu are both flanked with sandy beaches along the eastern
part of the faces of the islands, while steep shingle beaches surround the

TILADUMMATI. 93

western extremities. At the western extremity of Kandute a small de-
tached island rises upon the small reef flat; it is flanked with beach rock
and coral boulder masses, greatly weathered. That part of the island is
exposed to the full force of the southwest monsoon.

Natives oF KuLupvu.

Tiladummati.
Plates 1,2; 8a, figs. 2, 3; 45-58.

Immediately north of the artificial boundary drawn between Miladum-
madulu and Tiladummati, on the west face, lies a bank with irregular
soundings varying from three to fourteen fathoms (PI. 2). Next, to the
north, comes Muradu (Pls. 45; 46, fig. 1), a circular faro of about two miles
in diameter with a wide rim reef flat. On the chart of 1856 a long narrow
island is drawn upon the eastern face of the rim flat, and a smaller island
on the inner edge of the western rim (Pl. 2). We were surprised to find
that these two islands are now connected, forming a single crescent-shaped
island, a long sand spit having extended from each somewhat diagonally
across the inner face cf the northern rim. They are connected by a
high coral sand ridge partly covered with low bushes and a scanty vege-
tation near the old islands, and bare on the more recent central part. The

94 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

original islands form knobs at the extremities of the single somewhat dumb-
bell-shaped island. The outer edge of the southern reef rim flat is bordered
by small boulders, and the eastern face of the island is flanked by shingle
beaches and boulders.

The outer belt of the rim of the large pear-shaped faro to the north of
Muradu is, with the exception of a belt of large boulders on the northern face
of the ring, covered with patches of flourishing corals. The northern rim
reef flat of the faro slopes into deeper water than the shallower southern
rim. There is no well-marked pass into the central lagoon.

The next faro to the north is elliptical, with a wide opening leading from
the east into the central lagoon; this is bounded by a wide reef flat rim
on the southern face. On the horn of the southern rim flat a few large
boulders stand as sentinels at the entrance, with heaps of shingle on the
northern rim; the opening of the pass is flanked by isolated boulders, and
to the westward, on the northern face, the faro is bordered by a long reach
of large boulders. A small sand bank has been thrown up on the inner
face of the northern rim near the pass; this is not shown on the chart.

Muadu is a faro to the northeast of the last, dividing the eastern
entrance of the wide and deep pass between it and Naguri into a northern
and southern channel. The eastern end of Muadu is occupied by a long
triangular island, which has thrown out along the northern rim a sand spit
covered with low bushes. <A similar coral sand spit extends along the
southern face of the faro enclosing in part a wide bay; these spits enclose
the greater part of the lagoon of the faro. From the northwestern corner
of the island a coral sand spit forms the western boundary of a wide
bay open to the north. The southern face of the faro is bordered by a
belt of boulders and the eastern face of the island is flanked by steep,
coarse coral shingle beaches.

Naguri (Pls. 46, fig. 2; 47) isa large faro nearly three miles in diameter
with a large island extending towards the central part of the lagoon, club-
shaped at the western extremity and T-shaped at the eastern. The south-
ern rim flat is flanked by a low wall of shingle and large angular undercut
boulders, all greatly weathered and separated from the beaches of the island
by a shallow reef flat. The club-shaped and the T-shaped parts of the

TILADUMMATI. 95

island were evidently once distinct islands, the one on the outer edge of
the eastern rim flat, the other extending across the wide southern rim of
the faro. They have become united by a high sand bank, the extension
of the shank of the T-shaped island.

The island of Muheri, about two miles east of Naguri, represents the type
of islands characteristic of the inner waters of Tiladummati. They are all
steep to with high beaches, generally shingle beaches on the southwest
faces and coral sand beaches on the northern ones; according to the trend
of the islands and their greater or less exposure to the prevailing monsoons,
they have wider or narrower reef flats, with accumulations of small boulders
at the terminal spits.

Kurimbe Island in the central part of Tiladummati is about a mile in
length, steep to, with high and steep shingle beaches on the northern as
well as on the southern face, they are exposed to the southwest and the
northeast monsoon, both of which have a sweep of considerable extent over
that part of the central area of Tiladummati. The shingle beaches alternate
with sandy reaches, according to the position of the shore with reference
to the prevailing winds. The summit of the sand beach of the central part
of the southern face of Kurimbe is fully fifteen feet high, and at other
points itis from eleven to twelve feet high. A coarse, high, and steep
shingle beach flanks the southeastern point of Kurimbe, and huge boulders
are scattered along the edge of the narrow reef flats of the point. Kurimbe
is surrounded by an outer belt of large bushes and smaller trees, enclosing
several fine clumps of large forest trees.

On the northern islands of Tiladummati and at Makunudu we find
many Pandanus; they are not as common in the central and south-
ern parts of the Maldives. There are some large forest trees on the
northern points of Kurimbe and Kumberidu (PI. 48, fig. 2). On both
these islands as well as on the northern islands of Tiladummati, both the
shingle and sand beaches are much higher and steeper than in any of
the southern groups.

Kurimbe, Kumberidu, as well as Mahafai, Muradu, two inner islands
near the northern part of Tiladummati, and a few other islands in the
central part of Tiladummati which we did not visit, belong to the same

96 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

type as Muheri. We examined Mahafai and Muradu (PI. 48, fig. 1), two
of the inner islands near the northeastern extremity of Tiladummati.
They are both steep to on the eastern face and flanked by steep shingle
beaches on the east face with steep coral sand beaches along the western
side (Pl. 49, fig. 2); on the western face of Mahafai there is a narrow
reef flat.

We examined the faros on the east and north faces of Tiladummati,
north of Nuriwari. Those on the east face all have islands on the eastern
rims of the faros occupying a great part of the area of the eastern reef flat.
The southern point of Nuriwari is covered by low vegetation, swept by
the prevailing winds; the island is flanked by high, steep, coral sand
beaches driven far into the outer belt of bushes. At the northern point and
on the eastern part of the north face, which is evidently wasting away,
large coral boulders are found along the outer edge of the rim of the
diminutive secondary lagoon at that extremity of the island.

At the southern extremity of the crescentic-shaped island of Noliwang
Faro, a few isolated islands and islets flanked with coarse shingle and
covered with tall bushes rise on the reef flat rim; the edge of the reef
flat is bordered by a few boulders. The small islands form the eastern face
of the entrance to the shallow lagoon extending off the west face of the
island; the western face of the pass is indicated by an accumulation of coral
shingle. The western rim of the lagoon is narrow with but few coral
patches on the rim of the slope which falls off very gradually towards
the west. The northern part of the island of Noliwang Faro is club-
shaped, with a hook-like extension to the south, occupying the northern
part of the western rim reef flat, partly enclosing a deep, open shallow bay.
This northern part was clearly at one time an island distinct from the south-
ern extremity ; it is now connected with it by a long coral sand ridge; the
vegetation of the connecting ridge clearly indicates that its formation is of
more recent date than that of the two extremities.

The eastern rim of Hanimadu, the next atoll to the north, is flanked by
a convex dumb-bell-shaped island, the clubs of which are united by a very
narrow coral sand ridge; this gradually reached north and south from the
disconnected extremities of the original islands at the northern and southern

TILADUMMATI. 97

horns of the atoll until the spits joined in the central part of the rim of the
east face. The vegetation of the connecting ridge was undoubtedly at one
time as scanty as that of the more recently formed connecting ridge be-
tween the two islands of Muradu on the western face of Tiladummati. The
western face of the northern part of Hanimadu is flanked by a coarse coral
shingle beach which must have been thrown up on that face of the island
before the formation of the ridge connecting the north and south islands
of the atoll. The connecting ridge is very narrow, as one can see the
eastern face of the atoll through the low belt of bushes growing upon it;
the western rim of the shallow lagoon in the southern part of the atoll is
narrow; the wide reef flat rim to the north of the lagoon is shallow.
Hanimadu is a narrow atoll about four miles in length with a greatest width
of a mile.

At our anchorage off Hanimadu we seemed to be surrounded by land, and
well shut in by islands rising up in all directions; in marked contrast to the
open character of the plateau south of the boundary between Miladum-
madulu and Tiladummati as seen from the western face looking towards
the wide open gap between Mavaidu and Fivaku.

Seen by moonlight with the moon high above the horizon, the rims of
the faros present a most striking appearance; they appear like great flats
painted a dull white with the thin glaring line of coral sand-beach in the
background topped with the dark line of vegetation. The flats stand out
so prominently that one might almost be tempted to navigate between
the islands at night.

Baura (PI. 49, fig. 1), the next atoll to the north of Hanimadu, is a circular
lagoon reef over two miles in diameter, surrounding a small central lagoon
with a greatest depth of three fathoms. The southern half of the reef flat
is occupied by a broad dumb-bell-shaped crescentic island open to the north.
The land of the southern rim of Baura undoubtedly consisted at one time of
two distinct islands situated the one on the eastern, the other on the western
face of the reef flat. These islands have become united by a broad ridge in
the same manner as we have described the junction of other crescentic
islands on the east face of Tiladummati. Seen from the north across the

wide rim, the central lagoon forms a deep bay between the two horns
7

98 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

of Baura. On the sea face of Baura the beaches are covered by coarse
coral shingle, and the outer edge of the reef flat is flanked by a belt of
large boulders.

The larger crescent-shaped islands on the eastern face of Tiladummati,
such as Hanimadu, Baura, Filadu, Kelai, have, like Muradu and Naguri on
the west face and others elsewhere in the Maldives, been formed by the coa-
lescence of separate islands, gradually united into one by the extension of
sand spits and bars. This is admirably shown both in Hanimadu and Filadu
(Pl. 50, fig. 1); in the latter the connecting ridge is a mere sand-dam
flanked by shingle on the sea face, and so low and so narrow that, steaming
along the sea face, one can look across far over the reef flat rim of the
western face of the lagoon reef.

The lagoon reef of Filadu was at one time a lagoon open to the north
with a wide eastern reef flat rim, on the northern and southern extremities
of which were situated small islands (much as at Muradu in 1835); these
must have gradually increased in size and become united by a narrow sand
ridge reaching little by little north or south from the existing terminal

islands, —a connection at first made by sand-bars or by piles of shingles.
The vegetation of the connecting ridge of Filadu consists of low bushes
and is in marked contrast with that of its club-shaped extremities. The
lagoon reef of Filadu is nothing but a small atoll, with a well-defined land
rim, a broad reef flat, and an opening nearly a mile wide with three fathoms
of water leading into the lagoon, the greatest depth of which is nine
fathoms. A small islet of coarse coral shingle, not indicated on the chart,
marks the horn of the reef flat rim on the western side of the pass into
the lagoon. There is a secondary lagoon in each of the extremities of
Filadu; the northern one we could look into as we passed; its color
indicated a depth of about one fathom, probably formed like that of Kuludu.

Filadu, Kelai (PI. 50, fig. 2), and Warifuri (PI. 51, fig. 2), the three lagoon
reefs forming the northeastern horn of Tiladummati, are in reality three
atolls of considerable size. Kelai is over four miles in length and nearly two
miles wide, Filadu is about three miles in length and two miles in greatest
width, while Warifuri is somewhat smaller.

On the western face of Kelai, there is an entrance to the lagoon, with a

ae

TILADUMMATI. 99

depth of three fathoms, somewhat blocked by coral heads and sand banks.
The northern side of the entrance is marked by a low sandy islet at the
western extremity of the narrow northern rim of the lagoon, the depth of
which varies from four to eight fathoms. The western rim of the lagoon is
narrow, and both the northern and southern rims are extensions, tapering
westward, of the wide reef flat rim on the eastern face of the lagoon reef, the
greater part of which is occupied by the double hook-shaped island of Kelai.

The widest reef flat rim of the lagoon reef of Warifuri forms the north-
western horn of the atoll, its southwestern rim is quite narrow as well as
the southern rim reef flat, which is edged by a long narrow coral sand island
covered with low vegetation, and from each extremity long sand-bars are
extending northward along the western and eastern rims of the lagoon reef.
The lagoon of Warifuri has a greatest depth of over seven fathoms. Two
small narrow islands covered with low vegetation extend along a part
of the northern rim of Warifuri. In the course of time these islands
may reach south on the western reef and unite with the southern island
so as to form a single island on the western face of the lagoon reef, as we
find it to be the case with Gafuri and Miledu, two lagoon reefs to the west-
ward on the northern face of Tiladummati, in both of which the islands are
on the western rim flat, as are also usually the widest rim flats on the faros
of the western face of Tiladummati.

Dedu (Pl. 51, fig. 1) occupies the eastern face of a triangular lagoon
reef, the western rim of which is narrow; at one time it was composed of
two islands now united by a central connecting ridge, as can be seen
from the character of the vegetation covering the ridge.

The western part of the southern rim of Gafuri is bordered by a wide
belt of boulders extending northward from Dunacoori (Pl. 52, fig. 1), a
small islet at the southern horn of the rim. The southern part of the
lagoon is very shallow, though the charts indicate a depth of seven fathoms
at the northern end of the lagoon. Gafuri is separated from an adjoining
ring to the west by a very narrow deep channel, a mere line of dark-blue
water of a depth of ten fathoms. The outer edge of the wide rim of the
ring is crowded with large colored patches of corals extending nearly to
the edge of the small lagoon of the ring.

100 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

The eastern face of Miledu (Pl. 52, fig. 2) is flanked by coarse coral
shingle beaches; the northern point is buried in large coral boulders.
Miledu, Tukandu, and Marandu are all steep to, and characterized by a
belt of large boulders on the eastern face. The finest boulders are on
Tukandu (Pl. 53), towards the southeastern extremity and on the eastern
point of Marandu. The reaches of boulders are separated by sand or coarse
shingle beaches. On the western sides the islands are bordered by high and

steep sand beaches.

Thavandiffulu.

Plates 1,2; 8a, figs. 1, 3; 54, 55, fig. 1.

Thavandiffulu (Pls. 1, 2), the northernmost atoll of the Maldives, is irreg-
ularly rectangular in shape, about thirteen miles in length, and seven in
width; its trend is from southeast in a northwesterly direction. It is
separated from Tiladummati by Gallandu Channel, about two and a half
miles in width at its narrowest point and with a depth of two hundred and
fifty-one fathoms in the centre. A sharp ridge must connect Ihavandiffulu
and Tiladummati, as both to the east and west are found soundings of over
six and seven hundred fathoms (PI. 1).

The southern horn of Ihavandiffulu is occupied by Digufuri, an elon-
gated, pear-shaped reef, with wide flats at the two extremities enclosing a
shallow lagoon, occupying the central area of the reef flat. The outer rim
of this flat is edged by a low wall of small coral boulders like that which
fringes Makunudu. A few ill-defined sand-bars rise on the outer belt of
the northern face of the reef flat towards Ihavandu Island.

North of Digufuri the concave western face of Ihavandiffulu is bordered
by a reef flat from one to two miles in width; its northwestern horn sweeps
eastwardly to form the northern boundary of the atoll. On the sea face of
the western reef flat extends a long chain of narrow islands and islets set
back somewhat from the outer edge of the reef flat (Pl. 54, fig. 2). The
western faces of these islands and islets are bordered with sand or coarse
shingle beaches with short reaches of beach rock at the base of the beaches.
A belt or low wall of small, weathered, angular boulders similar to that of

THAVANDIFFULU. 101

Digufuri extends away to the northward on the outer rim of the western
reef flat. The vegetation on the islands of the western reef flat of Ihavan-
diffulu is meagre, but those in the interior as well as on the northeastern
face of the atoll are covered with a flourishing outer belt of bushes sur-
rounding inner clumps of taller forest trees.

A belt of small boulders skirts the edge of the narrow reef flat of the
northern point of Ihavandu Island; a steep, high, coarse coral shingle beach
mixed with small boulders has at times been driven through the outer belt
of bushes between the base of the trees to a height of more than twelve or
thirteen feet. :

We examined Manafur as a type of the islands in the central part of
Thavandiffulu; they are all steep to, with small reef flats. The eastern
half of the northern face of Ihavandiffulu is open, with a single small
lagoon reef island (Wagaru) near the centre of the northern side.

On the northeastern face of the atoll are three small islands, steep to
with small reef flats, and towards the northeastern horn a larger island,
Uleguma, also steep to, and over two miles in length. The southern part of
the northeast face ends in a long lagoon reef flat, at the extremities of which
are two islands of considerable size, Muladu and Gumati; the gap between
them (PI. 54, fig. 1) is apparently closing, as the low vegetation of the inner
extremities clearly indicates their recent origin. The long sand spit forming
the northern extension of Muladu with its low vegetation and ending with
small distinct tufts of bushes indicates clearly the extent of the recent addi-
tion to the island. The corresponding spit of the southern part of Gumati
is much shorter. The small reef flat forming the northern horn of Gumati is
nearly covered by small boulders.

The southern point of Beramundu is formed by a high, steep sand beach,
while its northern point (PI. 55, fig. 1) and the southern point of Muladu
are high, steep, coarse coral shingle beaches, with heaps of boulders at
the base.

The passes on the northeast face of Ihavandiffulu are wide and deep;
those of the northern, face are as wide, but of a less depth. The western
pass through which we entered the atoll is more than sixteen fathoms in
depth and fully a mile and a quarter wide. On the southeast face, for a

102 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

distance of over six miles, the small island of Galandu and a few coral heads
alone bar the free circulation from the eastward. We passed out of Iha-
vandiffulu atoll through the deep pass to the south of Murdu. The deepest
part of the lagoon of Ihavandiffulu is thirty-one fathoms; the majority of
the soundings are between twenty and twenty-six fathoms, and in the
northwestern part of the atoll they are considerably less, from twelve to

sixteen fathoms.

Toddu.

Plates 1, 4.

Toddu is a small steep-to island to the north of Rasdu Atoll, about a mile
and a half in length by a mile in width, rising on the western edge of the
plateau extending to the west of North Male, and which unites Toddu,
Rasdu, and Ari. The greatest depth between Toddu and Rasdu is one
hundred and fifty fathoms. There are no soundings to the north of Toddu.
The island of Toddu is surrounded by a narrow reef flat somewhat wider
on the western face ; it resembles in every respect the larger steep-to islands
of the interior or outer faces of the larger Maldivian groups.

We did not visit either Toddu or Rasdu.

Rasdu.

Plates 1, 4.

Rasdu Atoll resembles in a general way Wataru Reef; it is irregularly
circular in outline, somewhat more than four miles in diameter. The
western face is formed by a continuous reef flat. At each extremity of the
eastern face of the atoll is found a faro and two small islands. The south-
ern pass is divided by an islet; its western side is occupied by a small
island. The greatest depth of the atoll is twenty fathoms. The lagoon
is studded with coral heads, and a belt of rings and banks extends diag-
onally across it in a northwesterly direction from the southern pass.

Rasdu is separated from the northern part of Ari by a channel four and
a half miles wide with a greatest depth of one hundred and forty fathoms.

teen

ARI. 103

Ari.
Plates 1, 4; 8b, figs. 12, 14 ; 8c, fig. 25 ; 55, fig. 2; 56, 57, 58, fig. 2.

No island group in the Maldives has the characteristic features of the
archipelago so well marked as Ari. We may call it a great agglomeration
of banks and faros over an elliptical area fifty miles in length and fifteen
in width (Pl. 4). The western face of the group is flanked by comparatively
few faros, some of considerable size, over five miles in length. The eastern
face, on the contrary, is bounded by a great number of small faros and
banks, and towards the north the northeast face of Ari is quite open.
Within this great area are dotted nearly two hundred lagoon reefs (faros)
and banks, many of them, especially in the northern half, over two miles in
length. A number of the lagoon reefs are connected with islands. Over
twenty islands and islets on banks varying in size from a few yards in
length to more than two miles are scattered irregularly through the central
part of Ari. There are but few islands on the faros of the west face, while
on the east face there are islands on nearly every lagoon reef or bank.
Some of the islands are a mile in length.

The greatest depth of Ari is forty-three fathoms. The majority of the
soundings within the group averages thirty fathoms.

Many of the faros on the east face of Ari are most irregular in outline ;
they all tail westward,’ and are separated by deep channels with from
twenty to thirty fathoms in the centre of the passes. Shingle or large
coral boulders flank the eastern spits of many of the faros, and the surface
of the rims of the lagoon reefs is covered with patches of flourishing corals.

To the north of Midu a pear-shaped faro extends westward for nearly
two miles, with two islands on the eastern and southern part of the rim,
which encloses a large lagoon with a depth of seven fathoms. Midu itself
is a large island occupying nearly the whole of the reef flat upon which
it has arisen.

1 The trend and shape of the islands on the east faces of the northern groups show in general the
direction in which the sand is driven from the sea faces to the westward, both by currents and by
the prevailing winds. The same effect can be traced on the faros and islands of the interior of the
larger basins and on their western or other faces.

104 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

As we steamed along the eastern face of Ari, we could see that the
eastern part of Ari was filled with numerous diminutive banks and faros
and coral heads which render its navigation dangerous (Pl. 4). We entered
Ari north of Digura by a pass (Pl. 55, fig. 2) nearly two miles wide.
To the north of the pass the faros are closely packed and irregular in
shape, — dumb-bell, comma, circular, or crescentic in outline. Dugati,
immediately north of the pass, is a crescent-shaped faro enclosing a lagoon
of from five to seventeen fathoms and edged on the western face by a
similar crescent made up of a line of small banks, the southern horn of
which is flanked by a belt of corals awash. The southern face of Ari is
flanked by two large reef flats separated by Ariadu, a large irregularly
circular island with deep passes on either side.

On the eastern part of the western reef flat are four islands, the largest
of which is Mamigeli (Pl. 56). Three lagoons are enclosed within the flat,
the two largest on the western part of the reef flat.

Digura Island is nearly two miles in length; it flanks the eastern rim of
a wide lagoon with from four to seven fathoms of water. The northern
part of Digura Faro is more than two miles wide. On the western part of
the same lagoon reef flat are Didu and two other islands. To the south of
Digura Island a line of small islets extends towards Kurafuri; the gaps
between the islets are nearly filled by sand spits and bars which will
eventually unite the two larger islands. On the outer face of Digura a
long line of large black boulders crops up on the edge of the eastern rim
flat; on its western slope a magnificent belt of corals extends from twelve
fathoms to the surface; they extend eastward along the edge of the rim
flat far towards the lagoon slope. The edge of the western reef flat is
quite irregular; at a short distance from the outer edge huge coral knolls
rise nearly to the surface from a depth of twelve to fifteen fathoms, form-
ing a series of submarine buttresses more or less connected with the corals
growing on the western face. At many points they have thus materially
widened the area of the rim flat on the west of Digura lagoon. We found
only a few patches of corals on the bottom or slopes of the rim of the lagoon;
nowhere perhaps have we seen a finer example of the great development of
corals on the so-called lagoon face of the land rim of an atoll, as at Digura.

ARI. 105

Off the western face of Digura we found only fine and coarse coral sand,
but none of the sticky ooze so characteristic of the bottom of the lagoons of
the Pacific atolls. To the north of our anchorage off Didu we saw a large,
most regularly elliptical faro fully a mile in length. Immediately to the
west of Digura Pass are a number of large faros of various shapes, with very
regular rim flats and some with lagoons of considerable depth. Some of
the banks we passed have no velus indicated on the chart; it is difficult to
say that this is an error of the survey, or betokens a change, as is suggested
by Mr. Gardiner for North and South Nilandu.' In one of the faros we
find from six to seventeen fathoms, in another from four to ten; another
has a greatest depth of nine, and several have depths of five to six fathoms.
We did not check these soundings, yet we could see that these faros had
undergone only slight changes since they were surveyed in 1834. In areas
protected from the action of the monsoons a faro with a deep lagoon and
well-submerged rim must change slowly; its rim increases very gradually
in width and height, and its lagoon fills at a very insignificant rate.

The horn of the eastern face of the south pass into Ari, as well as of the
western face of the pass, is edged with large boulders, and a mass of coral
rubble is thrown up on the flats of Ariadu, on the southern face of the
island. 4

To the west of Mamigeli a number of sand-bars have been thrown up on
the south side of the eastern, irregularly shaped lagoon of the faro. The
northern rim of the lagoon is a mere narrow flat; its slope and summit are
covered with a magnificent growth of corals. The western islands of Mami-
geli Faro are separated from the terminal lagoons by a wide green flat
covered with from two to six feet of water. The northern horn of this faro
is sharp, and is separated by a pass with not more than six fathoms from the
faro to the north of it, the first link of the chain of large faros flanking the
western face of Ari; six of these are at least four miles in length; they are
quite irregular in outline.

At the northwest angle of Ari is Matiwari, an irregularly shaped faro
resembling Dugati, at the southeast angle of Ari, only the reef flat area
is more extensive in the northern faro; like the southern faro it seems

1 Loc. cit., p. 405.

106 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

to have been formed by the coalescence of smaller faros or patches, once
separated by comparatively shallow water. The depth of the passes be-
tween the faros of the west face of Ari is not as great as on the eastern,
where the average depth of the narrow passes is fully twenty-four fathoms.
On the western face are several passes with not more than from six to fifteen
fathoms. The lagoons of the faros of the west face of Ari are many of them
quite deep; ten, fourteen, fifteen, sixteen fathoms are the depths indicated
on the charts. These faros are also characterized by the great width of the
western rim flats of the lagoons. Throughout the southern part of Ari are
a number of small and incipient faros in all stages of development. On
the little island which divides the second southern pass on the west face of
Ari, the small reef flat is covered with great slabs of beach rock.’

About five miles to the southeast of Mandu Faro and about three miles
and a half south of Furadu, is a large elliptical ring over two miles in length
(Pl. 57, fig. 1), with a fairly wooded island on the southern rim flat and a
small sand bank on the western face of the rim, which is nearly all awash.

The faros in this part of Ari have been somewhat modified since they
were surveyed by Captain Moresby. On the rims of several we find islets
and islands, or sand-bars and banks, which did not exist at the time of the
survey. The changes in this part of the group may be due to the position
of the faros exposed to the action of the northeast and specially the south-
west monsoon in that area of Ari. The existence of the lines of boulders
on the outer rims of the faros of the southern and western faces of Ari shows
the extent of the action of the southwest monsoon on the faces of the
faros exposed to them.

About a mile and a half south of Furadu there is a circular faro
(Pl. 57, fig. 2) fully a mile in diameter with a lagoon evidently deepest at
the eastern extremity, where it is of a dark blue color, and shallower, of a
greenish-blue tint, towards the western end. The lagoon is surrounded bya
wide greenish rim of uniform width, flanked with fine patches of corals on

1 Gardiner (loc. cit., p. 841) has given an excellent account of the formation of terraces of beach
sandstone, off a sand beach; sandstone beach rock is not necessarily, as is stated by him (doc. cit., p. 342),
formed on a beach, to a large extent protected from the heavy ocean rollers, or the waves within a
lagoon. Among other cases in the Pacific coral reefs (Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXVIII.) where
this is not the case, I might mention especially the beach rock on the east face of Nanuku Levu in Fiji
(Pl. 106, A. Agassiz, Bull. M. C. Z., XX XIII).

NORTH NILANDU. 107

the outer edge; the rim is awash on the northern face where sand is
accumulating on the rim flat.

Furadu (Pl. 58, fig. 2), a small island covered entirely with low atoll
vegetation, is flanked with steep sand beaches and a narrow reef flat. To
the east and north of Furadu, a number of large rings are found, one of
which is nearly four miles in length. On the south face of Ari a heavy
swell coming from the southwest was breaking hard upon the outer edge
of the reef flats. The outer face of the reef flats of the southern face of Ari
was everywhere lined with fine patches of corals.

The northern part of Ari is not well defined; for a stretch of nearly
twelve miles it is open to the northeast; this long stretch is only broken by
one large faro, two much smaller ones, and a few diminutive banks, cropping
up at about the thirty-fathom line. The northern parts of Ari and of
North Malosmadulu have the open character of Tiladummati and Mila-
dummadulu; they illustrate the passage between the very open groups to
those that are more closed, like North Male and the central groups of the
Maldives.

North Nilandu.

Plates 1, 4, 5; 8b, fig. 14; 59-61; 78, fig. 1.

The faros in the interior of North Nilandu are large (Pl. 5), some of
them a mile and a half in diameter. They are principally in the central
part of the group; only a few are near the south and north faces.

The outer rim of North Nilandu is made up of comparatively few large
faros, more numerous on the east face than on the west, of an irregularly
elliptical shape, enclosing extensive lagoons; wide and deep passes separate
the faros. The principal islands on the eastern face of the outer rim are
small, with four large wooded islands in the interior of the group. The
largest of the inner islands is Biladu; it is well wooded, about a mile
inside of the pass separating the faros of Adago and Magudu, near the
southern part of the east face of North Nilandu; it is well seen from the
sea, across the outer rim of faros. North Nilandu is nearly circular; its
greatest length is seventeen miles; the western face being slightly concave ;

108 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

it is separated from South Nilandu by a channel of three miles and a half
in width, with a greatest depth of two hundred and thirty-five fathoms in
the centre! The greatest depth of North Nilandu is thirty-five fathoms,
the soundings in general vary from twenty-four to thirty fathoms.

The flat-topped banks we passed all have velus, although the rim is
indicated only on two of the banks. Mr. Gardiner has called attention to
this defect in the charts of both North and South Nilandu.’ He thinks
that their absence on the charts proves their formation by solution since
the days of Moresby, as in other atolls, their existence is always correctly
indicated on the charts. It is difficult to decide this, as the original charts
of Moresby are not accessible. I would also call attention to the same defect
in the chart of Ari, where some of the banks with velus are drawn merely as
flat-topped banks with an outer belt of growing corals. None of the mner
banks have disappeared, on the contrary, Mr. Gardiner speaks of finding
six uncharted shoals in the southern part of North Nilandu ;* according to
him this would indicate a rather unimportant action by solution on the inner
banks in both North and South Nilandu. Mr. Gardiner’s figures of North
and South Nilandu do not strike me as indicating the decreased breadth of
the lagoon reefs of the outer rim, upon which he lays great stress. Some of
the velus of the outer lagoon reefs had evidently increased in size, but as I
have stated (page 62) this is not necessarily due to solution.

The faros of the east face of North Nilandu enclose large lagoons of con-
siderable depth, varying from six to ten fathoms. There are only three
islands of any size on these faros; the others, six in number, are but diminu-
tive islets on the horns of the faros. The western face of North Nilandu is
flanked by five faros, all with large and deep lagoons. The central, the
largest faro, has, according to the Admiralty Chart, five lagoons, in two
rows; Mr. Gardiner‘ shows three on his figure, its eastern edge flanked
by coral spits forming cusps extending as small bays to the- eastward,
similar to the bays formed by the cusps of the faro south of Akirifuri on the
west face of North Male. There is only one small island on the western
face of North Nilandu.

1 According to the soundings of Mr. Gardiner, loc. cit., p. 405. 2 Loe. cit., p. 405, fig. 105.
3 They are not shown in his Figure 105, page 405, loc. cit. 4 Loc. cit., p. 405, fig. 105,

__

NORTH NILANDU. 109

The depth in the passes between the faros on both sides of North
Nilandu clearly indicate here and there the greater elevation of parts of
the outer rim of the plateau than the central basin.

On the flat of the northeast face of Farna (PI. 59) flanking the pass sepa-
rating it from the faro to the north, a large coral boulder has been thrown
up; the flat of the southeast horn is covered by similar but smaller boulders.

On the faro to the south of Farna (Pl. 78, fig. 1) a well-wooded islet
occupies the western spit of the rim; the eastern face is edged by patches
of coral boulders. On the eastern edge of Hekara, the next faro (PI. 60,
fig. 1), the coral boulders are thrown up in larger bodies, and on the eastern
edge of the faro flat to the south of Hekara runs a long line of angular coral
boulders, pitted, honeyecombed, and undercut. The eastern edges of the
faros of North Nilandu are all covered with large patches of corals extending
well westward on the rims towards the enclosed lagoons. The edge of the
southern face of the pass south of Hekara is also flanked by a line of rounded
large coral boulders, mainly masses of Porites, pitted, honeycombed, and
many of them undercut as well as on the sea face spit of Feartu. The sea
face of the bushy islet occupying the northern extremity of this faro is
flanked by a coarse shingle beach, as is also the beach on the east spit of
Feartu (Pl. 61, fig. 1).

The greater part of the east face of Mawafuri (PI. 61, fig. 2) is edged
by a belt of angular masses of coral boulders, deeply pitted and honey-
combed and undercut, separated by stretches of shingle or smaller rounded
boulders, a similar belt of smaller boulders and coarse shingle edges the
southern horn of the faro flanking the pass to the south of Mawafuri. The
same belt of coral boulders and coarse shingle extends for nearly four miles
on the sea face. These lines of coral boulders thrown up on the rim flats
of the eastern face of North Nilandu indicate the luxuriant growth of corals
on the sea face of the faros. These lines of coral boulders are pitted and
honeycombed, forming little spires and pinnacles, they remind one only on a
small scale of the edges of the great reef flats of Australia with their belt of
horse heads. The horn forming the south face of Adago is flanked by a
similar belt of small horse heads pitted, honeycombed, and deeply undercut,
as is the eastern face of Magudu.

110 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

In none of the groups of the Maldives do we find the great well-defined
reef platforms which are so characteristic a feature of the atolls of the
Pacific. There the islands have in many cases been cut out and denuded
from the higher parts of the underlying reef platforms, while in the Mal-
dives the islands have merely been washed up as coral sand and deposited by
the drift, the winds and waves, on the rims of the faros or of the diminutive
flats. The surface of these is not always made up of recent movable sand,
when corals have spread upon them, they have become covered by a recent
reef rock and with loose masses of corals cemented by Nullipores and
coral sand.

South Nilandu.
Plates 1,5; 8b, figs. 18, 17 ; 62, 68, 64, fig. 2; 78, fig. 2.

In South Nilandu (Pl. 5) the western and eastern faces run north and
south; the northern and southern faces are rounded; its greatest length is
about twenty-two miles, and the width thirteen miles.

The banks and faros of South Nilandu are fairly uniformly distributed
over the area of the group, although the larger faros and banks are situated
in the northern part. The outer land rim of South Nilandu is made up of
extensive faros and reef flats. The reef flat forming the southwest face of
the group is over twelve miles in length". The entrances to the enclosed
basin of South Nilandu are deep and wide, several of them over two miles
across. Only a few islands occur on the southwest and northwest face of
South Nilandu, the principal islands and islets being on its east face ; there

1 The Admiralty Chart of South Nilandu does not show any difference in the indistinct velu of the
southwestern reef flat from that sketched by Mr. Gardiner on Figure 105, which has left, as he says,
“a series of isolated reef masses, parts of the original great breakwater.” Mr. Gardiner says that the
changes he observed in both South and North Nilandu were merely local, and that within the lagoons no
changes in depths were found.

The shoal indicated by Mr. Gardiner in the pass north of Maimbudu may be an outgrowth of the
reef flat, as are probably those he indicates south of Feartu in North Nilandu; they are perhaps indi-
cated on the Admiralty Chart, only more to the westward.

Mr. Gardiner * indicates a smaller number of new velus on the inner banks and on the outer lagoon
reef flats of South Nilandu than in North Nilandu; only one velu is added on one of the flats of the
eastern face, while he notes changes in nearly all the lagoon reefs of the southern part of the east face

of North Nilandu.
* Loe. cit., fig. 105, p. 405.

SOUTH NILANDU. 111

are a number of large and well-wooded islands in the northern and southern
part of the central area. South Nilandu is somewhat deeper than North
Nilandu, its greatest depth being thirty-nine fathoms. In both North and
South Nilandu the general depth is about thirty fathoms, with many sound-
ings over thirty-five fathoms.

The northern and northwestern faces of South Nilandu (PI. 5) are
flanked with large rectangular faros with from five to nine fathoms in the
lagoons. The southern part of the west face is flanked by a narrow bow-
shaped reef flat, enclosing a small lagoon at the northern extremity and
studded with a few islands near the southern part. A narrow belt of water
from six to ten fathoms in depth is partly shut off from the waters to
the eastward by a series of disconnected coral banks running parallel to
the outer reef flat. A similar long reef flat extends along the southeastern
face of South Nilandu. It encloses a long narrow lagoon; it is difficult to
decide whether this lagoon has been formed by a series of independent coral
patches similar to those off the reef flat on the western face of South
Nilandu, which have gradually joined as they came to the surface and have
formed the western rim of the lagoon, or if the rim has grown up along its
whole length from the surface of the South Nilandu plateau, as have the
small faros of the interior of the groups of the Maldives.

We entered South Nilandu through the wide pass between Madali and
Huludali. The island of Huludali is on the northwest face of a large faro ;
its sea face is flanked by a belt of boulders and coarse shingle. The rim of
the south horn of Madali is flanked by a narrow belt of coral boulders and
coarse shingle, and the southern face of the island is formed by a steep
shingle beach.

The Jewellers Islands (Pl. 78, fig. 2), the most important of the inner
islands of South Nilandu, are three large well-wooded islands with steep
coral sand beaches and short lines of boulders on the south faces of the reef
flats surrounding them. Middle Jeweller Island tails out to the westward,
forming a small reef flat enclosing a small lagoon. To the west of the same
island is found a small faro with a diminutive and shallow lagoon, a mere
slit in the flat; whenever this becomes filled by sand, it will be changed into

a sand flat.

112 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

On our way to the east face, across South Nilandu, we passed four large
faros; they presented no special features of interest. The number of large
well-wooded islands found in the northern part of South Nilandu is one of
its marked features. To the south of our track we passed a low sand bank
covered with a few bushes, rising on the edge of a faro with a most diminu-
tive lagoon; it forms the beginning of a larger island, which when the lagoon
has been filled will cover the whole sand flat thus formed. We then came
upon a large flat with a sand-bar and without any trace of vegetation, and
next upon a small faro with a narrow rim enclosing a deep lagoon with an
islet on the eastern rim. ‘The northern part of the east face of South
Nilandu is flanked by rectangular faros with lagoons of from four to seven
fathoms in depth.

With two exceptions the passes separating the outer faros of South
Nilandu are deep, over twenty fathoms. We passed out of South Nilandu,
south of Konipafuri, and made for the southern extremity of Mulaku. Male
Faro, the faro to the south of Konipafuri, is marked by the great width of
its reef flat. .

When coming north from Kolumadulu, we examined the southern part
of the east face of South Nilandu (Pls. 62, 63, 64, fig. 2), from Maimbudu,
the faro forming the southeast angle of South Nilandu. In the centre of
the faro lies a large lagoon with from three to five fathoms; each extremity
is occupied by an island. To the north on the east face follows a smaller
faro with a small lagoon to the west of Wani Island. The sea face of the
faro is edged by a boulder belt. A similar belt crops out along the sea face
of the faros of the eastern side of South Nilandu. The beaches of the
islands are steep, of coarse shingle, separating an occasional reach of coral
sand. The sea is encroaching on the islands of the east face. We passed
many cocoanut-trees lying on the beach, and here and there a palm boulder,
if I may so call the clump of roots of cocoanuts left occasionally on the reef
flats and coral sand beaches.

North of Kandimas (Pls. 62, fig. 2; 63, 64, fig. 2), on the next reef flat
to the north, we find outliers of coral reef rock between the beaches of the
islands and the boulder belt, — outliers which have been undercut and are
deeply pitted, eroded, and honeycombed, and rise slightly above the general

~

SOUTH MALE. 113

level of the surrounding reef flats. To the north of Kandimas Island also
begins the narrow lagoon which extends nearly the whole length of that reef
flat for a distance of about six miles. The inner rim of the lagoon is much
narrower than the outer sea face rim flat, the greater part of which is edged
by a boulder belt. Great patches of corals are scattered on the sea face of
the reef flat, and often extend well across the outer rim towards the lagoon
of the faro. This long faro is separated from Huluwa Island (Pl. 62, fig. 1)
by an angular faro with a long spit at the southwest horn, on which a coarse
shingle beach and heaps of boulders have been thrown up. The limits of
the rim of this faro are well defined by the light green belt surrounding the
lagoon. Reddish Nullipores cover many of the boulders forming the outer
fringing belt of the faro.

The many gaps between the numerous small islets and islands which dot
the east face of South Nilandu afford an excellent opportunity to study the
formation of the islets, their change into small islands, and the gradual pas-
sage into larger islands by the coalescence and junction of the sand spits
and sand-bars of adjoining islets and islands.

South Male.
Plates 1, 4; 8b, figs. 12,16; 8c, figs. 19, 27; 79, fig. 2.

The structure of South Male (Pl. 4) resembles in a general way that of
North Male; it is smaller, elliptical, and its outlines defined by a greater
number of reef flats and fewer faros. There are few rings ’within the
central basin; the banks are more numerous than in North Male, and only
five small islands in the central area.

South Male has a greatest length of nineteen miles, and eleven miles in
width towards the northern extremity. It is separated from North Male by
Wadu Channel, not more than two and a quarter miles in width and a depth
of about two hundred and fifty fathoms, and from Felidu to the south by
Fulidu Channel, about seven miles in width with three hundred and seventy-
four fathoms in the centre of the channel. South Male is as a whole shoaler
than North Male; its greatest depth is thirty-two fathoms, but by far the

majority of the soundings are between twenty and twenty-seven fathoms.
8

114 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Along the east face of South Male, north of Hutekolu, nothing of special
interest is to be seen on the extensive wide reef flat which forms the south-
east horn of South Male. The reef flat is shallow, with the exception
of a belt of deeper water, running diagonally across it south of Haru Hura.
The islands on this flat are covered with low vegetation. On the outer
edge of Mafuri, the reef flat to the north of Guradu, are heaps of small
boulders, and great patches of corals cover the rim of the flat. A good
part of the island of Mafuri (PI. 79, fig. 2) is wasting ; what once formed its
northern extremity is now an islet with fallen cocoanut-trees covering the
intervening reef flat. The island and islet on the faro to the south of Guru
are flanked with shingle beaches near the outer edge of the faro, passing
into sand beaches close to the inner edge. Large heaps of shingle are
piled on the outer edge of the reef flat of Guru.

The lagoon of the large faro north of Guru on the east face is remark-
able for its great depth; it is not less than nineteen fathoms, fully as deep as
that of Dureadu in the central part of the southern half of Miladummadulu.
The faros of the western face of South Male present no new feature, unless

it be the irregularity of their outlines.

Native Boats orr SoutH MAte.

Felidu.

Plates 1, 4,5; 8b, figs. 15, 16.

Felidu (Pl. 5) is the most irregular in outline of the Maldive groups: it is
somewhat boot-shaped, the foot forming a long projection to the eastward,’

bounded by a narrow reef flat with three small islands at the eastern horn.
Along the southern face and eastern extremity runs a continuous narrow

FELIDU. 115

reef flat with four narrow lagoons, in one of which near the eastern horn is
found eleven fathoms of water. Along the northern face of the eastern
part of Felidu four elongated reef flats extend, separated by narrow passes.
One of the flats is an elliptical faro with seven fathoms in its lagoon.

The faros on the southwestern and eastern face of Felidu are most
irregular in shape. In no group have we found such irregular edges to the
inner face of the reef flats as on the northwest face of Felidu. Off each flat
runs a series of cusps, spits, and points, similar to those south of Akirifuri
on the northwest face of North Male. Some of these extend a considerable
distance into the lagoon. They form bays and hooks enclosing parts of the
adjoining waters, some of them of considerable depth varying from three to
twelve fathoms. It is probable that the eastern extension of the narrow
reef flat forming the foot of Felidu was originally developed from a series
of such cusps and spits growing on a shallow part of the Felidu plateau,
and uniting small faros more or less elliptical, once separated by shallow
passes.

The faros of the western and eastern faces of Felidu are separated by
comparatively narrow and deep passes. There are no less than ten of these
along the southwestern face in a distance of about twelve miles. The west-
ern part of Felidu is dotted with rings, faros, banks, and heads; several of
the rings are nearly a mile in diameter. There are only four islands and
islets in the central part of Felidu; the eastern projection of Felidu is nearly
clear of obstructions. The greatest depth of Felidu is forty-one fathoms in
the southeastern part; the majority of the soundings range between twenty
and thirty fathoms.

Rakidu Island is on the east of the pass by which we entered Felidu; to
the east of the island is another very narrow pass, a long spit makes out
from the western extremity of Rakidu enclosing a small lagoon. On the
west side of the pass a small islet has been formed by the accumulation of
sand behind the heaps of shingle and of boulders thrown up on the eastern
edge of the reef flat of the large faro on the west side of Rakidu Pass.
As far as could be seen, similar heaps of shingle and of boulders flank
the outer edge of the west face of the faros forming the southwest face
of Felidu.

116 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

The western edges of the faros are bordered with shingle jetties running
at right angles to the sea face ; some of them terminate in small sand islets.
The island of Rakidu is built up of two adjacent islands, which have become
united; the old gap once separating the two islets is still plainly visible
when seen from the centre of the channel. On the western spit of Rakidu,
a number of cocoanut-trees have fallen on the reef flat and near the beach;
the position of the bushes and vegetation covering other parts of the shore
of the island indicates a certain amount of wasting away of the western and
northwestern portion of the island.

Steaming to the eastward inside of Felidu, we skirted the reef flat
to the east of Rakidu, along this extends a very narrow lagoon not shown
on the chart, unless it be the extension of the long spit running into the
lagoon, and indicated on the chart about a mile west of Buri Hura Island.
The whole length of the edge of the western rim of this narrow lagoon is
covered by a long line of small yellow angular boulders, greatly pitted,
honeycombed, and undercut, an outlier of reef rock rising somewhat above
the surrounding reef flat.

To the north of the spit rises a well-defined faro about a mile in diameter
with a comparatively deep lagoon, judging by its color. An islet with low
bushes lies on its eastern rim, and on the northern rim a patch of reef rock
undercut, pitted, and honeycombed indicates that this faro is probably of
greater age than many central faros we have thus far seen.

The northern face of Buri Hura is also wasting away. Fallen cocoanut-
trees are seen on the beaches and reef flats adjoining the island. To the
west of Buri Hura Island a large outlying block of honeycombed reef rock
rises from the inner edge of the reef flat; on the southern sea face of Felidu
a long line of angular boulders forming a long low wall of perhaps eighteen
inches in height runs along the outer edge of the reef flat on both sides of
Buri Hura. This belt of coral boulders is undercut, pitted, and honey-
combed, and greatly resembles the patches of reef rock we saw on the inner
face of the reef flat.

While crossing the atoll of Felidu from Buri Hura to Keadu, we passed
to the eastward of a bank covered with angular boulders of reef rock,
rising in the centre to a height of about eighteen inches. The boulders are

ao

FELIDU. ally

apparently identical with the reef rock forming the boulder belt off Buri
Hura. There is evidence of a more general erosion at Felidu than in any
other group of the Maldives.

There is a large faro with a wide rim on the eastern face of Felidu to the
south of Keadu; the chart indicates a depth of four fathoms in the lagoon.
Keadu and Felidu are two well-wooded islands; to the north on the eastern
face of Felidu, Tinadu and Alimata are the only islands on the outer faros.
The passes between the larger faros of the east face are usually divided by
long sand banks, leaving only narrow but deep passes on each side, judging
from the deep blue color of the central part of the pass. These bars are
well indicated on the chart; the sand-bars awash are perhaps larger; other-
wise no important change seems to have taken place on that part of the
east face of Felidu since 1836. Passing out of Felidu between two faros
halfway between Tinadu and Alimata we found the outer horns of the
faces of the pass distinctly marked by piles of angular boulders undercut,
pitted, and eroded. On the outer rims of the faros of the eastern face sand-
bars often took the place of the boulder belt, while to the north of the
pass above mentioned, the reef rock patches and shingle heaps continue
on parts of the outer edge of the reef flats and faros. Extensive patches of
corals also dot the outer rims of the faros. The northern passes of the
eastern face, as seen skirting the outer edge, stand out as well-marked,
inverted funnel-shaped entrances, with dark blue bands indicating the deep
parts of the channel. The outer beaches of Alimata are steep coral sand
beaches, with but few boulders on the outer edge of the reef flat. The
lagoons of the two large faros to the north of Alimata have depths of five
and seven fathoms. Digeri Island is situated just inside of the pass sepa-
rating these faros.

While there are a great many passes leading into Felidu, yet no part of
its periphery is open. The widest passes are less than a mile, the majority
being narrow cuts of considerable depth, often more than twenty fathoms.

118 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Wataru Reef.

Plates 1,5; 8b, fig. 15 ; 58, fig. 1.

Wataru Reef (Pl. 5) is a large isolated lagoon reef (atoll) rising upon a
small steep plateau lying in the centre of the channel separating Mulaku
from Felidu. The northern part of the channel between Wataru and Felidu
is two miles, the southern between Wataru and Mulaku, two miles and a
half wide. Wataru is triangular in shape with rounded corners, its greatest
length a little less than four miles. The rim reef flat is nearly awash at
several points; its position is clearly indicated by the color of the water.
There is a very narrow entrance into the lagoon at the southern extremity,
flanked on each side by low bushy islets (Pl. 58, fig. 1). The outer edge of
the rim flat is covered by a belt of coral patches; here and there a patch of
coral boulders cropped up along the east face of Wataru, as well as at the base
of the steep shingle beach flanking the islets at the entrance of the lagoon.

The northeast horn of Wataru is edged with angular boulders greatly
pitted and honeycombed; they form a fine sweep as they follow the curve
of the horn with the monsoon sea breaking upon them. As is seen from its
deep blue color, the lagoon of Wataru Reef is of considerable depth; twenty-
one fathoms are indicated on the chart.

We passed the reef at high tide; at low water when the rim of the faro

is nearly awash it must be one of the best-defined faros of the Maldives.

Mulaku.

Plates 1,5; 8b, figs. 13, 15, 18 ; 64, fig. 1; 65.

Mulaku (PI. 5) is irregularly triangular; its western face runs due north
and south for a distance of twenty-five miles. The greatest width east and
west is about fifteen miles; it is flanked by thirteen small reef flats and faros
of irregular elliptical shape, on only two of which are islets.

A number of soundings in the central basin of Mulaku range from forty
to forty-two fathoms; the greater number of the soundings vary from
twenty-five to thirty-five fathoms.

MULAKU. 119

Mulaku and Felidu resemble more the groups forming the single line
like Kolumadulu and Haddummati than the groups forming parts of the
double chain, like the Nilandus to the west and the Males to the north,
though there are more faros on the outer faces of the northern groups than
in the southern atolls. In many cases, especially in the southern groups,
it is difficult to determine the mode of formation of the faros and their
enclosed lagoons, and to decide whether they are formed, as seems to be
the case in the southern part of the western reef of South Nilandu, by the
coalescence of numerous patches growing up parallel to the inner face of
the reef flat, and enclosing thus a long lagoon, as in the long reef flat on the
east face of South Nilandu, and as may have been the case also in the forma-
tion of the lagoons within the long narrow reef flats on the eastern face of
Mulaku; or by the junction of independent faros.

There are few rings within the area of Mulaku, all of a small size, and
only one inner island, Mulaku, facing the central pass of the east face of the
group, but a multitude of small banks, mainly on the western side. The
western face of Mulaku is flanked by a number of small irregularly shaped
faros enclosing shallow lagoons; some of them are crescentic with widely
separated horns; the faros forming the northern and northeastern faces
are larger. The east face is flanked by two great reef flats; the northern
one encloses two lagoons near the broad eastern horn, with six fathoms
of water and a smaller one near its southern extremity. On the southern
reef flat there are three long lagoons with six fathoms of water. The
eastern faros are studded with chains of islands constituting the principal
land of Mulaku, as there are only a couple of small islands on the faros of
the northeastern and western face. The northeastern face is bounded by
four reef flats with long spits at the angles trending west.

Mulaku is interesting as being the northernmost of the Maldive groups,
which to some extent assumes the appearance of some of the larger atolls
of the Paumotus. This is shown by the land rim of the eastern face, which
consists of only two long reef flats, enclosing, it is true, lagoons, as when the
faros are numerous and small. Yet it is possible that these large faros
have, as in the case of the larger flats of South Nilandu, grown up from the
coalescence of adjacent small reef patches, and not from the regular upward

120 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

growth of an elongated ring of corals enclosing an interior lagoon. The
great land rims of the Paumotus, however, have been cut down from ledges
once of a greater height, upon the outer faces of which corals have grown;
while in the Maldives the flats are made up of recent corals which have
grown up from the base forming the underlying plateau of the Maldives
and have only been slightly elevated.

As we go south from Mulaku the Maldivian character typical of the
island groups gradually disappears more and more. A mere glance at the
chart shows this conclusively (Pl. 1). Neither Kolumadulu nor Haddum-
mati would be chosen as typical representatives of Maldive groups with
their characteristic rings and faros; they combine Maldivian features with
extensive narrow reef flats, characteristic of Pacific atoll-lagoon reefs.
The northeast horn of Haddummati reminds us of the eastern horn of
Arhno in the Marshall Islands. The Maldivian type is still less apparent in
Suvadiva and Addu, an atoll on the southernmost plateau of the group,
such as might be found either in the Paumotus or the Ellice, Gilbert, and
Marshall Islands.

It is true that within the area of Mulaku there are more than one
hundred flats and rings, but they are small and do not compare with the
characteristic larger, circular, or elliptical, faros, often several miles in length,
crowded in North and South Male, Ari, and within the basins of other north-
ern groups. The absence of flats and faros within the area of the southern
groups is striking in Kolumadulu, still more in Haddummati and Suvadiva.
The aspect of the southern enclosed basins (lagoons) reminds us of such
large lagoons as Fakarava and others of the Paumotus, where there are
either numerous small islets or only shoals to be seen in the great ex-
panse enclosed within the outer land rim.

The western face of the western faros of Mulaku is edged by stretches of
small coral boulders and coarse shingle set in transverse dikes running at
right angles across the outer rim of the faros, they are more prominently
heaped up on the two sides of the passes separating the faros (Pls. 64,
fig. 1; 65, fig. 1). These stretches of boulders and shingle are largest on
the western face of Kureli Faro; they are usually mainly masses of Porites
tailing into long sand spits towards the east. When seen entering the pass

MULAKU. 121

to the north of Kureli Faro, they appear like a series of great parallel
furrows thrown up near the outer edge of the rim. Similar ledges of
boulders and lines of shingle extend from Kureli to Kolufuri, the southern-
most point of Mulaku. |

Fine patches of corals grow on the inner rim flats, and on the sea slope
of the outer faces corals must also grow in great abundance, judging
from their extension eastward over the outer rim flats and from the mass of
coral boulders and coral shingle thrown up as dikes on the sea faces of the
faros along the whole western face of Mulaku. The outer edge of the reef
flats are discolored by the dark patches of growing corals stretching to the
eastward across the outer rims of the faros.

Kureli Island is on the extremity of the southern faro of the west face of
Mulaku, set back a short distance from the western edge of the rim reef flat,
flanked by a belt of rough, angular coral boulders forming a low wall of
pitted, honeycombed, and undercut masses passing towards the inner face,
first into coarse coral shingle and then into coral sand on the east face.
The southern face of Kureli Faro (Pl. 65, fig. 2) is edged by a similar wall
best seen off the west face of the island itself, indicating a former higher
level of Kureli.

We also examined the northern half of the west face of Mulaku; it is
bounded by a number of small faros of irregular outline, separated by deep
passes. The faces of the passes are usually indicated by heaps of shingle
or small boulders or accumulations of sand. Along the sea faces of the
faros, shingle or sand jetties project to the eastward. 1

North of Tuvaru there are no islets on the faros of the west face except
on the northern faro, near the northwest horn of Mulaku, where rises a
small island flanked by a coral sand beach and covered with low vege-
tation. Neither this island nor the small wooded island we saw on a sand
bank to the eastward are indicated on the charts of 1856; they have both
been formed since that date. The southern extension of the northwestern
horn of Mulaku is a narrow reef flat, the western edge of which is crowded
with flourishing patches of corals. The western face of the faro to the

south is also edged with coral patches.

122 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Kolumadulu.
Plates 1, 6 ; 8b, figs. 17, 18 ; 8c, fig. 20; 66.

Kolumadulu (PI. 5) is nearly circular; its greatest diameter from east to
west is twenty-nine miles; the north and south dimensions are somewhat less.
Its sea faces are flanked by narrow reef flats, with the exception of the wider
flat bounding the southern face from Vaimandu to Hirilandu; on this flat are
also some of the larger islands of Kolumadulu. A few islands are scattered
on the reef flats of the northeast face, and a long line of islands and islets ex-
tends in a southerly direction on the southeast face from Fahala, an island
nearly four miles in length, and one of the largest in the Maldives.

Kolumadulu is deeper than the northern groups; it attains a depth of
forty-five fathoms in the central area; the greater number of the soundings
are near forty fathoms.’ The interior of Kolumadulu is dotted with small
banks; they are more numerous in the southern half of the western part
of the atoll. The only islands in the atoll are near the western face opposite
the pass to the south of Kandudu and on a large faro to the eastward of
Hirilandu.

The islands of the northern part of the east face of Kolumadulu present
no features of special interest ; they are fairly covered with low vegetation
and edged by steep coral sand beaches. Fahala, one of the larger islands
of the Maldives, over three and a half miles in length, is covered with fine
vegetation ; south of it, on the greater part of the islands of the east face
of Kolumadulu, the vegetation consists almost entirely of low reef vege-
tation similar to the scanty flora of many of the Pacific atolls.

South of Fahala* a number of islands have been thrown up diagonally
across the reef flat; the points and beaches of their outer faces are covered

1 Mr. Gardiner found no changes in the depth of the lagoon of Kolumadulu, and says that in but
few of the islands of the outer reef flats did he detect any changes with the exception of a “slight
washing away of their seaward faces.” * He also speaks of important changes in two of the passages he
examined; they are not indicated in his Figure 106, p. 407.

Mr. Cooper states that a few of the shoals represented on the charts as reaching the surface only
existed as mounds well below the low-tide level.+

? The most marked changes which have taken place in the land rim of Kolumadulu, Mr. Gardiner
notes at Fahala; he has observed that the island has become joined to the small island marked on the
chart to the north of it; in its place is now found a velu, the washing away of its southern end. (Loc.
cit., p. 407.)

* Loc. cit., p. 407. + Loc. cit., p. 408.

|

KOLUMADULU. 123

with coarse shingle. Towards the inner face it gradually passes into
smaller and finer shingle and finally into coral sand. The shingle points
are often connected by bars of small boulders or coarse shingle, forming
a belt or breakwater on the outer edge of the reef flat. Thus an outer
bay is formed, coarse sand is deposited behind the low dam of shingle,
a sand-bar soon rises well above the general level of the reef flat, scanty
vegetation begins to cover the summit of the bar, and then a crescent-
shaped or open rectangular island is formed ; it eventually becomes filled
with sand blown in both from the sea face and the lagoon side. The small
independent islands are thus gradually connected into larger ones, forming
perhaps even such a large island as Fahala.

Some instructive stages of this process of consolidation of the islands
occur between Fahala and Diyageli (Pl. 66, fig. 2). In one of the gaps in the
immediate vicinity of Fahala rose a mere islet flanked with bushes and
sand-bars forming a bridge between the adjacent islands. The east face
of Kolumadulu recalls vividly the aspect of the outer rim flats of many
of the Marshall and Gilbert Atolls, where the islands form great square
bays, often becoming connected on the lagoon face after they have been
shut off from the sea by the long line of boulders and shingle forming the
breakwater connecting their sea face extremities.

South of the eastern pass dividing the two narrow reef flats which flank
the east face of Kolumadulu extends a line of angular coral boulders
similar to that on the edge of the northern reef flat; it must be at least
three quarters of a mile long and forms a boulder and shingle breakwater
on the outer edge of the reef flat connecting two of the islands upon the
outer part of the rim flat, distant at least three quarters of a mile. On the
inner edge of the rim flat rise sand banks, islets, or islands, more or less
covered with vegetation, gradually closing the open gap between the inner
extremities of the islands first united by the breakwater thrown up on the
outer face of the reef flat. One of these breakwaters connecting adjoining
islands enclosed a bay nearly two miles in length; the inner face of the bay
was flanked by four small islands with sand spits extending from both
extremities nearly joining them. On the islands of the east face of Kolu-

madulu we noticed many Pandanus trees.

124 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

To the northeast of Timarafuri the reef flat becomes more than a mile
wide. The northern face of Timarafuri Pass is flanked by a wide flat edged
with lines of boulders, and Timarafuri Island is edged with a steep beach
of coarse coral shingle. The corals on the inner face of the reef flat to the
northeast of Timarafuri are far less flourishing than the corresponding belt
of corals of the more northern groups. It is perhaps what might be ex-
pected in such groups as Kolumadulu, the interior basin of which is com-
paratively shut off from the outer waters; the outer land rims being more
continuous leave only few and narrow openings allowing access to the
oceanic currents. Thus a great amount of pelagic food is shut out from
the central basins of such groups as Kolumadulu, while in the central and
northern groups of the Maldives where the outer land rim is formed of
atolls, separated by wide and deep passes, the currents rush in and out with
great rapidity.

The larger groups forming the single line of the Maldives from Koluma-
dulu south to Addu, all have the same characteristics; while the smaller
groups on isolated parts of the Maldivian plateau, like Rasdu and Toddu to
the north of Ari, and Karidu, Wataru Reef, Gaha Faro, have all the
characteristics of the smaller faros of Ari and of Male. Some of them, like
Gaha Faro, are really only larger faros separated by deeper and wider
channels from the adjoining groups. In fact, we may consider such great
plateaus as the three plateaus of Malosmadulu as one extreme, and islets
like Karidu and Fua Mulaku as the other extreme; while plateaus such as
Tiladummati and Miladummadulu, where the atolls are separated by wide
but shallow passages, are an intermediary stage. On the larger plateaus
many small atolls have been formed, while on the smaller plateaus or sum-
mits small faros have grown up, resembling more or less Pacific atolls, in
accordance with the size and shape of the underlying base.

Nothing we have seen thus far in the Maldives indicates any marked
elevation ; nowhere do horses of old reef rock flanking the beaches or rising
upon the reef flats indicate any considerable amount of erosion. The exist-
ence of a few pitted and honeycombed and deeply undercut outliers of
modern reef rock near the outer rim of some faros, rising perhaps two or
three feet above the reef flats, indicates only a very slight elevation in some

KOLUMADULU. 125

of the Maldive groups, or a long stationary period, during which the faros
and atolls of the Maldives have grown to their present condition from the
underlying plateau and its secondary elevations.

We examined the south and west faces of Kolumadulu from Kimbudu,
one of the easternmost islands on the wide curved reef flat of the faro
which forms the south face of Kolumadulu and a part of its western face.
The lagoon of this faro extends nearly the whole length of the reef flat ;
it varies in depth from four to seven fathoms, and is fully a mile wide
in places.

The structure of the faces of Kolumadulu is in striking contrast; the
northern and eastern are flanked by narrow reef flats. On the small flats
of the northern face there is only an occasional island, while on the two
long reef flats forming the eastern face runs a nearly continuous line of
islands from Fahala to the pass north of Guradu, and then again to Timara-
furi on the long and narrow southern reef flat. On the southern face, and
on the southern part of the western reef flat, we have a well-developed
faro lagoon, as well as faros to the north of the western pass and on the
flat which divides the western pass into two passages. So that the eastern
face of Kolumadulu (the northernmost of the single line of groups south
of the central Maldives) assumes the characters of the southern atolls, while
the western face with its lagoons takes that of the central groups to the
north of it. The central part of some of the encircling reefs of Kolumadulu,
Haddummati, and Suvadiva is occupied by shallow lagoons or velus. In
places they seem to have been formed by inner lines of coral patches grow-
ing parallel to the outer reef flats, and enclosing a part of the original rim
shoal of the lagoon.

The sea face beaches of the islands on the southern side of Kolumadulu
are steep. The vegetation extends close to high-water mark, and in many
places the sea washes the base of the trunks of the trees. The outer spits
of the islands usually terminate in shingle beaches or patches of small
boulders, while the inner beaches become sandy. Many isolated sand bars
and banks are irregularly scattered over the southern reef flat, between
the outer edge and the lagoon of the faro. The outer edge of the reef flat
is flanked by a belt of coral boulders.

126 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Kimbudu, the southernmost island of Kolumadulu, extends nearly to the
outer edge of the faro. Its southern point is protected by coarse shingle
and boulders, and on both the eastern and western faces we readily trace
the passage of the coarse shingle of the outer point into the fine shingle
and coral sand beaches of the island towards the lagoon face of the faro.

The shape of the lagoon of the western land rim between Kandudu and
Weligandu can be traced by its color; it is of a brilliant light blue, passing
into the light green belt of shallow water of the extensive reef flat reaching
from Weligandu as far north as Kandufuri pass. Judging from the absence
of colored patches, few corals flourish on the upper parts of the sea face
slope of this northern reef flat.

The island to the northeast of Hirilandu, opposite the pass, is on the
western face of a large faro, fully two miles in diameter, surrounded by
a wide rim enclosing a lagoon with four fathoms of water. The northwest
point of the island is edged by a prominent boulder belt.

Opposite Naraka we find outliers of reef rock undercut, pitted, and
honeycombed, extending parallel to the outer edge between the island and
the boulder belt along the sea face. The sea is encroaching on the island
to the south of Naraka (Pl. 66, fig. 1). Several cocoanut-trees are lying on
the flat, the roots well away from the beach. These isolated roots look
like coral boulders, and at a distance might readily be mistaken for such.
In the northern part of the Maldives we often found such masses of isolated
roots, at a distance from the beaches and well out on the reef flats adjoining
the islands. North of Naraka sand-bars and patches and belts of shingle
extend as far as Hirilandu. Some of the shingle belts are mere threads,
often ending in small sand bars or banks.

To the south of Hirilandu a narrow curved patch of corals projects off
the lagoon face of the reef flat, and nearly shuts in a small area of the
lagoon with twenty-one fathoms of depth. The existence of such a spit
readily explains the formation of small faros with lagoons of considerable
depth. Their growth in a linear direction parallel to the lagoon face of a
reef flat would also account for the formation of long lagoons like that
extending from Vaimandu nearly to Hirilandu, with depths varying from
two to seven fathoms. South of Hirilandu corals seem to flourish abun-

HADDUMMATI. 127

dantly on the outer rim of the reef flat; great patches of corals extend
over it towards the lagoon side of the flat.

The southwest point of Kandudu is formed by a steep shingle beach
flanked by small boulders, pitted and honeycombed. At Kandudu we
found the corals on the lagoon slope of the reef flat very flourishing; they
consisted of the same genera we observed before. The lagoon slope of the
reef flat where we anchored is steep. The patches and clusters of corals
extend from one or two fathoms to twelve, where the sand lanes begin
to separate the clusters of corals; patches of corals also extend over the reef
flats towards the steep beach in from one to two fathoms. The greater part
of the reef flat is covered with Nullipores growing over small masses or
fragments of dead or dying corals.

The northern part of the western reef flat presents no feature of impor-
tance. It is an unbroken flat, covered at low tide, extending from Weli-
gandu to the pass west of Kandufuri. The chart gives an excellent idea
of the character of that face of the atoll.

Haddummati.
Plates 1,6; 8c, figs. 20, 22; 67-70, 77, fig. 1.

Haddummati (Pl. 6) is somewhat pear-shaped, with a huge spit forming
its northeastern horn. The northwestern and southwestern faces are flanked
by narrow reef flats, becoming wide near the southern side. On the north-
west side are two narrow passes and a wider one on the west side. The
southwestern reef flat is studded with islands, two of which, on the eastern
extremity of the reef flat, are large. Three large islands, well inside of the
wide southern pass, block its western face. The east face of Haddummati
is flanked by a wide reef flat covered with many large islands; this flat
narrows as we go north, the islands become smaller, and two narrow passes
separate the flats of the eastern face from the great triangular flat forming
the northeastern horn of Haddummati.' The southern part of the east face

1 Mr. Gardiner * has indicated slight changes from the charts in Gadu Channel, on the reef flat

north of Waduni Pass and at Dambidu, south of Isdu. He has left the north shore of Isdu still too far

from the outer edge of the reef flat.
* Loc. cit., p. 408.

128 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

reef flat is in the trend of the prevailing monsoons. Kolumadulu and
Haddummati, though somewhat protected by the banks to the north, are
like the northernmost atolls of the Maldives exposed both on the east and
west faces to the full action of the monsoons, while Suvadiva and Addu
are completely isolated from the banks to the north of them.

The greatest depth of the northern part of Haddummati is forty-three
fathoms. The majority of the soundings in the central area are over thirty
fathoms.

In the southern part of Haddummati are found a few sand-bars; on the
whole, it is quite as clear of islands as most of the Pacific atolls. In the
lagoon of Haddummati we do not meet the many faros characteristic of
the northern Maldives. Haddummati belongs more to the type of a large
Pacific atoll than to a Maldivian group. The greatest length of Had-
dummati from north to south is twenty-six miles, its greatest breadth is
fifteen miles.

On the western face the majority of the islands are on the southern
reef flat between Mavaru and Hitadu. The west face of Haddummati,
south of the northwest entrance, is flanked by two large reef flats, with
five islets on the southern one covered with low vegetation. No well-
defined lagoons are found on either of the flats. The outer rims are edged
with numberless patches of corals extending well over the reef flat. The
horn north of Munafuri pass is edged with a narrow belt of boulders.
The western faces of the islands are edged with small boulders or coarse
shingle passing into coral sand towards their eastern faces. Where there
are no islands, the edge of the reef flat is bordered by a belt of small
boulders. At low water the reef flats are awash.

Somewhat south of Mavaru (PI. 67) a number of small islands run diag-
onally across the reef flat forming bays. The extremities on the sea face
are connected by a belt of boulders and shingle forming a low ridge be-
tween them; it also gradually passes into coral sand towards the eastern
end of the islands. This belt of boulders is exposed to the full force of the
southwest monsoons. Further south the bays thus formed (Pl. 67, fig. 2)
are closed on the eastern side by sand banks and islets or islands, covered
with low vegetation, thrown up on the eastern rim of the land rim flat.

HADDUMMATI. 129

On the west face of Phares Island rises a low shingle beach with spits
extending towards the line of boulders on the outer edge of the rim flat.
On the reef flat south of Phares many spurs of coral shingle and small
boulders run at right angles from the outer edge of the rim flat to its
inner edge.

The vegetation of the islands of Haddummati is fairly luxuriant, but does
not compare to that of the islands on the southern groups, Suvadiva or
Addu. Pandanus are quite common; there are but few hard-wood trees.

Two large islands, Kunahandu and Hitadu, separated by a long narrow
gap, occupy the eastern horn of the southern reef flat. Hitadu is flanked
by a shingle beach with a belt of small boulders along the outer face of its
reef flat. Some large trees are seen on the eastern extremity of Hitadu.

The eastern face of the south pass of Haddummati is flanked by a wide
reef flat forming the western horn of its eastern land rim. It is edged by
a narrow belt of small boulders and shingle composed in great part of small
masses of coral boulders. The southern pass between Gadu and Hitadu is
nearly three miles wide; facing its western side are three well-wooded
islands. In the pass itself we could see coral heads and masses of corals
separated by sand lanes in about eleven fathoms. The color and number
of the coral patches indicates that comparatively few corals grow on the
lagoon face of Haddummati. As we steamed by, off the western face we
could see, on the reef flats, a few shallow sinks, but nothing to indicate
the well-defined deep lagoons on the reef flats of the northern groups.

On the reef flat opposite our anchorage off Funadu there is from three
to four feet of water at high tide. ‘The slope of the lagoon face of the rim
flat is quite steep; in from ten to eight fathoms begin patches of somewhat
delicate Madrepores followed by stouter species with Millepores and Pocillo-
pores; in about four fathoms follow masses of Astreans and of Porites.
These form great patches on the lagoon slope and in shallower water cover
extensive disconnected areas, gradually diminishing as they extend over the
shallower parts of the reef flat. They appear again on the bottom of the
deeper parts of the reef flats; but, as a whole, the corals in the lagoon have
not the flourishing appearance of those growing in the interior of the north-
ern groups of the Maldives.

130 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

On the southern part of the eastern land rim of Haddummati are two
long islands, Funadu and Gang; the last, nearly four miles long, is one of
the longest islands of the Maldives. Between Gadu and Funadu the outer
edge of the reef flat is edged by a narrow belt of small coral boulders; at
the western point of Funadu we came upon an extensive and much wider
boulder belt than is generally found in similar positions in the Maldives.
From the inner edge of the boulder belt long lines of small boulders and of
shingle run to the westward. At many points the boulders have become
cemented, and are deeply undercut, pitted, and honeycombed, forming occa-
sionally a low wall on the sea face of the reef flats. During the northeast
monsoon a slight surf breaks upon it and dies out very gradually beyond the
boulder zone. There is a marked contrast between the very moderate
forces at work on the outer faces of the Maldives, and the action of the
gigantic Pacific rollers which pound incessantly upon the narrow and steep
reef flats of the Pacific atolls. On the western faces of the Maldives the
sea is much higher during the season of the southwest monsoons than it is
on the eastern faces during the northeast monsoons, yet it never attains as
great a height, and the surf never has the carrying power of the seas rolling
north from the Southern Ocean and often transporting colossal masses of
rocks high up on the beaches, or forming extensive boulder flats or high
dams along miles of the sea face of some of the tropical Pacific atolls.

In the Maldives the boulder belt is generally narrow, the dams formed
by it are low, and the boulders themselves diminutive compared to the
size of the boulders in the Pacific. It is interesting to compare views of
the boulder belts of the Pacific and Indian oceans: such regions as the great
boulder flats of Aki, of Rangiroa, and of Makemo in the Paumotus, the dam
at Taritari,' with the boulder belt at Kureli Island, in the southern part of
Mulaku (PI. 65, fig. 2), the finest example we have seen in the Maldives.

On the sea face of Funadu the beaches are steep and flanked at the base
with stretches of beach rock. Between Funadu and Kadu, the second
island south of Gang, a large bay has been formed, closed on the sea face by
a low dam of small boulders and heaps of coral shingle; behind these, sand

1 Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. XXVIII. Rangiroa, Pls. 11, 12, fig. 2; Tikei, Pl. 40, fig. 2;
Makemo, PI. 63, fig. 2; Funafuti, Pl. 136, fig. 2; Taritari, Pl. 158, fig. 2.

HADDUMMATI. 131

and shingle have accumulated, forming bars and islands running at right
angles to the line of the outer edge of the reef flat, and reaching out towards
similar sand islands and bars thrown up on its inner face, thus forming a
great rectangular bay enclosing an incipient lagoon, a shallow disconnected
part of the reef flat, which will eventually connect Gang with the islands to
the north of it. This clearly shows the last stages in the progress of growth
of sand spits from adjoining islands, gradually closing up the opening be-
tween them, until the gap is reduced to a minimum and the two sides
finally become united into one island. To the north of this bay an ex-
tensive outlier of recent reef rock, somewhat higher than the surrounding
reef flat, extends parallel to its outer line. This part of the edge of the
outer reef flat is in many places of a reddish tint due to the growth of
Nullipores upon the dead coral boulders ; this is unusual in the Maldives.
The beaches of the southern part of the east face of Gang are edged
with beach rock; the reef flat is narrow in places, the outer slope seems to
be the extension of the beach rock belt; in others the eastern reef flat
widens out irregularly, the eastern face of the island is as a whole steep to.
Where the reef flat is narrow or forms the shore of Gang, some of the
coarse coral shingle beaches on which the surf breaks thus form the outer
steep to edge of the reef flat. On one of the narrow reef flats of Gang we
observed a large boulder, undercut, pitted, and honeycombed, perhaps the
largest we have seen; it measured from three to four feet in diameter.
Another but somewhat smaller boulder was observed to the north of Gang,
with a number of still smaller boulders scattered along the edge of the
narrow reef flat. To the north of the central part of Gang the reef flat
widens out again greatly, and is covered with a wide belt of small coral
boulders and of coral shingle. On the northern part of Gang the beaches
are mainly stretches of small coral shingle. The island south of Gang is
separated from it by a narrow gap or mere ditch with a sand-bar nearly
reaching across; this is perhaps the narrowest and best-defined gap we have
seen in the Maldives. The small islands further to the north run generally
at an angle to the trend of the reef flats, and form the sides of a series of
more or less distinct bays closed on the outer edge of the reef flats by a belt
of coral boulders or heaps of shingle. On the lagoon side these bays are

132 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

partially closed by sand-bars and islets, thrown up from the west -across the
gaps separating the islands forming the sides of the bays. The eastern
points of these islands often extend into the boulder belt; they are gen-
erally flanked with boulders; these pass into shingle beaches and sand
beaches towards the lagoon face of the reef flats. The outer spit of an
island to the north of Karaidu is covered by such a mass of boulders;
many of them are undercut, pitted, and honeycombed. To the north of
Mandu a narrow pass with eight fathoms of water leads into Haddummati.

The northeastern horn of Haddummati is a great triangular reef flat
more than five miles in length and four across its base. The extremity of
the horn is occupied by Isdu (Pl. 70), a large island nearly three miles in
length and steep to on the northern face. The chart shows a wide reef flat
surrounding Isdu, but from the position of the island it has evidently en-
croached on the flat, especially at the eastern extremity, so that its beaches
have become the outer edge of the reef flat. The great triangular horn of
Haddummati is full of sand-bars, and a number of small lagoons are en-
closed within the flat with from four to six fathoms of water. From Isdu to
Waduni Pass, a distance of nearly fifteen miles, only one small island occu-
pied the edge of the flat of the north side. A wide boulder belt extends
along the sea face of the eastern edge of the reef flat. North of Mabadu
Pass are ten small islands south of Dambidu, generally placed at an angle
with the trend of the sea face; their beaches are usually composed of
coarse coral shingle, passing into finer shingle and sand towards the west.
The gaps between these islands are narrow, almost choked with lines or
jetties of coarse shingle or small coral boulders, leaving but the merest
narrow and shallow channels between many of them. Horses of eroded
coral reef rock, undercut, pitted, and greatly weathered, extend from the
boulder belt to the roots of the trees on the top of the beaches, showing
traces of a slight former elevation of the reef flat.

Looking north across the great triangular eastern reef flat, through one
of the gaps (Pl. 69, fig. 2), one can see its northern edge dimly indicated
by an occasional sand-bar; seen through the gap between Dambidu and
Isdu its edge is marked by the small well-wooded islet which rises imme-
diately to the west of Isdu. The northern edge is also indicated by a thin

HADDUMMATI. 133

line of breakers. The great white flat is streaked with belts of light green,
light or darker blue, according to the depth of the bodies of water scattered
over its surface. The line of the lagoons trends in a northeasterly direction
immediately to the westward of Dambidu and of Isdu. The boulder belt is
of great width on the east face of Isdu; within this belt, towards ‘the eastern
horn, has been left a small islet, an outlier of coral reef rock slightly higher
than the level of the surrounding reef flats.

On the reef flats we observed a few pits and pot-holes, but not in great
numbers, as on the reef flats of many of the Pacific atolls which have been
planed down by the action of the surf.

Towards the east the reef flat of Isdu becomes narrower, the boulder belt
and the stretches of shingle beach unite until near the eastern point the reef
flat has disappeared, the slopes of the continuation of the shingle beach run
rapidly seaward, the narrow wedge-shaped point of Isdu, forming the north-
east horn of Haddummati, becomes steep to, and the sea breaks directly
upon the coarse shingle beaches of the eastern extremity of Isdu.

A short distance to the westward of the northeast horn of Isdu, a narrow
reef flat runs for a distance along its northern face, the flat gradually
widens westward, and for a distance of four miles it increases in width,
when it gradually narrows and passes into the long and narrow strip of reef
flat which extends in a southwesterly direction as far as Waduni Pass.
From the northern side of the horn we could trace the positions of the
numerous sand-bars and banks scattered over the surface of the horn to the
westward and northward of the line of lagoons.

From the rapid examination we made of the northeastern horn of
Haddummati, it is difficult to determine accurately the mode of formation
of the lagoons. I am inclined to consider them as parts of the original
lagoon or reef flat which have little by little been enclosed and isolated
by the growth of sand-bars and patches of corals or of spits, somewhat
as we find outgrowths on the edge of the reef flat to the east of Waduni
Pass and of Mavaru Island, where a part of the lagoon, with eight fathoms
of water, is nearly enclosed by a coral belt. The east face of Haddummati
is characterized by the great extent of land formed by the nearly continuous
islands on this reef flat. Looking back from the eastern extremity of Isdu

134 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

(Pl. 70, fig. 1), the line of islands on the east face seems like a solid stretch
of land as far as Gang, and again from Gang to Gadu, with the exception
of the wide gap between it and Funadu.

Mr. Gardiner! describes Kolumadulu as ending the series of Maldive
Banks in a typical atoll, yet it has a large faro with four fathoms in the
velu to the northeast of Hirilandu Pass, and pools (velus according to
Gardiner) with six and seven fathoms of water in the reef flats circum-
scribing the southern and western faces of Kolumadulu. He speaks of
Haddummati as “still more perfect in shape . . . with no trace of velu.”
This is not the case, as in the flats of the northeast horn of Haddummati to
the southwest of Isdu are several velus with from three to six fathoms of
water. Mr. Gardiner attempts to show that the varying depths of the
banks from Tiladummati to Kolumadulu is due to the perfection of the atoll
condition rather than to the position of the banks on the greater Maldivian
plateau. The difference in the depths of the banks is not great enough to
warrant such an inference. On the contrary, the soundings indicating the
pitch of the greater bank to the north and to the south point to differences
in depths far greater than those of the basins of the smaller banks.

Suvadiva.
Plates 1,6; 8c, figs. 22, 23; 71-75 ; 79, fig. 1.

Suvadiva (Pl. 6), one of the largest of known atolls, is somewhat pear-
shaped ; it is forty-four miles long north and south, and thirty-four miles
in breadth. Though many of the reef flats of Suvadiva have the charac-
teristics of the reef flats of Pacific atolls, yet large stretches of the outer
face of the group are flanked by faros with deep lagoons similar to those
of the northern groups. Such are the great faros on the northern face of
Suvadiva, along which we skirted; the faro, with its great lagoon, which
forms the western face of the northwest pass into Suvadiva, and the lagoon
reefs of the northwest face. A number of most irregularly shaped banks
and faros lie to the south of the outer northern line of faros, and occupy a
great part of the northwestern face of Suvadiva.

1 Loe. cit., p. 156,

SUVADIVA. 135

Along the southern part of the western rim of Suvadiva we find three
narrow reef flats, separated by deep passes, flanked on the western face by
numerous islands, while on the eastern faces are a number of small lagoons
or bays or extensive narrows with from three to ten fathoms in depth,
formed by the growth of coral patches or stretches off the eastern face
of the western reef flats. These patches, becoming connected, enclose a
part of the littoral area of the lagoon, shutting it off more or less from
the greater lagoon.*

Notwithstanding the general resemblance of Suvadiva to some of the
large atolls of the Marshall Islands, where corals do not flourish in the
interior of the lagoons, yet the corals on the slopes of the interior banks
and on the inner slopes of the outer reef flats of Suvadiva are more flourish-
ing than either in Kolumadulu or Haddummati. From the great area of
the deep passes opening into Suvadiva, as compared to that of Kolumadulu
and of Haddummati, we can readily see how the inner waters of the group
retain a far more oceanic character than the enclosed areas of Haddummati
and of Kolumadulu. A glance at the chart (Pls. 5, 6) will bring out the
marked contrast existing in that respect between these groups.

Within the lagoon many islands and a great number of small banks are
scattered over the plateau of Suvadiva. It should be remembered in com-
paring the Maldive atolls and those of the Pacific that the character of
the islands in the lagoons is very different from that of the islands within
the groups of the Maldives. In the former they are few in number and
generally the remnants of the extensive denudation of somewhat more ex-
tended land areas, consisting of older limestone rocks, while in the Maldives
the islands are the result of the active growth of corals now going on.

On the sea face cf Mafuri (Pl. 73) horses of conglomerate run across
the base of the beach and the reef flat; the position of these horses indicates

1 When discussing the origin of the Maldives, Darwin * states that small reefs within large lagoons
or broad lagoon channels would grow up during subsidence, and therefore would sometimes be found
rising abruptly from a greater depth than that at which the efficient polypifers can flourish. This
Darwin considers to be well exemplified in the small abruptly sided reefs with which the deep lagoons
of the southern Maldive atolls are studded. He considers that the rings in the margin of the northern
Maldive atolls, although broader than the exterior of an ordinary atoll are only modified portions of

such a reef, and that the central rings occupy the same relative position as the knolls occurring in

lagoons.
* Loe. cit., p. 141.

136 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

a former slightly higher elevation of the reef flats. On the sea face the
beach has been thrown up from four to five feet above the highest point of
the beach conglomerate, thus flanking what appears like a shallow sink, —a
low, somewhat swampy depression.

As we passed Huradu, we could not fail to notice its luxuriant vegeta-
tion, as well as the splendid growth of trees found on the islands (PI. 74,
fiz. 2) to the south of Mafuri (Pl. 72), and on our way to Dandu across
Suvadiva, as well as on the eastern and southern faces of Suvadiva.
Hatedu, one of the central islands, is also covered with luxuriant vegeta-
tion, its narrow reef flat is edged with great patches of corals, the beach
is flanked with beach rock and small horses of conglomerate, as on the sea
face of Mafuri.

The great lagoon of Suvadiva is fairly clear of patches; though, as I have
already stated, a great number of banks and bars are scattered throughout
the group, principally near the land rim, on all of which the masses of colored
patches of corals extending from the edge of the flats indicate a most
luxuriant growth of reef corals. Many of the low sand-bars were covered
with numberless black terns, with white heads, great flights of which were
met with in all parts of the lagoon.

During January the climate of Suvadiva and of the southern Maldives
differed greatly from that of the northern part of the archipelago. The
southern Maldives are in the region of variable winds, and rain and squalls
from the northwest are frequent.

A great, slightly submerged reef flat, nearly a mile wide encloses Dandu
and Hura Mula, an island to the south. At the base of the inner beach of
Dandu extend (Pl. 75) stretches of slabs of beach rock, and high, steep
sand beaches fringe the island. The principal trees consisted of Pandanus,
Bread-fruit, Hibiscus, and a few other hard-wood trees.

South of Dandu the east face of Suvadiva is flanked by a number of
wide reef flats well marked by the outer line of breakers, with islands
of considerable size,‘ as Maldive islands go, all of which are well wooded.
To the east of the islands the reef flats are unusually wide. In the lagoon

1 They are such islands as Hura Mula, Mamadu, Wegeli, Funadu, and many others on the east
face as far south as Gan.

~

SS ee oe,

SUVADIVA. 137

itself, Hanlus Island is covered with large trees. In Dandu Pass we found
the corals, judging from the extent of the patches, to be growing in great
abundance on both sides of the pass, on the reef flats flanking it to the
north and south.

On the eastern points of many of the islands on the east face masses
of small coral boulders were thrown up on the outer edge of the reef flats.
Shingle beaches also stretched along the more exposed faces of the islands ;
the base of the steep shingle or sand beaches was frequently protected
by stretches of beach rock. Diaddu Island is marked by a long spit ex-
tending westward nearly two miles beyond the entrance of the pass to the
north of the island.

On the east face of the island to the north of Kandu Huludu (PI. 74,
fig. 1) are several fine stretches of shingle beaches. At the south end of
Kandu Huludu a large, elongated bay has been formed by the shutting off
of a part of the reef by coral boulder and reef rock ledges and shingle
beaches thrown up along the outer edge of the reef flat. Other reef rock
ledges also crop out on the reef flat between the sandy beaches of the bay
and the outer line of breakers on the edge of the reef flat. Long bays,
like the one described above, when closed by the junction of points of
adjacent islands, form a shallow lagoon parallel in a general way to the
trend of the outer reef flat; while, when formed by patches parallel to
the inner edge of the reef flat, which have enclosed parts of the lagoon,
they often become lagoons of considerable depth. It should be remem-
bered that in the building up of a faro, the walls are continuous and
usually enclose a deep lagoon, while the lagoons on reef flats are gen-
erally shallower, and their rims formed by the coalescence of independent
coral patches or bars of sand or of recent reef rock; this often crops out
on the reef flat between the inner edge of the reef flat and the outer line
of breakers.

The western point of the wide reef flat to the south of Kandu Huludu
is edged by a well-marked belt of coral boulders and of reef rock ledges
with heaps of coarse coral shingle, forming incipient islands on the western
face of the reef flat. The east face of Huluwarolu, to the south of Kandu
Huludu Pass, is flanked by high shingle beaches.

138 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

Although several of the passes into Suvadiva are shallow,’ south of Madu
we have only six fathoms in the channel, south of Diaddu and of Kandu
Huludu, seven, yet the greater number are wide and deep, admitting free
access to the outside sea, so as to make Suvadiva a strictly oceanic atoll,
if I may so call open atolls of great depth like Suvadiva. Suvadiva has a
greatest depth of forty-nine fathoms, with the majority of the soundings
near forty fathoms. It is by far the largest body of deep water in the
Maldives; and though it contains at least two hundred islands and banks,
they are quite lost in this huge atoll, and so far apart that one often
seems to be steaming at sea or through an archipelago of small distant
islands, or making for the outer rim of a neighboring atoll, as when passing
from the face of one group to another. The dark color of the deep enclosed
waters adds to the deception.

Many bays are to be seen on the sea face of the larger islands on the
eastern side of Suvadiva, plainly showing that the larger islands have been
formed by the coalescence of smaller ones, joined at first, perhaps, merely
by a shingle bar, or a line of coral boulders or of sand-bars. With the
accumulation of material the connecting belt of shingle becomes a string
of banks or of islets, till finally the outer extremities of adjoining islands
are united, and a shallow sheet of water is enclosed within three sides of a
rectangle. ‘The open lagoon face in its turn is barred in the same way by
chains of sand-bars or islets; they, in their turn, become united, and thus a
closed, shallow lagoon is formed. The long island of Huluwarolu is only in
a more advanced state of coalescence than the smaller and still indepen-
dent islands and islets to the south of it. On the west face of Suvadiva
a similar process has been going on, but the islands are more disconnected
than on the east face. Only a few larger islands have been formed on the
reef flats of the western face, such as Havaru, Kandudu, Hondedu, and Nadale.
The western reef flats are edged with numerous small islands and islets, until
we reach the large islands on the southern reef flats of Suvadiva, like Fiori
and Matoda, all composite islands, like those of the east face.

1 In a number of the passes of the central Maldives, the outer soundings on the rim are shallower
than those on the inner faces; they indicate the submarine extension of the crest of the adjoining reef
flats, and are well within the depths at which corals may grow.

The same is the case in a few of the passes of the northern Maldives, the northern passes of
Haddummati, and many of the passes on the faces of Suvadiva and of Addu.

SUVADIVA. 139

The sea face of the islands on the east face of Suvadiva are flanked by
coarse shingle beaches; they pass, as is usually the case, into finer shingle
towards the west, and on the lagoon face the beaches become coral sand
beaches. Numerous shingle jetties, passing into sand-bars, run at right
angles from the outer edge of the reef flats. They are the first indications
of small islets which eventually become covered with scanty vegetation,
and become connected at the sea or lagoon faces to form the larger islands
reaching nearly across the width of the reef flats.

The original gaps between the islands or islets vary greatly in width.
Sometimes they are not more than a few yards wide, or they may be
nearly a mile across, their width depending in a great measure upon the
exposure of the faces of the reef flats to the prevailing winds, the abundance
of corals on their sea slopes to supply the material for the boulder belts,
reef rock ledges, and shingle or sand beaches which are to fill the gaps. A
shingle bar often rises in the centre of a bay, running parallel to the outer
edge, thus forming a shallow lagoon divided into two distinct pools.

South of Dandu (PI. 75) the sea face of the reef flats are generally
lined with boulders and large masses of corals, honeyeombed and pitted,
remnants of the elevated reef rock, or with smaller masses of corals and
coral shingle, forming lanes and jetties extending towards the lagoon.
The eastern extremity of the islands, which extend close to the eastern
edge of the reef flats, are flanked with masses of boulders or with coarse
coral shingle beaches, gradually
passing into coral sand beaches
towards the west. The passes
between the reef flats, as at Gadu
and Gan, are usually flanked by

wide reef flats edged with a belt
_of boulders or of shingle; the

Boat orr Gapu.

outer shores of the islands are
flanked by shingle beaches. A few bars of reef rock crop up on the outer
reef flats inside of the boulder belt, with an occasional stretch of beach
rock at the base of the shingle or coral sand beaches.

Gan Channel and the passes between it and Wadu, although partly

140 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

closed by reef flats and faros, yet form a series of wide, deep openings for
a distance of more than eight miles; they allow a great mass of water to
flow in and out of the southern face of Suvadiva. Four of these passes are
more than thirty fathoms deep. A single such pass would almost give to
the enclosed waters an oceanic character; and if we add to this the mass of
water entering through the many passes of the western, southern, and
eastern faces, one can form some idea of the volume of water constantly
pouring in and out of Suvadiva, in addition to what is forced into it over
the reef flats.

On measuring roughly the width of the passes and length of the reef flats
of Suvadiva, and taking from these the length occupied by the islands on
the reef flats, it will be found that the open spaces are large in comparison
to the bars formed by the islands. There are at least twenty-six miles of
deep passages leading into Suvadiva. The remainder of the periphery is
occupied by reef flats, over which water passes freely at all stages of the
tide. Taking the periphery of Suvadiva to be about one hundred and thirty
miles, not more than forty-five miles of it is occupied by islands and islets.
Thus on fully two thirds of the circumference of Suvadiva oceanic waters
pass freely into the lagoon. This readily accounts for the great purity
of the inner waters, the rim being a very open sieve.

The corals growing on the slopes of the bars and banks and islands of
this huge enclosed basin are bathed by currents bringing an abundant supply
of oceanic water, though they are not washed by as strong a surf as are
the outer faces of the land rim of Suvadiva, especially during the period of
the southwest monsoon. The greater strength of that monsoon is clearly
indicated by the trend of the summit of the trees and bushes on the sea
face of the western side of Suvadiva, on the islands in the atoll, and on
the lagoon face of the islands of the east side. Steaming north from Gan
Channel through the eastern part of Suvadiva in the direction of Dandu,
we passed a number of small banks and islands all accurately plotted on
the chart; they presented no points of special interest. The islands were
evidently formed upon banks or faros in the manner already described, some
of them occupying but a limited area of the bank, others a somewhat larger
one, and others the whole of the bank, being steep to and leaving only a

i
5

SUVADIVA. 141

small or a narrow rim as a reef flat. The southern islands in the basin of
Suvadiva, like those to the west of Gan and in the northern part of the atoll,
are covered with luxuriant vegetation. The trees form great clumps, reach-
ing close to the top of the steep sand beaches; asa rule, but few cocoanuts
grow on the islands. Hanlus and Labadu are’ excellent examples of Suva-
diva lagoon vegetation.

Corals were growing in great profusion on the edge and part of the
flats of the banks we passed, forming spits in the direction of the stronger
of the prevailing winds. On the southern face of Suvadiva a number
of crescent-shaped banks have been formed with crescentic islands; they
resemble the more irregular faros of the northern groups. Where strong
currents exist, as through the channel between Gan and Wadu, the corals
have grown in spits and form the crescent-shaped banks of the southern
face of Suvadiva.

Matoda is one of the larger crescent-shaped islands on the western ex-
tremity of one of the southern reef flats. They have probably been formed
by the coalescence of adjacent patches growing parallel to the lagoon face of
the reef flat. On the western face the coral patches have formed small
bays, eventually uniting the eastern extremities of the islands and islets
on the outer edges of the reef flats.’

At a depth of nine fathoms in the pass to the north of Wegeli, we
could plainly see the bottom covered with patches of masses of corals.
To the north, the islands of the east face are well clothed with luxuriant
vegetation, some of the trees being of considerable size. The lagoon faces
of the reef flats we examined slope very gradually. The boulder belt is
specially developed on the east face of the reef flat of Funadu, and to the
south of the northern spit of the island. At Digura the boulder belt forms
an incipient dam on the outer edge of the reef flat; within that patches of
recent elevated reef rock, pitted and honeycombed, stand out at a somewhat
higher level than the surrounding reef flat. Stretches of beach rock
extend along the base of the sea beaches of many of the islands on the
east. face of Suvadiva to the north of Funadu.

1 Mr. Gardiner considers these patches to be remnants of the breaking up of a long line of reef.
Loe, cit., p. 413.

142 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

The outer rims of the reef flats of the Maldives are in striking contrast
with those of the Pacific atolls. The latter are characterized by the pres-
ence of the deep tongues of water penetrating well into the reef flats,
scalloping the exterior edge so that the whole becomes a mass of broad
digitate lobes, many of them forming diminutive boat harbors. These
lobes are separated by high, rounded masses of brilliantly colored Millepores,
Pocillopores, and Nullipores. Nothing of this kind exists in the Maldives;
the edge of the reef flats is sometimes flanked by a low wall of coral, or
a belt of boulders, or by colored patches of corals extending over the outer
part of the reef flat, forming a very insignificant border as compared to its
Pacific representative.

The southern point of Kudu is flanked by a steep coarse shingle beach,
with a few coral boulders on the outer edge of the reef flat, forming the
north face of the pass to the south of the island. The shingle beach passes
into fine shingle and sand towards the west. To the north the edge of the
outer reef flat is flanked by a wide belt of coral boulder, forming occasional
heaps backed by shingle and sand, with short stretches of coral reef rock,
pitted and honeycombed, rising slightly above the general level of the
surrounding reef flats.

There are three bays on the east faces of Wiringili, formed by outer
lines of coral boulders and heaps of coarse shingle, connecting projecting
points of the island; they indicate plainly where the gaps existed which
once cut Wiringili into a number of separate islands that are now united.
Their former separation can also be detected by the low vegetation grow-
ing on the sand-bars connecting the separate islands, contrasted to the
large trees that grow on the older parts which once existed as separate
islands, as they are still marked on the charts; changes like these are
the most prominent errors that can be detected on the charts. To the
north of Wiringili are extensive patches of recent reef rock, slightly
elevated, undercut, and pitted, and honeycombed; the outer edge of the
flat is flanked with a belt or heaps of coral boulders.

The great reef flat which forms the northeastern horn of Suvadiva ex-
tends unbroken in a northwesterly direction from Wiringili for more than
ten miles; with the exception of the islets north of Wiringili, there are no

SUVADIVA. 143

islands on it until we reach Mameta, about halfway to the northern ex-
tremity of the reef flat. The water on the reef flat is shallow; many sand-
bars rise from it. North of Wiringili a narrow velu extends almost to
Mameta, it is indicated on Mr. Gardiner’s chart of Suvadiva;! the outer
edge is flanked for nearly its whole length by a boulder belt, or by heaps
of shingle and small boulders.

It will be seen that I differ greatly from Mr. Gardiner’ in considering
Suvadiva as an open and oceanic atoll, and do not—as he does—look
upon its rim as anything but perfect. Mr. Gardiner circumnavigated the
lagoon of Suvadiva, and paid special attention to the lagoon face of
the western encircling reef. He considers the differences he noticed in the
existence of reef patches on the eastern face of Hondedu and east of
Fiori as due to the breaking up of the reef, which is indicated as con-
tinuous on Moresby’s Chart, and to the fusion of the separate velus into one.
The islands of the west face south of Nadale are evidently washing
away on the lagoon face.®

Mr. Gardiner has in his chart of Suvadiva* indicated the depth of the
central flat as ranging from forty to fifty fathoms; the majority of the
soundings on the Admiralty Chart in that region are less than forty-five
fathoms, with only one sounding of forty-nine fathoms. Mr. Gardiner
infers from his line of soundings between Gadu and Nadale that there has
been an increase in depth of about two fathoms in that part of the
lagoon of Suvadiva. He further concludes that as the coral shoals and
heads in the interior of the lagoon are precipitous to thirty fathoms, they
could not have arisen from a base of that depth, and that the greater depth
must be due to solution of the bottom of the lagoon; while recognizing
the efficiency of solution that does not preclude reef corals from obtaining
a foothold at that depth.

On comparing his line of soundings with those on the Admiralty Chart,
the two deepest soundings, 48 and 46, are in an area not sounded by
Moresby, and there is nothing to indicate that they may not have been the
normal soundings in 1835 as much as the soundings to the eastward.

1 Loc. cit., Pl. XXI. 8 Loc. cit., p. 413.
2 Loe. cit., p. 409. 4 Loe. cit., Pl. XXI.

144 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

As to the missing shoal marked in passage to the south of Kuradu,
that may have been wrongly marked, or merely a spur of the reef flat
projecting into the passage, much as we found coral patches growing in
great abundance on both sides of the pass north of Dandu.

Mr. Gardiner states’ that on the west face of Suvadiva the islands south
of Nadale are wasting on the lagoon face, while north of Nadale to Hondedu
“they show little or no sign of erosion.” So are many of the islands of the
east face, yet a number are sending out very marked spits lagoonward
from the angles of their lagoon faces, as are the islands on the south face
between Gan and Wadu. Some of the islands we passed in the lagoon
seem to be wasting on the western faces.

On the west face, according to Gardiner, great changes have taken place
in the shape of the land of Tinadu; he considers the two passes to
the south to be closing (he could not examine them), and yet in the
immediate vicinity the lagoon was deepening, as he anchored in twenty
fathoms where the chart marked seventeen. Owing to the changes of the
shape of the reef flat the evidence is not very conclusive, specially as less
than a quarter of a mile off, soundings are given of twenty-five and twenty-
three fathoms; he considers the hook-shaped spit to the east of Tinadu as
indicating the former presence of a velu now opening into the lagoon.

1 Loe. cit., p. 418.

UNDER THE WING OF THE CHIEF DANDU.

dete | ~

FUA MULAKU.— ADDU. 145

Fua Mulaku.
Plates 1, 6, 8c, fig. 28.

We were unable to visit the island of Fua Mulaku; it rises in the
Equatorial Channel from a depth of about thirteen hundred fathoms, at a
distance of less than two miles. It is twenty miles distant from Addu, and
trends in a northeasterly direction. The island is two miles long, about
three quarters of a mile wide, steep to, except at the southeast face, where
a long shoal with soundings varying from two to seven fathoms extends for
about one and a half miles southward. Mr. Gardiner’ states that, according
to native accounts, Fua Mulaku has a pool of fresh water in the centre.

Addu.
Plates 1,6; 8c, figs. 21, 28; 76, 77, fig. 2.

While some of the larger groups of the Maldives, like Kolumadulu,
Haddummati, Suvadiva, and Felidu, bear a close resemblance to atolls in the
Paumotus, the Marshall, Ellice, and Gilbert Islands, yet the groups which
most resemble the Pacific atolls are smaller atolls like Addu, Wataru Reef,
Rasdu, Gaha Faro, Goifurfehendu, Fadiffolu, Makunudu, and Ihavandiffulu.

Addu (PI. 6), perhaps, is more like some of the Pacific atolls than any
other Maldivian group. It is isolated from the rest of the groups, fifty
miles from the nearest atoll to the north, and its position reminds us of
that of Funafuti, one of the atolls of the Ellice group, forty miles distant
from Nukufetau, the next island to the north, separated by a channel more
than twenty-four hundred fathoms deep. Between Addu and Suvadiva we
have a depth of over twelve hundred fathoms.

Addu on the south is as far isolated from the Maldives as is Minikoi on
the north, both resembling low Pacific atolls, and quite different in structure
from the typical Maldivian atoll; both are bounded by reef flats, not by faros ;
but the climatic conditions under which they are placed are quite different.
Minikoi is in the region of the northeast and southwest monsoons, while
Addu is in the equatorial region of variable southerly and westerly winds,

1 Loe. cit., p. 419.
10

146 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

with rain squalls prevailing. These conditions readily explain the differences
existing in the development of the land rims of Addu and of Minikoi.

Addu (Pl. 6) is irregularly triangular in outline, and seven miles from
north to south; its northern face is concave, about ten miles long, while
the others are slightly convex. The hook-shaped extension of the northern
point of Hitadu Island forms the northwestern horn of Addu, and the islets
extending westward from Midu flank the northeastern horn of the atoll.
There are two narrow and comparatively shallow passes, separated by islets
on a reef patch, in the central part of the northern face, and two wider
passes, the southeastern and the southwestern (PI. 77, fig. 2). Wide and
continuous reef flats occupy the whole of the western and eastern faces;
the flats are narrow along the northern face of the atoll.

At Midu on the northeast corner of Addu the vegetation of the eastern
face is quite luxuriant; that of Wiringili, the island flanking the western
face of the southeast pass of Addu, being, perhaps, as luxuriant as that of
any island in the Maldives. This fine vegetation extends to the islands
on the west face; though south of Huludu the vegetation is poorer, and in
some of the smaller and narrow islands to the north of the southeast pass
it is reduced to mere scrub, so that steaming along the east face one can
look into the lagoon across the narrow belt of islands and islets. The
eastern edge of the reef flat is edged by a wide belt of masses of boulders
reaching the very base of the shingle beaches on the outer face of the
islands. Such a narrow land rim reminds one of similar lines of islands
in the Marshall Islands, where they form the merest wall separating the
lagoon from the ocean. On the sea face of Midu a wide sandy bay,
separated from the ocean by only a narrow belt of boulders, occupies the
central part of the island.

The shingle beach on the outer face of Wiringili is, perhaps, the highest
we have seen in the Maldives. Slight changes have taken place since 1836
in the topography of Wiringili, as represented on the chart. The long sand
spit edging the reef flat on the west side of the pass did not exist, and the
island to the west of Wiringili was not connected with it by a sand spit, as
it now is, these additions forming the sides of a great bay enclosing three
sides of the Wiringili reef flat.

— —

aA

ADDU. 147

The southern part of the eastern face of the southeast pass is flanked
by a long spit edged by a belt of coral boulders, with patches of shingle
near the western extremity of the spit, the position of which is clearly
indicated by a line of breakers skirting its edge.

The largest islands of Addu are on its western face, separated by com-
paratively narrow gaps. Several of the islands on the western face are
throwing out spits towards the outer edge, and forming bays partly shut off
from the sea.’ The larger islands all show traces of having been made up
of separate islands now united by sand spits or bars. This is well seen at
Hitadu on the western and at Midu on the eastern face. The lagoon
beaches of the islands of Addu are high and steep, far steeper than those
we have seen near any of our anchorages.

The northern part of the southeast face is flanked by a reef flat at the
angle of which is the large island of Midu, forming the northeast horn of
Addu. To the south of Midu the greater part of the reef flat is occupied
by a line of narrow islands far smaller than those on the west face of Addu;
they do not compare in size with Hitadu, which is four miles in length
and a mile wide in places.

There are no islands in the lagoon of Addu, and only five small sand-bars.
The greater part of the lagoon is about thirty fathoms in depth; it varies
from twenty-four to thirty-nine fathoms, its greatest depth.

At Gan (Pl. 76) the vegetation on the lagoon side reaches to the summit
of the beach. In places the lagoon seems to be slightly encroaching on the

1 Mr. Gardiner * has called attention to the seven small islands thrown up (since 1835) off the west
face of Gan and Faidu, close to the outer edge of the reef flat. According to him, the topography of
the northeast horn of Addu, which we did not visit, has been considerably modified. The line of small
islands to the west of Midu consists of a greater number of islands than is indicated on Moresby’s Chart.+
The western face of the flat of the northeast horn is figured by Gardiner as much wider than on the
Admiralty Chart, having encroached upon the northeast bay of the lagoon, and formed a false velu, t
as he calls the deep and narrow strip of water, five fathoms deep, separated from the lagoon by an outer
reef. Such false velus are like those of Tahanea, and are found in many of the Paumotus. I have
called them secondary lagoons. § In the Paumotus they are usually parallel to the outer reef flat. The
northwestern horn, which was charted clear of coral heads by Moresby, is now partly shut off by coral
knolls. He also states that the bank off the western point of the eastern reef flat of the southeastern

pass has become united with the reef flat ; it is, however, on his chart still indicated as an independent
bank. The bank with seven fathoms on the opposite side of the pass is, I think, a spit of the western
face of the pass.

* Loc. cit., p. 415. ¢ Loe. cit., p. 415.
+ Loe. cit., pp. 318, 415, § Mem. M. C. Z., Vol. XXVIIL, p. 86.

148 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

land. On the lagoon slope of Gan corals, although growing in many
irregular patches, yet do not seem to me to grow as vigorously as they are
stated to do by Gardiner in Addu.’ In from eight to ten fathoms the
masses already grow somewhat apart, and gradually become separated by
wide lanes of coral sand.

1 Mr. Gardiner states that Addu is filling with sand derived from the disintegration of the coral
growth, which, taken as a whole, he says, “ quite surpasses in vigor anything in my experience elsewhere,
either in the Maldives or in the Pacific.” This Mr. Gardiner bases on soundings taken by Mr. Cooper,*
and asks for a comparison of his amended chart with the Admiralty Chart, though Mr. Gardiner
recognizes the uselessness of isolated soundings, from the difficulty of fixing points of reference, due to
changes in the land; he says, ‘‘ we could get no even approximatively fixed points for our sight.” +

Mr. Gardiner on his amended chart places the northeast point of Addu nearly half a mile more to
the eastward than Moresby, and thus shows a great increase in the dimensions of the northeast horn
flats; this renders it impracticable to locate Mr. Cooper’s soundings on the Admiralty map. Taking the
general trend of the lines south of Hangadu — Gardiner, loc. cit., p. 415, fig. 109 —to the western spit of
the southeast passage, thence towards Hika and the line immediately south of the northwestern passage
with its northeastern extension to Balihura, we do not find Mr. Cooper’s soundings sufficiently close to
the positions of Moresby’s soundings to warrant his conclusions. Mr. Gardiner’s soundings of thirty-one
fathoms, or any other, as plotted, do not come sufliciently near the thirty-nine-fathom spot of Moresby
to be proof of a change of level of eight fathoms.

Granting that in Addu, being outside the influence of the trades, the currents due to them cannot
affect the circulation of its lagoon as greatly as in more open northern atolls, yet the circulation due to
the tides alone is sufliciently active to induce comparatively rapid change in the waters of the lagoon.
Mr. Gardiner ascribes the filling of the lagoon “rather to the want of solution” and decrease in depth
of the passages (which is not demonstrated) “than to the luxuriant growth of corals;’’ yet the north-
western horn has been shut off by corals since 1836. Against this § he sets the possible decrease of the
area from which the sediment is supplied, which he attributes in one case to increase of land, and in the
other looks upon it as an ‘‘ effective source of sediment.” | While acknowledging the important agency
of solution in modifying the hydrography of a lagoon, it seems hazardous to measure its efticiency by
the comparative surveys made by Mr. Gardiner in the Maldives: || its existence and extent is far more
readily perceived in the changes which, by analogy, we may fairly estimate in such atolls as Fulanga,
Argo, Ongea, Yangas4, and others in Fiji. 7]

Mr. Gardiner estimates ** that five-sevenths of the lagoon of Addu is protected by land, and that
there are but ten miles of flats over which water can have access to the lagoon. It certainly is well
protected on the west face, and on a good part of the eastern face; but it seems to me that Mr.
Gardiner’s estimate of the effect of this protection is altogether too great. Ten miles of flats, together
with two channels with only a narrow irregular ridge separating deep water from the lagoon, is an area
quite sufficient to allow a fair circulation of water in the lagoon, and to account for a better growth of
corals where the water from the flats strikes the lagoon. Mr. Gardiner speaks of the water in the
lagoon of Addu “as considerably clearer than in most basins.’’ ++ Our experience during our short stay
in Addu was quite the contrary; the water was everywhere remarkably turbid. Although the reef flats
of Addu average more in breadth than those of any of the other Maldive groups, yet the difference does
not appear important enough to sustain Mr. Gardiner’s conclusions that although there has been solution,
now there is little solution, owing to the want of circulation, for according to his views, when an atoll
is more or less closed, then begins the period of solution in depth.

* Loc, cit., p. 318. § Loe. cit., p. 321. ** Loc. cit., p. 820.
+ Loe. cit., p. 415. || Loc. cit., p. 323. tt Loc. cit., p. 320
$ Loc. cit., p. 321. { Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. XXXIIL., pp. 57, 60, 62.

TEMPERATURE OF THE LAGOONS. 149

TEMPERATURE OF THE LAGOONS.

THE bottom temperature of the lagoons of the Maldives differs but little
from that of the surface.

At Addu, the northern part of Suvadiva, Haddummati, Kolumadulu,
Fadiffolu, and Tiladummati, the temperatures were identical. The bottom
temperature was slightly colder (from 0°.5 to 1°) at North Malosmadulu,
the southern part of Suvadiva, Mulaku, and Ari. While at Felidu and North
Male the bottom temperature was 0°.5 warmer than the surface. The
water was from 0°.5 to 6° warmer than the air at Haddummati, Suvadiva,
Addu, Kolumadulu, Felidu, Fadiffolu, North and South Malosmadulu, North
Male, and Tiladummati. In the southern part of Ari we found the tem-
perature of the air 1° greater than that of the surface.

The water of the atolls is evidently heated to a temperature above that
of the adjoining oceanic waters. According to the observations of the
“ Valdivia” between the Maldives (Suvadiva) and the Chagos Archipelago,
the temperature at a depth of fifty metres was 26° Centigrade, and that
at seventy-five metres had dropped to 21°.8 Centigrade.’

The following observations were made:

Temperatures usually taken at 8 P.M.

Dec. 28, 1901. Air, 84° at anchor off Ariadu (Ari).
Surface of water, 83°.5 (Fahrenheit).
Bottom, 82°, thirty fathoms.
Dec. 29, 1901. South part of Mulaku at anchor in thirty-four fathoms.
Surface, 83°.
Bottom, 82”.

1 Temperatur Curven, Pl. XXIII., Wiss. Ergebnisse d. Deutschen Tiefsee Expedition. Text,
Erster Band, 1902.

150

Jan.

Jan.

Jan.

Jan.

Jan.

Jan.

Jan.

1, 1902.

2, 1902.

4, 1902.

5, 1902.

eo)

11, 1902.

13, 1902.

. 14, 1902

LOZ:

THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

South part of Haddummati at anchor in twenty-seven
fathoms.

AIP ion

Surface, 82°.

Bottom, 82’.

North part of Suvadiva (Mafuri) at anchor in twelve fathoms.

Air, 79°.

Surface, 82°.

Bottom, 82°.

Southern part of Suvadiva (Gadu) at anchor in twenty-
eight fathoms.

Air, 77.25.

Surface, 81°.5.

Bottom, 81°.75.

Southern part of Addu (off Gan) at anchor in twenty-two
fathoms.

Air, 76°.

Surface, 82’.

Bottom, 82°.

At anchor off Kandudu (Kolumadulu) in twenty-four fathoms.

Air, 80°.5.

Surface, 82°.

Bottom, 82°.

At anchor off Buri Hura (Felidu) in twenty-six fathoms.

Air, 82°.

Surface, 82°.5.

Bottom, 81°.5.

At anchor off Kagi (North Male) in twenty-two fathoms.

Air, 80°.

Surface, 81°.

Bottom, 81°.5.

At anchor off Maro (Fadiffolu) in twenty-six fathoms.

Air, 80°.2.

Surface, 81°.5.

Bottom, 81°.5.

Jan. 15, 1902.

Jan. 16, 1902.

Jan. 17, 1902.

Jan. 19, 1902.

TEMPERATURE OF THE LAGOONS. 151

At anchor off Turadu (South Malosmadulu) in twenty-
one fathoms.

AI Tor

Surface, 81°.

Bottom, lost thermometer.

At anchor off Medu (North Malosmadulu) in twenty-one
fathoms.

Air, 80°.

Surface, 81°.5.

Bottom, 81°.

At anchor off Anguretin (North Malosmadulu) in twenty-
eight fathoms.

Air, 80°.

Surface, 81°.5.

Bottom, 81°.

At anchor off Hanimadu (Tiladummati) in sixteen fathoms.

Air, 81°.5.

Surface, 82°.

Bottom, 82°.

152 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

BOTTOM DEPOSITS IN THE LAGOONS.

At a number of localities, generally at our anchorages in the Maldives
and in the central parts of the lagoons, we collected samples of the bottom
deposits as well as of the sand or other material forming the beaches, both
of the lagoon and of the sea faces of the islands we visited. It is proposed
to work up this material in connection with similar collections made during
my explorations of the coral reefs of the Pacific and West Indies. I hope
later to publish a report on the extensive collections brought together to
illustrate the nature of the lagoon and beach deposits on coral reefs.

A few notes only are given here to show the character of the bottom of
the Maldive lagoons.’

At anchor off Male Island, in twenty-six fathoms, the bottom consisted
of broken and rolled coral fragments covered with Nullipores.

At anchor off Kagi, extreme northern part of North Male, in twenty-two
fathoms, the bottom was covered with sponges and Nullipores, and fragments
of coral.

At anchor off Maro (Fadiffolu), in twenty-six fathoms, the bottom con-
sisted of fine gray coral sand, the dredge brought up many shells, a few
Crustacea, and a Maretia.

At anchor off Turadu (South Malosmadulu), in twenty-one fathoms, the
bottom was composed of Corallines and Algae, with Orbitolites, Nodosoria,
with masses of broken and worn shells and fragments of Laganum and
of Metalia.

At anchor off Medu (North Malosmadulu), in eighteen fathoms, the
bottom consisted of Nullipores, Corallines, Algae, and dead corals.

At anchor off Anguretin (North Malosmadulu), in twenty-eight fathoms,
the bottom made up of broken shells, coral sand, and Corallines.

1 An interesting analysis of the deposits collected by Mr. Gardiner, principally in the huge

lagoon of Suvadiva, has been given by Sir John Murray; this is supplemented by general notes on the
lagoon deposits of the Maldives from Mr. Gardiner (Joe. cit., p. 581).

BOTTOM DEPOSITS IN THE LAGOONS. 153

At anchor off Nalandu (Miladummadulu), in twenty-four fathoms, the
bottom consisting of coarse coral sand and sponges.

At anchor off Hanimadu (Tiladummati), in sixteen fathoms, many speci-
mens of Asymmetron came up in the dredge from a Coralline bottom. Mr.
Gardiner’ collected his specimens mainly on sandy bottoms exposed to
currents. We collected Asymmetron lucayanum (Andrews) in abundance in
the sand of some of the northern groups in twenty to thirty fathoms.

At anchor off Kuludu (Miladummadulu), in twenty-three fathoms, we
found a bottom of coarse coral sand and broken shells.

Off Turadu, in thirty fathoms, the bottom of Ari is composed of broken
corals and shells and coral sand.

At our anchorage inside Ariadu, in thirty fathoms, we found the bottom
to consist of coarse fragments of coral.

At anchor off Buri Hura, in twenty-six fathoms, the bottom consisted of
fine sticky bluish coral sand.

The bottom near the southern horn of Mulaku, in thirty-four fathoms,
was made up of very fine coral sand. This part of the group is not sheltered
by a land rim, the sea can sweep across the rim flats; we find the bottom
often consists of a fine sticky ooze, such as we find in similar conditions in
Pacific atolls.

The bottom of Kolumadulu, off Timarafuri, in twenty-nine fathoms, is
hard, consisting mainly of large pieces of broken corals.

At anchor off Kandudu (Kolumadulu), in twenty-four fathoms, we found
a bottom of coarse coral sand with a few broken shells.

The bottom at the south end of Haddummati, off Funadu, in twenty-
seven fathoms, consisted of fine coral sand, somewhat sticky, and broken
shells. At anchor near our former anchorage, off Funadu, at the south end
of Haddummati, we obtained in twenty-eight fathoms a bottom composed of
Nullipores and Corallines.

The bottom off Mafuri anchorage (Suvadiva), in twelve fathoms, con-
sisted of coarse coral sand, rather sticky, and broken shells.

The bottom at anchor off Dandu (Suvadiva), in twenty-four fathoms,

was hard, covered with Corallines and Algae.

1 Loc. cit., p. 359.

154 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

The bottom at anchor off Gadu, in twenty-eight fathoms, was hard,
swept clean by currents.

Sounding in thirty-nine fathoms in the centre of the northern part of
Suvadiva, we brought up a piece of Millepora evidently cut off from a living
cluster. This is a far greater depth, I believe, than that at which any reef
builder has as yet been dredged. In making a second sounding nearly in
the same position, we found the bottom to consist of Corallines, Coralline
fragments, and sand and ooze.

The bottom off Gan (Addu), in twenty-two fathoms, was somewhat sticky
and consisted of coarse coral sand mixed with Corallines and broken shells ;
we brought up in the dredge a number of specimens of species of Balano-
phyllia. In all, the smooth base was perforated near one extremity by an
opening leading into a cavity occupied by a small Sipunculoid.

THE PELAGIC FAUNA OF THE MALDIVES. 155

THE PELAGIC FAUNA OF THE MALDIVES.

A NUMBER of pelagic hauls were made in the atolls, and a few deep
intermediate hauls off the principal passes into them.

We usually towed in the evening from the ship, while at anchor. Off
Male Island we collected five or six species of Copepods, Atlanta, Styliola,
Hyalea, and other Pteropods." Small Salpae with blue nucleus, Sagittae,
Sapphirina, Hyperids, Collozoum, bells of Siphonophores, Diphyes, young
Fishes, Thrichodesmium, Sergestes, Autolytus, Oceaniae, and Crustacean
larvae. From another haul, with a strong current from the east coming
through the southeast pass, we obtained many Sagittae, Sapphirina, Hyalea,
and other Pteropods, Sergestes, sundry Macruran larvae, Worm larvae, Salpae,
Aurelia, Geryonia, Ephyra, probably the Ephyra of the Aurelia so common
in the Maldives, and which we also saw on our way from Colombo to Aden,
two species of Diphyes, and many young Fishes.

From a surface haul while at anchor off Kagi, northern extremity of
North Male, we obtained a few swimming Trematods, Sagittae, Pteropods,
among them a Tiedemannia, masses of a very large species of Copepod,
Crustacean larvae, both Macrurans and Brachiurans, Sergestes, Thrichodes-
mium, Geryonia, and Aglaura.

From a surface haul at our anchorage off Ariadu we obtained only a
few Copepods and larvae of Macrurans and Brachiurans, Thrichodesmium
and many pelagic Algae.

In a surface haul off Turadu (South Malosmadulu), we obtained many
Sagittae, small Crustacean larvae, Sergestes, Styliola, two species of
Cunina, Eutima, Oceania, Thrichodesmium, Collozoum, and two species
of Diphyes.

1 The abundance of Pteropods in all the tows is very marked, and probably accounts for the Ptero-
pod ooze found in the atolls of the Maldives.

156 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

In a surface haul off Anguretim (North Malosmadulu), we obtained many

Sagittae of all sizes, Sergestes, Crustacean larvae, masses of spores of
Algae, and of Thrichodesmium, very many Copepods of a small species, and
a great number of Geryonia, and of Eutima.
' At ten in the morning we made a surface haul about halfway between
Miladummadulu and Makunudu. The sea was smooth with a bright sun
shining, and the water was swarming with life. We collected a great num-
ber of Porpita, among them a few very diminutive ones, a colossal Cestum
with bright yellow pigment at the extremity of the flappers, Globigerinae,
Halobates, young Flying Fish, Diodon, Balistes, and Mollusks; Sergestes,
masses of a large blue Copepod, large blue Shrimps, young of Physalia,
many different species of floating fish eggs, Sagittae, Sargassum, and
Thrichodesmium.

We found a species of Aurelia in great abundance in the northern part of
Tiladummati, specially at our anchorage off Hanimadu, and in the northern
Maldives. It is found as far south as Addu.

Off Timarafuri Pass (Kolumadulu) we made three hauls with the
tow net in fifty, one hundred, and one hundred and fifty fathoms. We
obtained free swimming Amphioxus larvae, perhaps the young of some
pelagic species. It seems to be the same larva as that collected by
Gardiner in the south of Miladummadulu Atoll and in Fadiffolu Atoll.’
The net also contained hosts of Hyalea, Atlanta, Criseis, Cuvieria, Sty-
liola, Phyllosoma, Hyperia, three species of Siphonophores, two species
of Medusae, huge Sagittae, Sapphirina, Sergestes, brilliantly colored Ma-
erurans, Oxyrhynchus, large blue, red, and small light-brown Copepods,
and numerous large Appendiculariae.

About two miles west off Kandudu Pass (Kolumadulu), we made a pelagic
haul in about seventy fathoms. We obtained masses of Copepods, Sagittae,
Pyrosoma, Macruran and Brachiuran larvae, Sergestes, Collozoum, Aglaura,
Rhopalonema; a remarkably large transparent Zoea with a huge carmine
patch, Oxyrhynchus, transparent, Syllis-like Annelids, Diphyes, and two
other genera of Siphonophores, Sapphirina, Atlanta, and Spirialis.

1 C. Foster Cooper Cephalochorda, p. 354, Pl. XVIIL., fig. 3, Part I. Vol. II. J. S. Gardiner, Fauna
and Geog. of the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, June 15, 1903.

THE PELAGIC FAUNA OF THE MALDIVES. 157

At anchor in Kolumadulu off Kandudu we obtained from the surface
a number of large-sized Appendiculariae in their houses, Mnemiopsis and
Aglaura, small Isopods, Sagittae, Collozoum, and many Crustacean larvae.

At anchor in Felidu Atoll off Buri Hura, we obtained from the surface
Sagittae, Copepods, a large species of Appendicularia, Crustacean larvae,
both Macrurans and Brachiurans, a young Turris-like Medusa and Thricho-
desmium.

While crossing the Veimandu Channel (between Kolumadulu and Had-
dummati) in a dead calm, we passed a great number of flying fish: they
could, as a rule, rise but little; the tail, or the pectorals and tail, both
touched the water as they skimmed along. In the former case they left a
line of a single series of rings, lapping more or less, formed by striking
of the tail at regular intervals. In the second case the contact of the tail
and fins formed three lines of rings which interfered in a great many ways,
and in both cases left the delicate rings thus formed to disappear gradu-
ally long after the flying fish had sunk below the surface.

D

SZ
>

XX
ib)
Hi)
V
1)

RN

i
i
4
!

tes

KKXX
i)
VW
W
i
WON

cS

Soke
LX

x

(i
i
(

Track oF Fry1ne Fis (tail and fins). Tai TRACK.

In the Veimandu Channel we also passed a great number of Eutimas and
of Aurelias, the same species we have met with before.

We made two pelagic hauls off the southern entrance to Haddummati
in one hundred fathoms, and obtained many Sagittae, a few large red
Copepods, Collozoum, Rhopalonema, and parts of Medusae, fragments of
Diphyes, Sergestes; numerous larvae of Crustaceans, both Macrurans and
Brachiurans, Thrichodesmium, Tomopteris, and Alciopa.

158 THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

At our anchorage off Funadu (South Haddummati), just before sunset
we found the water swarming with Sapphirinae; when gathered in a jar
they produced the most beautiful effects from the variety and intensity of
the metallic colors reflected by them while swimming about. A large
species of Eutima and a species of Berenice were also abundant at this
locality. We found the Sapphirina and Eutima again swarming round
the ship early in the morning.

At our anchorage off Funadu (south part of Haddummati), we made a
most successful surface haul. It was specially marked for the large number
of Medusae it contained; there were Stomobrachium, Ephyrae, Hybocodon,
a Medusa allied to Gonionemus, Geryonia, Glossocodon, many Styliolas,
a number of Halobates, young of Ianthina, fragments of Ctenophores,
Diphyes, Veligers, Sea-urchin larvae, Sagittae and Copepods in great
number.

In a haul made later in the evening we collected only a few Copepods,
Sagittae, Crustacean larvae, and Appendiculariae.

In a surface haul off the south pass of Haddummati, we obtained a great
number of Crustacean embryos, both Macrurans and Brachiurans, Sagittae,
Salpae, Sapphirinae. Two species of Diphyes, Styliola, Spirialis, Appendi-
cularia, and a few Copepods. Salpae were very abundant in the lagoon
as well as a species of Aurelia, which we found everywhere in the Mal-
dives and in the Indian Ocean, all the way from Ceylon to Aden. In
another surface haul, at our anchorage, in the southern part of Haddum-
mati we obtained Zygodactyla, numerous Halobates, very many Aureliae,
and small Copepods shining like Sapphirina.

We made a haul off Dandu (Suvadiva) and collected fine large trans-
parent Macrurans, Sergestes, larvae of Crustaceans, among them a huge
Megalops, masses of Copepods, large transparent Syllis-like Annelids, To-
mopteris, with colossal lateral appendages; Sagittae, Salpae, Beroé, Ocyroé,
Cydippe, Mertensia, Bolina, Geryonia in all stages, two species of Diphyes,
Tima, Dipurena, Cunina, Aglaura, Zygodactyla, Stomobrachium, Oceania,
Circe, Ephyra, and Rhopalonema.

We made a pelagic haul off the Gan Channel (Suvadiva), in twenty-five
fathoms, with poor results.

THE PELAGIC FAUNA OF THE MALDIVES. 159

We made a surface haul at our anchorage off Gadu (south part Suvadiva),
and obtained Sagittae, Diphyes, young Fishes, Collozoum, Crustacean larvae,
Salpae, and Thrichodesmium.

In a surface haul at our anchorage off Gang (Addu), we obtained Sa-
gittae, Sergestes, Copepods, Crustacean larvae, Collozoum.

B. I. S. N. Co. S: “ Amra.”

INDEX.

Adago, 107, 109

Addu, 145, Pls. 1,6; 8c, figs. 21, 23; 76, 77, fig. 2
Absence of islands in lagoon of, 147
Bottom deposits of, 154.
Connection with Chagos Archipelago, 6
Corals on lagoon slope of, 148
Gardiner on Addu, 147, 148
Growth of corals in, 148
High shingle beach at, 146
In Equatorial region, 145
Isolation of, 145
Lagoon encroaching on land of, 147
Position of islands of, 147
Resemblance of, to Pacific reefs, 145
Shape of, 146
Temperature of lagoon of, 150
Vegetation of, 146

Addu Ridge, 6

Agatti, 5

Aidu, 60, Pl. 22, fig. 1

Akirifuri, 51
Bays of, 51
Vegetation of, 51

Alifuri, 71

Aligau, 73, Pl. 33, fig. 2
Vegetation of, 73

Alimata, 117

Androth, 5

Anghenufuri, 57, 65
Lagoon of, now filled, 65

Anguretin, 71
Vegetation of, 71

Ari, 103, Pls. 1,4; 86, figs. 12,14; 8c, fig. 25; 55,

fig. 2; 56-58, fig. 2

Bottom deposits of, 153
Bottom of lagoon of, 104
Changes in islands and rings of, 104, 105, 107
Depth of lagoon of, 105
Maldivian characters of, 103
Northern part of, open, 107
Temperature of lagoon of, 149
Trend of faros of east face of, 103

Ariadu, 105, Pl. 55, fig. 2

Atolls, number of, in Maldives, 1
Description of the, 35

11

Bassas de Pedro, 5
Baura, 80, 97, Pl. 49, fig. 1
Distinct islands of, 97
Beramundu, 101, Pl. 55, fig. 1
Bilifuri, 91,
Coral patches on rim of, 92
Great size of faro of, 92
Small pass into lagoon of, 92
Bitra, 5
Bodu Faro, 66
Bodu Mandu, 87, Pl. 40, fig. 1
Junction of islands of, 87
Lagoon of, nearly filled, 87
Boilers and faros, 42
Bomasdu, 87, Pl. 39, fig. 2
Shallow sink of, 87
Steep beaches of, 87
Bottom Deposits of, 152
Addu, 154
Ari, 153
Fadiffolu, 152
Haddummati, 153
Kolumadulu, 153
Miladummadulu, 153
Mulaku, 153
North Male, 152
North Malosmadulu, 152
South Malosmadulu, 152
Suvadiva, 153
Tiladummati, 153
Breyfasdu, 87, Pl. 39, fig. 1
Wasting of, 87
Bundusi, 47
Buri Hura, 116
Byramgore, 5

Cardamum, 5

Cherbaniani, 5

Chetlat, 5

Cooper, C. Foster, on Cephalochorda, 156
Cora Divh, 5

Corals in lagoon of North Male, 39

Corals in lagoon of faros, 39

Dambidu, 132

162 INDEX.

Dandu, 136, Pl. 75
Darwin, Charles, on disseverment of the large
Maldive atolls, 10
On South Maldives, 135
On subsidence of Maldives, 84
On the Maldives as a barrier reef of great
dimensions, 11

Dedu, 99, Pl. 51, fig. 1

Defili Faro, 56

Deha Faro, 85

Dehu, 75

Denduni, 84

Diaddu, 137

Didu, 105

Difuri, 36, 38

Digeli, 69

Digeri, 117

Digu Faro, 81, 85
Reef flat of, 85

Digura (Ari), 104

Digura (Suvadiva), 141

Dina Faro, 67
Gardiner on velu of, 67

Diyageli, 123, Pl. 66
Consolidation of islands at, 123

Dugati, 105

Dunacoori, 99, Pl. 52, fig. 1

Dunikolu, 62

Dureadu, 87, Pls. 41, 42, fig, 1
Great depth of lagoon of, 88
Vegetation of, 88

Edu Faro, 79, 84, Pl. 35, fig. 2
Corals on flats of, 84
Gap separating islands of, 84
Ekasdu, 88, Pl. 42, fig. 2
Central lagoon of, 88
Ekuru Faro, 56
Elicalpeni Bank, 5
Embudu, 62, Pls. 26, 27
Cuttle-fish bones and Spirula on beach of, 63
Height of beaches of, 63
Pumice on beaches of, 63
Ereadn, 88, Pl. 43
Dimension of, 88
Early stage of closure of lagoon in, 88

Etingili, 71

Fadiffolu, 73, Pls. 1, 3; 84a, fig. 4; 82, fig. 10; 8c, fig.
28; 33, fig. 2; 34, fig. 1
Absence of rings in, 76
Compared to other Maldive atolls, 75
Corals on western horn of, 76
Dimensions of, 74
Exposure of, to monsoons, 77 «
Lagoon reefs of, 74

Fadiffolu — Continued
Resemblance of, to Pacific atolls, 74
Southeastern reef flat, 76
Southwest face of, 75
Trend of coasts, 76
Velus of, 74
Western horn of, 75

Fahala, 122
Coalescence of islands at, 122

Faidu, 76, 91

Farna, 109; Pls. 59; 78, fig. 1

Faro Doru, 72

Faros of North Male, 36, 38
Bottom deposits of, 152
Coalescence of adjoining, 39
Depth of lagoon of, 40
Origin of large, 40
Rims of, 39
Temperature of lagoon of, 150

Farukolu, 89

Feartu, 101, Pl. 61, fig. 1

Fehendu, 54, Pl. 19, fig. 2

Felidu Atoll, 114, Pls. 1, 4, 5; 88, figs. 15, 16
Bank of angular boulders in lagoon of, 116
Closed periphery of, 117
Corals on reef flats of, 117
Faros on outer faces of, 115
Trregular outline of, 114
Islands of, 117
Lagoon cusps of, 115
Narrow passes into, 115
Passes of east face of, 117
Temperature of lagoon of, 150

Femfuri Faro, 57, 66

Fengbu Hurah, 72

Filadu, 80, 98, Pl. 50, fig. 1
Connecting ridge of, 98
Lagoon reef of, 98
Secondary lagoon of, 98

Fiori, 138

Fivaku, 91

Flying fish, track of, 157

Fua Mulaku, 145

Funadu (Haddummati), 129

Funadu (Suvadiva), 141

Furadu, 107, Pl. 58, fig. 1

Furena, 37

Furnadu, 89, Pl. 44, fig. 1
Small lagoon of, 89

Furudu, 54
Wasting of, 55

Furuwari, 66

Fusmundu, 68

Gadu (Haddummati), 129
Gadu (Suvadiva), 189

INDEX. 163

Gafuri, 99
Gaha Faro, 53, Pls. 1, 3; 8a, figs. 6, 8; 8b, fig. 11
An atoll like Pacific atolls, 53
Free circulation of sea over reef flats, 53
Galandu, 102
Gallandu Channel, 34, 100
Gan (Suvadiva), 139
Gan (Addu), 147, Pls. 76; 77, fig. 1
Gang, 130
Gardiner, J. Stanley,
On beach sandstone, 106
On bottom in Maldive atolls, 50
On changes at Fadiffolu, 73
On changes at Haddummati, 127
On changes at northeast horn of Addu, 147
On changes at Suvadiva, 144
On changes at Turadu, 62
On changes in Kolumadulu, 122
On changes in North and South Nilandu, 108
On changes in South Nilandu, 110
On changes of faros in Ari, 105
On comparison of Moresby’s Chart of North
Malosmadulu with his sketches, 67
On depth of Suvadiva lagoon, 143
On elevated reef rock of South Malosmadulu, 61
On enlargement of velus, 67
On estimate of land and water area of Addu,
148
On Farukolu and Furnadu, 89
On fissure zone in Maldives, 88
On growth of corals at Addu, 148
On growth of individual banks, 67
On Hainbuddu, 87
On islands off Gan, Addu, 147
On Kolumadulu as a typical atoll, 184
On Moresby’s Charts, 35
On oceanic condition of Goifurfehendu, 54
On small importance of monsoons on edge of
reef, 82
On solution in lagoon of Addu, 148
On soundings in Addu, 148
On soundings across Ariyaddu Channel, 27
On soundings across Wadu Channel, 27
On soundings in central basin, 27
On soundings in channels of Maldives, 26
On soundings in North Male, 36
On soundings in Suvadiva, 143
On the filling of Addu, 148
On topography of central plateau, 10
On varying depths of banks of Maldives, 134
On western face of Suvadiva, 143
Globigerina sand, 14
Goadu, 92
Goidu, 54, Pl. 20
Goifurfehendu, 54, Pls. 1,3; 8a, fig. 8; 88, fig. 10;
19, fig. 2; 20

Goifurfehendu— Continued
Depth of lagoon of, 54
Exposed to northeast monsoon, 54
Former connection of Fehendu, 54
Furudu on rim fiat of, 55
Islands on, 54
Gumati, 101, Pl. 54, fig. 1
Closing of gap of, 101
Guradu (South Nilandu), 114
Guradu (Kolumadulu), 125
Guru, 114
Deep faro north of, 114

Haapai group reefs, 2
Haddummaiti, 127, Pls.1,6; 8c, figs. 20, 22; 67-70;
ti tiga.

Bays enclosing part of lagoon of, 131
Belongs to Pacific atoll type, 128
Bottom deposits of, 153
Clear of islands, 128
Corals on lagoon slopes of, 129
Depth of, 128
Effect of monsoons on outer faces of, 130
Formation of lagoons of, 133
Islands on west face of, 128
Large triangular northeast horn of, 132
Narrow boulder belt of, 180
Narrow gap at Gang in, 131
Reef flats of, 138
Temperature of lagoon of, 150
Vegetation of, 129

Hainbuddu, 87

Hanikandu Faro, 64

Hanimadu, 96
Connecting ridge of islands of, 97
Narrow atoll of, 97

Hanlus, 141
Vegetation of, 141

Haru Hura, 114
Islands on flat of, 114

Hatedu, 136

Hauwandu, PI. 54, fig. 1.

Havaru, 138

Hekara, 109, Pl. 60, fig. 1
Boulders at, 109

Hembadu, 48

Hibadu, Pl. 74, fig. 2

Hirilandu, 126

Hitadu (Addu), 146

Hitadu (South Malos), 61

Hitadu (Haddummati), 128, 129

Hitty, 48, Pl. 17, fig. 2

Hoholundu, 68

Hondedu, 138

Hoskyn, Commander, 1

Huludali, 111

164 INDEX.

Huludu (Addu), 146

Huludu (Miladummadulu), 84
Hulule, 37, Pls. 10, 11
Huluwa, Pl. 62, fig. 1
Huluwarolu, 137

Huni Faro, 60

Huradu, 136

Hura Mula, 186

Hurudu, 57

Hute Kolu, 114

Hydrography of the Maldives, 1, Pls. 1-8c¢

Thavandiffulu Atoll, 100, Pls. 1,2; 8a, figs. 1, 3;
54, 66, fig. 1
Irregular shape of, 100
Thavandu, 101
Imma, 37
Inamadu, 70
Inawari, 73
Isdu, 132, Pl. 69, fig. 2; 70

Jeweller’s Islands, 111, Pl. 78, fig. 2

Kabafaro, 90
Kadu, 130
Kagi, 51
Meagre vegetation of, 51
Kakuni, Pl. 68
Kalpeni, 6
Kandimas, 112, Pls. 62, fig. 2; 63, 64, fig. 2
Kandudu (Kolumadulu), 126
Kandudu (Suvadiva), 138
Kandufuri, 126
Kandu Huludu, 187, Pl. 74, fig. 1
Kandute, 92
Exposed to southwest monsoon, 93
Kanifuri, 75
Corals off, 76
Exposure of, to southwest monsoon, 76
Karaidu, 132, Pls. 69, fig. 1; 77, fig. 1
Karawatti, 5
Karema, 83
Wasting of, 84
Corals on rim flats of, 84
Kari Faro, 65, Pl. 29, fig. 1
Karidu (Middle Malos), 64
Karidu, 55, Pl. 21
Compared to Maldivian atolls, 59
Compared to Pacific atolls, 59
Faro is an atoll, 58
Forest trees in centre of island of, 55
Lagoon of, partly filled, 56
Opening into lagoon of, 56
Wasting of island of, 56
Keadu, 116

Kelai, 79, 80, Pl. 50, fig. 2
Entranze to lagoon of, 98
Kendikolu, 79, 86
Mangroves at, 86
Sink of, 86
Kendu, 57, 64, Pl. 29, fig. 2
Kiadu, 64
Kiadufuri, 64
Kiltan, 5
Kimbudu, 126
Kofenbe, 91
Kolufuri, 121 x
Kolumadulu, 122, Pls. 1,5; 88, figs.17, 18; 8c, fig.
20; 66
Bottom deposits of, 153
Depth of, 122
Consolidation of islands at, 123
Interior basin of, shut off from sea, 124
Line of angular boulders on east face of, 123
Position of islands in lagoon of, 122
Structure of outer faces of, 125
Temperature of lagoon of, 150
Vegetation on sea face of, 125
Komandu, 86, Pl. 36, fig. 2
Wasting of, 87
Konipafuri, 112
Kotafuri, 69
Wasting of, 70
Kuda Kura, 70
Kuda Mandu, 87, Pl. 40, fig. 2
Kudahitty, 47, Pl. 17, fig. 1.
Kudu, 142
Kukuludi Faro, 67
Gardiner on changes at, 67
Kuludu Faro, 89, Pls. 37, 38; 79, fig. 3
Kumberidu, 95, Pl. 48, fig. 2
Kunahandu, 120
Kumfinadu, Pl. 3
Kurada, 144
Kurafuri, 104
Kuraidu, 91
Kurangdu, 74
Kuredu, 76
Kureli, 120, Pl. 65
Boulders on west face of, 120
Kurimbe, 95
High beaches of, 95

Labadu, 141

Laceadive Archipelago, 5, Pl. 8

Laccadives, Plateau of the, 7
Soundings among the, 6
Survey of the, 1

Lofara, 85

Lohi, 74
Wasting of, 74

INDEX. 165

Lowalafuri, 74, Pl. 34, fig. 1
Encroachment of shingle on beaches of, 74

Mabadu, 132
Mabaru, 60, Pl. 22, fig. 2
Madali, 111
Maddedu, 85, Pl. 36, fig. 1
Madidu, 91
Madu, PL 3
Maduni Faro, 56, 67
Maduwari, 61, Pl. 25
Ma Faro (Miladummadulu), 79, 86
Ma Faro (Malosmadulu), 56, 66
Gardiner on velu of, 67
Mafilefuri, 75
Mafuri (South Male), 114, Pl. 79, fig. 2
Mafuri (Suvadiva), 135, Pls. 71, 72; 79, fig. 1
Magudu, 107
Mahafai, 95, Pls. 48, fig. 1; 49, fig. 2
Maimbudu, 112
Makandudu, 89
Sink of, 89
Makara, 70
Makunudu, 71, Pls. 1, 2; 8a, fig. 7; 31, fig. 2; 382;
38, fig. 1
Boulder wall of, 73
Depth of lagoon of, 72
Dry reef of, 72
Elevation of, 72
Makunudu Island, 72
Maldive Islands,
Absence of elevation in, 124
Bottom deposits of lagoons in the, 152
Character of atolls of the, 120, 124
Changes in the, going south, 120
Contrast of outer rims of the, to Pacific atoll
rims, 142
Description of atolls in the, 35
Depth of channels between eastern and western
chain of the, 3
Dip of plateau of the, 3
Distance from Ceylon, 2
Double chain of the, 3
Limits of monsoons in the, 8
Pelagic fauna of the, 153
Plateau of the, 9
Single line of the, 3
Male Faro (South Nilandu), 112
Male Island, 41
Malosmadulu Plateau, 56, Pls. 1, 3; 8a, fig. 5; 8b,
figs. 9, 10; 8c, fig. 28; 22-80; 31, fig. 1
Comparison of, with Goifurfehendu, 57
Deepest sounding in lagoon of, 57
Deep passes on east face of, 56
Faros in basin of, 57
Faros of, compared to atolls, 58

Malosmadulu Plateau — Continued
Faros with wide reef flats on, 56
Formation of islands on, 57
Position of faros and islands on, 56
Resemblance of, to Ari, 56

Mamanaga Faro, 66, Pl. 30, fig. 1

Mameta, 143

Mamigeli, 104, 105, Pls. 55, fig. 2; 56

Manafur, 101

Mandu (Ari), 106

Mandu (Haddummati), 132

Manganese nodules, 24

Marandu, 100

Mararrekellu, 57, 65

Maregiri, 66, Pls. 30, fig. 2; 31, fig. 1
Dunes of, 67

Maro, 74

Matiwari, 105

Matoda, 138

Mavaidu, 91

Mavaru, 128, Pl. 67

Mavila, 85

Mawa Faro, 56

Mawafuri, 109, Pl. 61, fig. 2

Medu, 57, 69
Vegetation of, 69
Height of beaches of, 69

Megeli, 63
Island not on chart of, 635

Middle Malosmadulu, 64, Pls. 1, 3; 84, figs. 9, 10;

29, fig. 1
Changes in islands of, 65
Islands of, dished, 65
Midu, 146
Miladummadulu, 83, Pls. 1, 2,3; 84, figs. 4, 5,7;
34, fig. 2; 35-44; 79, fig. 3
Bottom deposits of, 153
Central gap of, 91
Crescentic islands on east face of, 86
Exposed to southwest monsoon, 84
Formation of atolls from crescentic islands in, 87
Inner line of island near east face of, 90
Islands on east face of, steep to, 88
Islands with high beaches in, 85

Milandu, 89
Wasting of, 89
Dumb-bell shape of, 90

Miledu, 100, Pl. 52, fig. 2

Minikoi, 7

Mirufuri, 35

Moresby, Commander, Survey of Maldives,1

Muadu, 94
Spits off east end of, 94

Muduwari (South Malos), 64, Pl. 28, fig. 2

Muduwari (North Malos), 68

Muheri, 95

166 INDEX.

Muladu, 101, Pl. 54, fig. 1
Mulaku, 118, Pls. 1, 5; 84, figs. 13, 15, 18; 64, fig.
1; 65
Absence of islands on west face of, 121
Bottom deposits of, 153
Corals on inner flats of, 121
Depth of lagoon of, 118
Faros and rings in lagoon of, 119, 120
Faros in outer faces of, 119
Reef flats on east face of, 119
Resemblance of, to Pacific atolls, 119
Similar to atolls of single line, 119
Transverse dikes of boulders at, 120
Munafuri, 128
Muradu (West Tiladummati), 82, 93, Pls. 45; 46,
fig. 1
Change in islands of, 93
No pass into lagoon of, 94
Muradu (Northeast Tiladummati), 95, Pl. 48, fig. 1
Murdu, 102
Murray, Sir John,
Bottom deposits of the Maldives, 152
Mutalifoori, 63, Pl. 24, fig. 1

Nadale, 138
Nalandu, 90, Pl. 44, fig. 2
Sink of, bare at low water, 90
Lagoon and sink of, conected, 90
Naguri, 94, Pls. 46, fig. 2; 47
Peculiar shape of, 94
Naraka, 126, Pl. 66
Nipafura, Pl. 60, fig. 2
Noliwang Faro, 83, 96
Nomuka group reefs, 2
North Male, 35, Pls. 1, 3,4; 8a, fig. 6; 8d, figs. 11,
19; 8c, fig. 24; 9-18; 19, fig. 1
Absence of vegetation on west face of, 52
Bottom deposits of, 152
Bottom of lagoon of, 48, 49
Central sink of islands in lagoon of, 44
Corals on faros of, 46
Corals on slopes of island in lagoon of, 44
Depth of lagoon of, 43
Open northern extremity of, 51
Passage of rings to islands in, 47
Passes into, 49
Purity of water of lagoon of, 44
Rings and faros of, 42, 45, 46
Soundings in, 49
Temperature of lagoon of, 150
Vegetation of islands of lagoon of, 44
Wooded islands in, 41
North Malosmadulu, 65, Pls. 1, 3; 84a, fig. 5; 86,
fig. 9; 8c, fig. 26; 30; 31, fig. 1
Bottom deposits of, 152
Depth of, 71
Dunes at, 67

North Malosmadulu — Continued
East face of, 69
Enlargement of velus of, 67
“Jungle of reefs”’ in, 67, 68
Large islands on east face of, 65
Open at northern extremity, 65
Sand encroaching on vegetation of, 67
Southwest part of, clear, 66
Temperature of lagoon of, 151
Vegetation of east face of, 71
Vegetation of islands of, 68
Wide passes into, 66
North Nilandu, 107, Pls. 1, 4,5; 86, fig. 14; 59-61;
78, fig. 1
Banks with velus in, 108
Channel between South and, 108
Cusps on west face of, 108
East face of, 108
Elevation of parts of outer rim of, 109
Islands in interior of, 107
Rim of, 107
Well-defined reef platforms of, 110
Nu, 91
Numara, 91
Nuriwari, 96

Olugeri, 61

Pelagic Fauna of the Maldives, 155
Peremul Par, 5
Phares, 129
Piti Bank, 5
Powell Islands, 58, 71
Isolated atolls of, 58
Powell, Lieutenant, survey of Maldives, 1
Prentice, Lieutenant, on disappearance of an island
in the Maldives, 84
Pteropod ooze, 24

Rakidu, 115

Narrow lagoon along, 116
Rasdu, 102, Pls. 1, 4

Depths of atoll of, 102
Rasmadu, 70
Roongelly, 69

Sesostris Bank, 5, Pl. 8
Soundings taken by the ‘‘Amra,” 12, 29, Pls. 1-8c
Across Ariyaddu Channel, 21, 30, Pl. 88, fig. 14
Across Central Basin of the Maldives, 13, 19,
80, 38, Pls. 8a, fig. 5; 80, figs. 12,13; 8c,
28
Across Equatorial Channel, 25, 31, Pl. 8c, fig. 23
Across Gallandu Channel, 12, 34, Pl. 8a, fig. 3
Across Fadiffolu to Miladummadulu, 16, 34,
Pl. 8a, fig. 4
Across Fulidu Channel, 20, 32, Pl. 84, fig. 16

INDEX. 16

=

Soundings taken by the ‘‘Amra” — Continued South Nilandu — Continued

Across Goifurfehendu to South Malosmadulu,
15, 33, Pl. 84, fig. 10

Across Kardiva Channel, 16, 33, Pl. 8 6, fig. 11

Across Malosmadulu Channels, 15, Pl. 84, figs.

Formation of islets in, 113

Formation of lagoon on southeast face of, 111
Jewellers Islands in, 111

Nullipores at, 113

9,10 Outliers of coral reef rock in, 112
Across North Male to Gaha Faro, 17, 32, Pl. Passes separating outer faros of, 112
8a, fig. 6 Suheli Par, 5, Pl. 8
Across One and half degree Channel, 24, 31, Pl. Surveys of the Maldives, 1
8c, fig. 22 Suvadiva, 134, Pls. 1,6; 8c, figs. 22, 28; 71-75;

Across Veimandu Channel, 28, 31, Pl. 8c, fig. 20

Across Wadu Channel, 18, 29, Pl. 8 4, fig. 19

Between Kolumadulu and South Nilandu, 22,
82, Pl. 8 d, fig. 17

Between Miladummadulu and Makunudu, 12,
34, Pl. 8a, fig. 7

Between Miladummadulu and North Malosma-
dulu, 18, 34, Pl. 8a, fig. 5

Between Mulaku and Kolumadulu, 22, 30, Pl.
8 4, fig. 18

Between Rasdu and Ari, 102, Pl. 4

Between South Male and Ari, 29

Between Toddu and Rasdu, 102, Pl. 4

East of Kelai, 12, Pl. 8a, fig. 2

East of South Male, 18, Pl. 8c, fig. 27

From Gaha Faro to Goifurfehendu, 14, 33, Pl.
8a, fig. 8

From Mulaku to Wataru and Felidu, 21, 32, Pl.
8}, fig. 15

From Murdu to Colombo, 26, 34, Pl. 1

From North to South Nilandu, 22

Off oceanic faces of the Maldives, 12, 20, 29, 30,
32, 34, Pl. 8c, figs. 21-27

Off Ihavandiffulu, 12, Pl. 8a, fig. 1

79, fig. 1
An open oceanic atoll, 143
Bottom deposits of, 153
Boulders on flats of, 139
Climate of, 136
Comparison of, with Pacific atolls, 135
Corals in passes of, 141
Corals on lagoon slopes of, 135
Depth of, 188
Extent of land rim of, 140
Formation of bays in, 137
Faros on parts of outer faces of, 1384
Gaps between islands of, 139
Great size of, 134
Islands and banks in lagoon of, 135
Narrow reef flats of, 135
Reef flat of northeast horn of, 142
Resemblance of, to Marshall atolls, 135
Shallow passes into, 138
Temperature of lagoon of, 151
Vegetation of, 141
Width of passes of, 140

Tahwahtah, 69
South of Addu, 25, 31, Pl. 8¢, fig. 21 Telin Faro, 67
West of North Male, 17, Pl. 8c, fig. 24 Temperature of the lagoons, 149
South Male, 113, Pls. 1, 4; 88, figs. 12, 16; 8c, figs. In Addu, 150
19, 27; 79, fig. 2 In Ari, 149
Deep lagoon on east face of, 114 In Fadiffolu, 150
Dimensions of, 113 In Felidu, 150
Similarity to North Male, 113 In Haddummati, 150 .
South Malosmadulu, 59, Pls. 1, 3; 88, fig. 10; 8c, In Kolumadulu, 150
fig. 28 ; 22-28; 29, fig. 2 In Mulaku, 149
Bottom deposits of, 152 In North Male, 150
Changes in southeastern horn of, 61 In North Malosmadulu, 151

Corals on rim flats and lagoon slopes at, 63
Exposure of, to northeast monsoon, 60
Sink in islands of, 63, 64

Size of islands of, 60

Slope of east face of, 60

Temperature of lagoon of, 151

In South Malosmadulu, 151
In Suvadiva, 150
In Tiladummati, 151

Tiladummati, 93, Pls. 1,2; 84, figs. 2,3; 45-53

Artificial boundary of, 93
Atolls of northeast horn of, 98

Vegetation of islands of, 60
Wide passes of southeast face of, 60
South Nilandu, 110, Pls. 1,5; 88, figs. 13,17; 62-
64, fig. 2; 78, fig. 2
Distribution of banks and faros in, 110

Bottom deposits of, 153

Changes in outline of islands of, 93
Coalescence of islands of, 98
Crescent-shaped islands of, 98

Effect of moonlight on reef flats of, 97

168 INDEX.

Tiladummati — Continued
Faros of east and west face of, 96
Islands characteristic of inner waters of, 95
Islands of northern part of, closely packed, 97
Pandanus on northern islands of, 95
Temperature of lagoon of, 151
Tiladummati-Miladummadulu Plateau, 78, Pls. 1,
2,3; 8a, figs. 2-5,7; 94, fig. 2; 35-53; 79,
fig. 3
Atolls and faros of, based on separate knoils, 82
Atolls and faros of, not formed by subsidence, 80
Atolls of, become islands, 80
Atolls of northeast horn of, 79
Boundary line between, 78
Change in outlines of islands of, 82
Compared to southern groups, 78
Condition of, not that of an atoll, 82
Crescent-shaped islands of east face of, 79
Current sweeping into, 82
Faros passing to islands in, 80
Formation of faros of, 80
Formation of separate islands of, 83
Great width of passages of, 81
Islands of interior of, 80,
Junction of separate islands of, 83
Motion of islands like that of dunes in, 83
Modifying effect of monsoons on, 82
Open interior waters of, 81
Position of islands on, 78
Shape of, 78
Small land area of, 81
Subsidence does not account for formation of
atolls of, 81
West face of, 80
Timarafuri, 124
Tinadu (Felidu), 117
Tinadu (Suvadiva), 144
Toddu, 102, Pls. 1, 4
Tolandu, 85
Topography of Indian Ocean, 5, Pls. 7, 8
Tukandu, 100, Pl. 53
Boulders of, 100

Tulagiri, 47, Pl. 16, fig. 2
Tulusdu, 36
Tura, 66
Turadu, 61

Gardiner on changes at, 62
Tuvaru, 121

Uleguma, 101

Vaimandu, 126

“Valdivia” Soundings south of Addu, 6
Vehamafuri, 47

Veimandu Channel, 28, 31, Pl. 8c, fig. 20
Velengeli, 62, 66

Wadu (North Malos), 57

Wadu (Suvadiva), 189

Waduni, 132

Wagaru, 101

Wakaru, 63
Height of beaches of, 63

Wandu, 70

Wandu Faro, 60

Wani, 112

Warifuri, 79, 80, 99, Pl. 51, fig. 2
Depth of lagoon of, 99
Islands of, 99

Wataru, 84, Pl. 35, fig. 1

Wataru Reef, 118, Pls. 1, 5; 8}, fig 15; 58, fig. 1
Tslets on rim flat of, 118
Narrow entrance into, 118
Reef flats of, awash, 118

Wataru Channel, 21, 32, 118, Pl. 84, fig. 15

Watu, 85

Wegeli, 141

Welingandu, 126

Wilingili (North Male), 35, 50

Wiringili (Addu), 146

Wiringili (Suvadiva), 142, Pl. 77, fig. 2
Elevated reef rock at, 162

Yucatan plateau, reefs of, 1

Memoirs of the Museum of Comparative <oology
AT HARVARD COLLEGE.

Weis SOMIDS

THE CORAL REEFS OF THE MALDIVES.

By ALEXANDER AGASSIZ.

WITH EIGHTY-TWO PLATES.

PLATES.

CAMBRIDGE, U.S.A.:

Printed for the Museum.
DECEMBER, 1903.

mvenHt sit To extomsl&

TH

Puate 1.

PuatTeE 1.

Chart of the Maldive Archipelago, showing the track of the “Amra” and the soundings,
taken by her.
Reduced from Admiralty Charts, 66a, 666, 66¢; Sheets 1-3; Scale, 3.5’ = sixty miles

NORTHERN PART OF MALDIVES SOUTHERN MALDIVES

| ‘ _ —AGASSIZ— PLATE |.

THAVANDIFFULU

We »

DNE anp HALF DEGREE) CHANNEL

MILADUMMADULU Mafuri ~ - Mametu

iS -
apt “3 * yl? wy
f) du ~@ Niland.
5 ae or. Hal ean
~ 50 “+ * “Sg
P & e Weg el
res 4 ° e € Funada
. bd , a Ae are
‘ Hanins'( yo y
otis * anf a ie SW Diaddu
* B\Mawarw

NORTH
MALOSMADULU ©

iy
Nandu Huluda

uluwarola |

po ee a Sa te = oe

EQUATORIAL | VKHANNEL

1262

| |
|

1282 |

& FUA MULAKU

SOUTH
MALOSMADULU

From Sheet Not Admiraliy Chart G6 ©

73°

5

NORTHERN PART OF MALDIVES

To Colombo 4185 miles

— AGASSIZ ——
SOUTHERN MALDIVES

MAI

Toddu *

THAVANDIFFULU

“ A Kiolad
i 3 Piladu

» eis
Z Hanimadu
Pa

a AB Roliwang Furo

”
se Nuriwari

ae es

Kunb@’'$) TILADUMMATI

a»

“a4

* Maraidu

ra
NORTH Zo,
MALOSMADULU @ *
: ‘

ii Makara

pian oy ™*S
we eee

¢ a eae

Mareg tte sts. i Sethi
Ain Jeifindu

Kurnidl Faro , ita
id wen Oe? a
Mani 5.

oPadu

MIDDLE

Mamanga Karo f '
. MALOS

Mabaru

SOUTH
MALOSMADULU /

a Vida

Taradu

8 Wadunare\
%

am \ »)

\ \

cai,

Merete +8

Inaturé

__ Brom Sheet Not Admiralty Chart 66

RASDU

=
@?:

0.0 gr 0!

Lo
2

Pe

- ,
aL
4 n Me ion * Numart
o~ la a
B. : 18 2 Mandu “ mite BP
. 20 :
f > re © Finku a vos # FD wy
, : 256 <<< .
? Billifuri A. * $ Nalandu |
. 0 Mialandu
. \ =
ie Y y y ae
£ 2 ,. MILADUMMADULI
cs ; 9 \)
* \W Furnadu
= )
} No b Brecactir
» 9 26 yp Ekasdu
e /
S 4:
“2 Darvas Sy Bodunandu | aS
a Oe Fomasida ; =) \Firna
ot Ne Mislauclie = i Hekar:
Eee Neat ; ‘ Hekara
i) Karo w4
g Madeli. 4 35% NORTH wo yep {Mart
= ” is L
~ Mawaturt

NILANDU

§4//4dayo

» 2 Mag udu
L Niland
piped Faro
Wataru at e
0 a@

~S| Mionipa turks
aa se

1 fetes

. SOUTH
NILANDU

KU

Welingande
KOLUMADULU

Kandudu

*”

ye]
Naridu

From Sheet 2 A.C. 66%

We —

pAHUV

Mafuri

sia
Hatu Kolu i
}

'

PULIDU 55

|

245

Peltitie’ pm
é

uN

J

a

pakidihs
WATARU |) 5 7
REEF \

PDiyagets
xe

i,
oY Caradu

_ HADDUMMATT

% pea
ejceat

Pal}
Mutale

wo
SOUTH

CHANNEL

limata

FELIDU

que

oo ae

MALE

sf,
* Wiutaku

Mavarn”

HADDUMMATE

ONB Ano HALE HANNEL

/
IO Pe

Ome

Matar’ Wee ee

&
j

; Weg elt
| is . 4 eunadn
Havaru. ite! Let Sey s it
Tina o4 £% Hantas ne
Kandud Siler cee ke 4 Al Diadldue
b
f Mawara
Mondudu Paral pate

FOUATORIAL | CLA NNEL

maa

PUA MULAKU

uae

PLATE |.

PEATE 2:

PLATE 2.

The Northern Maldives: Ihavandiffulu, Tiladummati, Makunudu, and the 1
of Miladummadulu. : ;
a4 Reduced from Sheet No. 1; Admiralty Chart, 66a; Scale, six miles to t

AGASSIZ—MALDIVES

73°E PLATE 2
IHAVANDIFFULU ATOLL

TON =

a2 Mw
Speen
at Inst ant 3

w0st

1
trood Winter
WE Tomine a

a ga 20 wm
TTowe Se GALLANDU

As
Qe

TILADUMMATI
ATOLL

Good Water 90

* is ae te a WO

a ree Bei) ee xy ato
Northam Boundary op StollMiladummadiu > ¢
Bite
i * “
z
we cvs _ 20
s ade: a Ae.
s mm a
i) 7% bong 3 : :
fee Pe eg MULADU MAMLADUTEAL
Goadus © ae. ))Numara.* co
ies. am | a ATOLL
of 2 200
a nk %
atialle Orly eas at eee S
= a bs x» we kee
A 5 ~~ ae:
aad tx) | = eee Pear
: ee
3 7 3 eae A = O35 Rivaku"*

aos n s a )) it conse frers and one hugh banvan tree

PLATE 3.

PLATE 3.

Southern part of Miladummadulu, North, Middle, and South Malosmadulu, Goifurfehendu,
Fadiffolu, Karidu, Gaha Faro, and northern extremity of North Male.
Reduced from Sheet No.1; Admiralty Chart, 66 a; Scale, six miles to the inch.

AGASSIZ—MALDIVES

PLATE 3

aye A
22 Cet hy <a

WO 28
4 Ox

Ee Ed

ean Canker
x

”

MILADUMMADULU
ATOLL

wo ay
aa ig
Denna i

%.
i

2 n
Pom fut 20 30 2 4g wd
2 =

glow Stony Inet |

p

a
fn Belg ape omen
Bee pace

yr ae So

eet 8? Lien tga
tage
NORTH

MALOSMADULU
PADIFFOLU

ee f s§ te
- a agee ANOLE
ROWE

es

MIDDLE
MALOSMADULU

U

Seber 2a on

sf,

ik a
py Sov
x Zz

a ee,
at nm 3h
ws nd
4
7

a ©

gengres geprode, oper

SO WE a
NLALOSMADULL

ATOLL

DIF UPBHENDU

During the B.E.Monsoon, litte or no Hood tke is felt,
and the veloaty of the Ebb considerably inereared, by the
sorong Gerrents. which run from that quarem, anl vice
vera during the SW Monsoon. —

The ¥.E.Monsoon prevaile from tue middle of November,
Ss to the beginning of April, with fine Weather and gern
rully moderate breezes. to the North? of Mali ; and to
the South* frequent squalls & rain, with Variable Winds.
West and South Winds prevail with fresh squalls cb rain
from May to December.

&
®

Po

Seale 6 Miles To neh.

va

Stee es

eee

oT

o

%

— eS SOK

a

38. es =
@
ec We
GAHA FARO
i canaiFara?

be Binh coona nut ies. Gourd wnina:

ORTH MALE ATOLL

Pod

of

; abs .stbytio) wabtio€l Olt sitooe be rey, :
= PrAare

=~ .

-

«tlont od? of eoliat xia yy

ah

r

i

RO PhO teal vifesi

2 ai

.

Ld

PLATE 4.

The northern part of the Central Maldives: North and South Male, Felidu, Toddu, Rasdu,
Ari, and northern part of North Nilandu.
Reduced from Sheet No. 2; Admiralty Chart, 66; Scale, six miles to the inch.

10

Bae & eB 2K

PR ak vk

475

1490

High water full and
Rise and fall 5

130
fine sand

hange
6H

t

Xil*

&.

Ba

» x

\Toddu vu

Sand and broken Shills

Prades

@ sphidudu Faro

2 I

e
2

Cv tumedu

S 700d wale
4 Re

el

xx
SS \Ghiadu

73°E

wis

ma Vessel

is?

az

mast head

id

SRASDU ATOLL

108

4°N

205

703

200
fale

720

AGASSIZ— MALDIVES

PLATE 4

166 158
fale fdas

MALE

ATOLL

100

‘ SOUTH MALE
z ui — 4°N
ao Baa ATOLL
fale
Runari ¢ :
Say REE Yo, .

Na na
ee Man Fars —
a wl

Kadibudes

eh HD:

Rag
me

ry.

m

ay _ Ai
¢ fpiiudu Faro
* yi

e
Py
ee
: ti
TBetumeta
Senter
ort
FP iw
2 > Mahiadu

4

a ARIYADDU

my

NORTH NILANDU ATOLL

SOUTH MALE

i = 4°N = ——— ——— SESE 4°n
= 38 m0
Tm
ATOLL
205 208
fale
ns
a
a
a
8 kote apa Ee
io a as are 1 x EL
FULIDU Ghee
Fe
50
PRLIDORAM@ Ts
59)
NN Av
qua®
| »
a
TI
&
2 4
“aepion ee a
Sates
me High water full and change 2" 30°

Scale GMiles To Inch
73°E

Puate 5.

PLATE 5.

Southern part of the Central Maldives: southern part of Felidu, Wataru Reef, Mulaku,
North and South Nilandu, and Kolumadulu.
Reduced from Sheet No. 2; Admiralty Chart, 660; Scale, six miles to the inch.

4

Uy

AGASSI Z—MALDIVES

PLATE 5

FELIDU ATOLL

om
20
Vigh water full and change 2*20°
8 Rise and fail 4 fest oe The passages on cach, side
om of Rakidw ars very narrow
But good und deep
F ar = = =
NORTH NILANDI
aa
ATOLL :
vii
1 i we Sand. a ™
ie ie
ry 164 278

2p, he a 288

@ 4g waturi, 2 hes 14 Low busty te

¥ aterm > 1 om Coconut crees 30 + ct

Pie WA 23 n>

Se OUDEASR TT Gun AS #
aoe 13a WS Ie
3 d im i. ORT aa
mi? 360 ae =) De
3 2, Pddago Zap basher <a
2 z * a
a
G light colored 37
> i ~ wo Clay 2 3°N
High water fall und change 3 howes so
Rise aud fall 4 fect
a
é 5 &. “- ag Konipw fiarhi
2 5 2 3
—_ @ > 3
@ 3 pant sand © a1 4 26
Ps va fois
zt
feds
204

SOUTH NILANDU it,
ATOLL

hard send

ATOLL

494
ii

%

Eee SOVUMNAL INTIL/NNIDI Uy fo
ATOLL

MULAKL
ATOLL

a

CT eet al
cs ay o
eo 0 Wor
“

0 2 23
2 sc »
-”
so a7 8
a, so

a

Scale 6 Miles To Inch.

PLATE 6.

PLATE 6.

The Southern Maldives: Haddummati, Suvadiva, and Addu.
Reduced from Sheet No. 3; Admiralty Chart, 66¢; Scale, six miles to OLS

y rer Sg a

ees

»
ay rs

AGASSIZ—MALDIVES

= 1ON So Se

SUVADIVA

ATOLL

T3°E

PLATE 6

Sep
RE RSET A Smee Boor

2040
forls

2040
ferle

73°E

73° 45E
|

ATOLL

HADDUMMATI
ATOLL

S es
| High Warer fall & Change 3” %e fy
Rise and fall 4 feet :

Scale 6 Miles To Inch.

PEATE) 7.

PLATE 7.

Chart showing the connection of the Laccadives, Maldives, and Chagos Archipelago with
the Indian Continent.
From Aduiralty Chart, 478 B.

2220 \
eri

9S
Chan,

' e
én,

AGASSIZ—MALDIVES

PLATE 7

* aio fe .

‘ éMalilor Hinge I. x

; Xi+307 Rife 3 #2.\.
if

‘Maki or Hinge I “~

cy nee) een
ty

# S.Mabi xiP30" Rye 3A
! a

oy
a

ve
:
e
5

Equator

t
‘ \ ’
1 ' u
‘ 1 i
} ' !
] 1 ;
/ } {
,
1499 !
1 1
v7 /
!
jl i or mm mn
ra a a See
eke H ‘\
-- , ‘
/ \
wy 1600 \
a. ‘
7 \ ‘
7
oe 2380 \ U
- i
a ! i}
/ /
s ul

mi 00
*37_ 9 Blenheim

TOE 80°

Puate 8.

PuLatTE 8.

Chart showing the connection of the Laccadives with the western coast of India.
Reduced from Admiralty Chart, 2737.

i
'

AGASSIZ—MALDIVES

PLATE 8

ee

il

1A BANK of MUNYAL PAR

\

PLATE 8a.

PLATE 8a.

Section across [havandiffulu.

Eastern slope off Kelai, Tiladummati.

Section across Gallandu Channel, from Ihavandiffulu to Tiladummati.
Section from (Karema) Miladummadulu to (Kudadu) Fadiffolu.

Section from (Furidu) North Malosmadulu to (Mavila) Miladummadulu.
Section across from North Male to Gaha Faro.

Section from Miladummadulu to Makunudu.

Section across Western Kardiva Channel, from Goifurfehendu to Gaha Faro.

AGASSIZ MALDIVES PL. 8#

EI =
& 3
& =
Ys cI Ss

s > > ee = » » 8 n =, ny 4 ‘a

8 s nw Ss ~ & 8 8 & NK
2 8 Sy S 6 = s a
: S 8 Sy Se es SP 8 Fer ees OS = § S 5

Sea Level
te 1S mei

|HAVANDIFFULU

gr On gre.
a =
s =
= sc
= £
= =» 8g 3 &
> Sew Level = A Nisea weve’ 2
KELAI \; 64 mm i GALLANDU
Se ; IHAVANDIFFUW\ | CANNEL tiapummati
| Se : 00.s. a
; aoe : 3 )
— 53 3
“ : s
2 Sa : EI =
Se 5 z &
ae Sad 8 Spe
| ise : : Sea Level :
| COS.
| MILADUMMADULU FADIFFOLU
s =
| z zg
Bee § 2 2 's =
ae " Sea” Level * 3

NORTH

MALOSMADULU MILADUMMADULU

: 00.s.pler,
glob.ooze.

I
$
8
pumice
Co
& ‘ *
2 *
§ 8 8 8 = 3 Ey x

S Sea Level

MAKUNUDU

MILADUMMADULU

vA
br.sh
S “ © a g
a
8 3 by 8 N N

Sea Level

GOIFURFEHEND GAHAFARO

KARDIVA CHAINN EL
H co.s.glab.s.

glob.s. s

es)
o
<2)
is)
4
4
Ay

Puate 86

Section from the northern extremity of North Malosmadulu to Middle Malos.
Section from Middle Malos to Goifurfehendu.

Section across North and South Kardiva Channel, from Gaha Faro to Fadiffolu.
Section across central basin, from (Warigeli) South Male to Ari (Kadibudu).
Section across central basin, from Mulaku to South Nilandu.

Section across Ariyaddu Channel, from Ari to North Nilandu.

Section from Mulaku to Felidu, across Wataru Reef and Channels.

Section across Fulidu Channel, from South Male to Felidu.

Section across West Kudahuvadu Channel, from North Nilandu to Kolumadulu.

Section across East Kudahuvadu Channel, from Mulaku to Kolumadulu.

Section across Wadu Channel, from Wadu Island to North Male.

AGASSIZ MALDIVES PL. 8°

NORTH MALOSMADULU

GOIFURFEHENDU

SOUTH MALOSMADULU

: 70.5. brsh
br. sh.
s u iS 2 ® ~
$ x 2 3 8 2
8 5 g 5 S 8 S 3 3 $s s g

Sea Level

KARDIVA CHANNEL SOUTH KARDIVA CHANNEL : GAHAFARO

i

pumice

Kadibudu
Warlegetli

100
177
27
208
180
100

Sea Level

B lob.s. pter.
Gglob.s.pler. I i

ser
“aL

Sea Level

<4 100

SOUTH ; MULAKU
NILANDU E : ; =
ler. qlob.s : :
PERG: glob. s.pler % Gglob.s.pler pter. glob.s.
3 g 3 N S 8 § 8 8 5 N es
iS > y is $ S x 3g $ iS NI 8 z
NS = S § ! z: Bae on 2 2 > ’

NORTH FELIDU\

ARI NILANDU WATARU REEF MULAKU 7
it - : WS
brsh.
nh co.s.br. sh.
3 <
> 9 Le * ©
lees ; Sane Sait : Sent
Sea Level Sea Level 2.

SOUTH
NILANDU

iKUDAHUVA! CHANNEL 4x0 LUMADULU SOUTH FELIDU

MALE

FULIDO ‘CHANNEL

Cue 7 J6 :
1
= 0 cy 9 S 8 5 ©
5 % e a < oT 8 3
Sea Level Sea Level

' wa'p @ ;

d ; : WADU
MULAK scsi i ES co ;
. KiUDAHUVADU:i CHANNEL ar eA YEL f-S0-MALE
, | hra. br. sh.

If

hrd.

gre cae
“eh cunt | <a

. ne 4

1 2aViQJaM sizzaan —

8
“
“

> USUGAMEOJAM HTABOM
g 3 o 5 ri g
. g 3 2, R ” g ” * es ra
e e * ” Saar Sah * - . g
2 i i ae USUGAMZOUAM HTUOe Ne .
NAY :
hand
Pa < $ s e 2 4
a & 2) : 2 a = Youek 5d id 5
\ PISWMAHD AVIGSTAN BTVOR ‘ugiaAN\ | AMMAN = AYIQSAM BTHON
NO as Piste 4 iy,

AQ

AAMLIGR GUTE
R
7m
4
&
x
2
2
B
2
fou
£.
eS
s
E
=
is
=
:

zs . - a
*youaxte (aqrfarfebendu, 2

Q #h Kardiva Channel, from: Gab
Digeiny,

Warigeli) South Male to Ari (Kadibudu).

Melaka to South Nilandu.

e ia
2 2 g 3 - gy; $
7 % Yaush wets # Svewe Ari to North Nilandu.

UAAIUM

2SOTaNG Aaig, 2 Aody STEN open
: QW — ee
~s - fae & Pelida.
3 g 3 © g $ g
% E F Ssaod Post i a a5 *
= : - -- EE
im” X A339 URATAW UGIs34 : VAVVAMD | UOGATUARK
a =F jane to, i
Meee
&
EY
g A at £. a rR o
o-oaie e g g g 2
Asus 9st 4 & 2 Lean” aot * § id
WAUATVUBKAGH HTUOe
i H UGMAIIN
WN
a Soe 2 i
Yoel net i Jewed 952

SET

ASIWARWO: UJUGAMUIJON

Qh = ew

Ay

AAXVVAMWO | VOAV UMAR
Mand “Yt H

as ai

r

= 7

sBenurhbeH of winhaapiodt
U : PLATE
Cee

(utieM) wfobamanich

gee

cy
ie

Be.

het HT
pissy Fl
feai
SUITE
rr! rh

PLATE 8e.

. Section across Veimandu Channel from Kolumadulu to Haddummati.

. Southeastern slope of Addu.

. Section across the One and half degree Channel, from Haddummati to Suvadiva.
. Section across the Equatorial Channel from Suvadiva to Addu.

. Slope west of North Male.

. Slope west of Ari.

. Slope west of North Malosmadulu.

(7. Slope east of South Male from Guru Pass.

. Section from Fadiffolu (Kanifuri) to South Malosmadulu (Mabaru).

AGASSIZ MALDIVES PL. 8°

=
=
: - Sea Levelt . R :
i S " 5
Sea Level x
VEIMANDU CHANNEL HADDUMMATI i
copter.
s
8
Level =
i ;
1 i A BUAS i : ADDU
HOTA RoR TaD: MOEA GED Ae INUSN wari)
glob. H g ‘ qloh-s.
PLAT globooze. Glob. o0ze.
& he s
s Level S :
AND HALF EGREE CHA NN EL i SUVADIVA
22 y
: : brsh.
mang not. F aS glob. s. g
Ly}
= & S 8 B
é 5 5 Sea 3 Level 5

Sea Level

SLOPE WEST OF ARI

25
NORTH MALOS
00.S.
SLOPE W.OF
NORTH MALOS
® S
q q
Sea Level = a

26

glob. ooze.

ao

S
Sea Level

FADIFFOLU

glob.s pler

8 19 2aViQsAM SI22AaA

a §
ITAMMUGGAH, | ARV
2 doly
g é
re +d Jorn
en ae e e = k
:
: : sau i :
i &2MUM A HO fonasuw, tk t OT AO g & i
; Shee Piare 8c. :
2.doly ra

Ni Section across Velmanaa mont gp omadulu te Haddummati.

2
2
: 2 3
: MN? Southeestern slope of Adde snc 3
29! Section across the One and hglf degree Channel, from Hadddmmati to Suvadiva. |
12 i TAYVMAHD AGABVAC WAAH AWA; t ,9
53: Section across the Eq vatorial: Channel from Suvadiva to u.
ee a
and 24. Slope west of North Male.
e ene, a Anon qQuenan
= 26, Slope west of Art. ct
3 3 : ¢ +

Ssvsk set.
biepe capt ¢ f South Male from 5 Gene Pages™

cea

wotion fo im Fadiffola (Kanituri to South Malogmadula (Mabaru).

IFA 30 Tesw a9g0se

20jiAM HTAOK

en
30.w 39012
2034M HTAOH

“anoo.doly.

WIOTIGAF

© -
eI

a

=
Au

PLATE 9.

1. Southeast pass leading into North Male; seen from the south.

2. Island in the southeast pass of North Male.
1, 2, W. McM. Woodworth, Phot.

*“NOLSOB *'O9 3dALOIN3H

‘O ALVIg

*SOAIP[VIA—‘ZIssesy

Puate 10.

i

PuatTE 10.

1. North end of Hulule; North Male.

2. Lagoon of faro north of Hulule.
1, 2, Maximilian Agassiz, Phot.

NOLSOB ‘09 3dALOINSH

‘Ol ALVIg *SOAIP[BIN—“‘zIssvey

‘a>

le
|
i

/

Puate 11.

1. North end of lagoon, north of Hulule. Farukolu Island on the east face; North Male.
M. A., Phot.

2. North horn of lagoon north of Hulule. Farukolu Island on east face. W., Phot.

na

“NOLSOB ‘*09 3dALOINSH

een Aran ae

CRESS ISSN Lae came? a ATA ee ecya shen iene

EE ESR CE IAEA NE MRA EINE Ae Cg OS seu emery

Il ALVIG “SOAIP[UJ—‘zIsseny

b shoo lai rutivor offs nba
ATE meas iy

fet 1d tix00 ub oli 2 lo addifyinnaga

sony. WY

PuatE 12.

1. Gap between the northern islands of Imma flat; North Male. M. A., Phot.

2. Ring, seven-eighths of a mile due north of Male Island ; Vehamafuri Island on the left.
W., Phot.

2;

PLATE

Agassiz,—Maldives.

HELIOTYPE CO., BOSTON.

Puate 13.

1. Ring, one and a quarter mile N. 20° W, of Male Island. Vehamafuri in the distance.
M. A., Phot.

2. Western horn of the same ring. W., Phot.

"NOLSOB '*O9 3dALOI1SH

“€1 ALVIg “SOAIP[VIA—‘zIssesy

f
om
is
&
Pie
4
Ay

PLATE 14.

1, Western horn of ring with sand spit (Pl. 14, fig. 2). W., Phot.

2. Eastern part of ring with sand spit, five-eighths of a mile to the northwest of sand-
bank in eastern main ship channel of North Male. M. A., Phot.

Hin ea *SOALP[VINN—‘zisseay

—
7 4 r
- 7 Oo
oF
= - >) .
; ey a i
; ie _ ee ‘
<a an a ol - ® 7
i. uli
7 7
ens. |
ee ot
"
al ij
ys
i
oF Poe | 1
is z .
taliai ow! podltee yoortatieey) wol bua ot
~Puate 15, ¥ :
WF * |
40 ition Heng ols tt Ore Tinie BIO Wat tess orld co |
y dod AM al
>
hy
wy

PLATE 15.

1. Sand-bank, with scrub and low vegetation, on ring, two miles N. 40° W. of Male
Island. W., Phot.

2. Southernmost island on the east face of a small faro in the pass north of Imma; seen
from the west. M. A., Phot.

NO1S8O8 ‘09 3dALO

“SI FLVIg ‘SOAIP[VIN—‘zissvay

(ee)
a
ie
a
=
Ay

PLaTE 16.

1. Oval sand-bank, with scrub vegetation, one-half mile to the northwest of the northern
part of Hulule; seen from the south.

2. Tulagiri island, in the middle of the southern part of the lagoon of North Male; seen

from the south.
1, 2, W., Phot.

a

*NOLSOB8 ‘'09 3dA1LON3H

‘Ol ALVIG “SOAIP[VIN—‘zisseay

é
|
io]
a
a
Ay

Puate 17.
1. Kudahitty Island, with sand-bank, one and one-eighth mile in the lagoon, off the
central part of the western face of North Male; seen from the south. W., Phot.

2. Hitty Island, three-quarters of a mile north of Kudahitty ; seen from the south.
M. A., Phot.

NO1SO8 ‘°09 3dA10113H

‘Lt Fivig *‘SOAIP[VIA—‘zisseny

a
A.
i <=
Pat?

PuatTe 18. .

1. Oval, with sand-bank, to the east of Hitty Island; North Male.

2. Sand-bank, with bushes and cocoanut-trees, to the northeast of Hitty Island and to the
southeast of Hembadu.
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

"NOLSOB ‘*°09 3dAL0I13H

"OI ALVI “SOAIP[ VIN —‘zisseay
$ « IPLe LU V

PuLate 19.

PuaTEe 19.
1. Southernmost low island, with scrub vegetation, of the outer flats to the west of Hem-
badu; North Male.

2. Northern face of Fehendu; Goifurfehendu.
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

*"NOLSOB ‘'O9 3dALONISH

‘OL ALVIg *SOAIP[VIN—‘ZIssesy

a
SI
5

PLATE 20.

1. North point of Goidu; Goifurfehendu. W., Phot.

2. Southeast face of Goidu; Goifurfehendu. M. A., Phot.

c
NOLSOB ‘09 3dALONSH

‘OT ALVIG *SOAIP[ VII —‘zIssesy

PLATE 21.

1. West end of Karidu. M. A., Phot.

2. South face of main island of Karidu. W., Phot.

PLATE 21.

Maldives.

Agassiz,

BOSTON.

HELIOTYPE CO.,

a
g

PLATE 22.

1. Aidu Island, on the southeast face of South Malosmadulu; seen from the southeast.
The island on Wandu Faro seen on the right and the Island of Keahdoopur seen on
the left. W., Phot.

2. Mabaru Island, on the northeastern reef flat of South Malosmadulu; seen from the
southeast. Herundu, Tillahdu and other islands to the north seen in the back-
ground. M. A., Phot.

et

*NOLSOB8 ‘°09 3dA1L0113H

‘tt ALVId *SOAIP[VIA—‘ZIssesy

a
3
a
a

PLATE 23.

1. Pass between Duravandn and Hebaridu; southeast face of South Malosmadulu.

2. Pass between Hebaridu and Mahrus; southeast face of South Malosmadulu.
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

*NOLSOB ‘09 3dALON3H

i , TE ES IE ie aig 3
inne elena eanin een

es
—_-

8t HLVIg “SOAIP[VIN—‘zissesy

a

di¥y

PP aiaidscl to teson eel? os i10

ip hualet wo) d3iw om mbes
do sreiliza to gar

3
e
7y

PLATE 24.
1. Mutalifoori Faro, with low island covered with scrub vegetation to the north of Embudu
and outer ring of outliers of reef rock; southwest corner of South Malosmadulu.

2. Outer face of Maduwari on the southeast face of South Malosmadulu.
1, 2, W., Phot.

NOLSO8 ‘°09 3dALONSH .

‘he aALVIg “SOAIP[VIN—‘zissesy

tinhporola ie,

todd A 1

PLATE 25.

West face of Maduwari; southeast face of South Malosmadulu. M. A., Phot.

-Maldives

assiz,

Ag

rte}

N

Q
a
4

AY

PLATE 26.

Beach on the west side of Embudu ; southwest corner of South Malosmadulu.

NOLSO@ ‘OD 3dALOII3H

‘Qt ALVIdg *SOAIP[VIA—‘*ZISSt5

A geneity ~ Mallivox.

VS stg

ABT AM clu becascleM. AtwoP So spare dega devi y

9

dune $49 110 ddunkl

PLATE 27.

Beach on the east side of Embudu; southwest corner of South Malosmadulu. M. A., Phot.

09 3dALOINGH

—_—S_.-

VIN—‘zIssvay

re)
a
&
is)
A
ay

PLATE 28.

1. Kiadu Island; north face of South Malosmadulu. W., Phot.

2. Muduwari Island and sand-bank on great oval bank; central part of lagoon of South
Malosmadulu, to the east of Defili Faro. M. A., Phot.

"NOLSOB *°09 3dAL0115H

ir

"St DLvig “SOAIP[VI—‘zisstny

a
[2]
is)
=
|
Ay

PLATE 29.
1. Eastern horn of Kari Faro, with sand-bank and weathered outlier of coral rock; Middle
Malosmadulu. W., Phot.

2. Kendu and islands to the eastward on the northern face of South Malosmadulu.
; M. A., Phot.

“NOLSOB *'09 3dA10113H

a
a, a

ANT het ve

‘OT ALVIg “SOAIP[VIAN—‘zissusy

ro)
09
I
=
fs

Puate 30.
1. Islet on the eastern horn of Mamanaga Faro; southwest horn of North Malosmadulu,
Moresby Channel. W. Pigott, Phot. |

2. Western horn of Maregiri Island, west face of North Malosmadulu. W., Phot.

NOLSOB ‘OD 3dALON3H

‘of ALVIg *SDAIP[VIN—‘ZIssesy

Puate 31.

1. Eastern part of Maregiri Island; west face of North Malosmadulu.

2. Northeastern horn of Makunudu Atoll and Makunudu Island.
1, 2, M. A,, Phot.

i
SSS =

a — =

SPE a nmin 7
ae a arnenar SSeS se
ot IEE,

1€ aLvig “SOAIP[LIN—‘zisseny

ai
a)
A
a

PLATE 32.

1. Part of northeast horn of Makunudu and Boylan spit of Makunudu Island, looking to
the westward. W., Phot.

2. Northeast horn of Makunudu Atoll, looking to the westward. M. A., Phot.

NOLSOB ‘09 3dALOM3H

‘SAIP|PIN—‘zissesy

°
i]
a
<
=|
Ay

PLATE 33.
1. Looking south towards Faro Doru Island, along the east face of Makunudu, from off
the southern part of Makunudu Island.

2. Aligau Island on the southwestern horn of Fadiffolu,
1, 2, W., Phot.

“C8 FLVIg *SOAIP|VIN—‘zissusy

Puate 34.

Piate 34.
1. Northern horn of Lowalafuri Island, Lohi Island on the right, Kurangdu on the left, and
Maro and Mafilefuri in the distance; southwest face of Fadiffolu.

2. Outer, southeast face of Wataru; southern face of Miladummadulu.
1, 2, W., Phot.

"NOLSO8 ‘09 3dAL0113H

+E ALVIg *SOAIP[ VIN —‘zIssusy

Puate 35. .

mn

Puate 35.
1. Wataru, seen from the southwest, entering Miladummadulu; Edu Faro in the distance.
W., Phot.

2. Edu Faro, seen from the west, over the lagoon rim, opposite the central gap.
M. A., Phot.

c
“NOLSOS ‘09 3dA1L0173H

“SE HLVIg *SOAIP|PIN—‘zissesy

Puate 36.

PLATE 36.

1. Maddedu seen from the southwest, looking into the crescent of the island; central part
of Southern Miladummadulu.

2. Komandu Island, seen from the east, on the east face of the southern part of Mila-

dummadulu,
1, 2, W., Phot.

‘Qf ALVIG “SOAIP[VIA—‘zIssusy

odd #0 dat iaaW
mice Lilt

PuLatTe 37.

West face of the northern part of Kuludu Island; eastern face of the southern part of
Miladummadulu. M. A., Phot.

“ZISSUS YY
"So ATP[ Pe JAy—
“LE atvig

0
o
Q
a
3
a4

PuatEe 38.

Eastern side of the lagoon, northern sink of Kuludu; eastern face of Miladummadulu.
M. A., Phot.

"gt ALVIg ‘sa

(>)
AS)

<3)

a

=

=|

Ay .

PuLaTE 39.

1. Part of south face of Breyfasdu Island; east face of Miladummadulu.

2, Bomasdu, seen from the south, looking over the lagoon into the crescent of the island;

east face of Miladummadulu.
1,2, W., Phot.

39-

PLATE

Agassiz,—Maldives.

PLate 40.

PLATE 40.

1. Looking into the lagoon of Bodu Mandu from the southeast; east face of Miladum-
madulu. Saas ;
2. Looking into the western part of the lagoon of Kuda Mandu; east face of Miladum-

madulu.
1, 2, W., Phot.

‘oF aLvIg “SOAIP[RIN—‘zissusy

ael >.
a
=
ede
=
ei

Puate 41.

1. Looking into the lagoon of Dureadu, from the south; centre of Miladummadulu.

2. Looking into the lagoon of Dureadu through the gap between the southeastern islet
and the eastern horn of the larger island.
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

“Ih ALVIg “SOAIP[VIN—‘zissusy

PLATE 42.

PLATE 42.

1. Looking across the horns of Dureadu from the east ; centre of Miladummadulu.

2. Looking into the lagoon sink of Ekasdu across the western land rim; east face of

Miladummadulu.
1, 2, W., Phot.

ee = == =
: = - 2 = — == oS a ——————— =
—aaiaieie = — =~ — —— —————
= — =
Co)” 5a
a a? a” =f yi

“th ALVIg “SOAIP[LIV—Zissusy

¢
i]
&
=
|
[ally

-

Puate 43.

1. Looking into the southern part of the open lagoon of Ereadu; east face of Miladum-
madulu.

2. Looking into the northern part of the open lagoon of Ereadu.
1, 2, W., Phot.

"Eb aLVIg *SOAIP[PI—‘zissesy

pe Haslal yhvie

drtie noon

PLATE 44.

1. Northern end of Furnadu Island, seen from the west; east face of Miladummadulu.
W., Phot.

2. Northern side of the lagoon sink of Nalandu; east face of Miladummadulu.
Pigott, Phot.

PLATE 44.

Maldives.

fAssiz,

Ag

a)

i

I

Nit

ig

Meith
At

i

nl

¢

aia ee
4 oben Yo bnalei
wt ‘

-—

nt woth

Puate 45.

1. Looking into the bight of the eastern face of the eastern island of Muradu Faro.
W., Phot.

2. Looking across the south flat of Muradu Faro to the junction of the western and eastern —
islands; west face of Tiladummati. M. A., Phot. a

*NOLSO8 “‘09 3dA1L0119H

‘Sh aLVIg *SOAIP|VIN—‘zIssusy

PuatTeE 46.

Puate 46.

1. Looking across the tongue of an open faro to the south of Muradu; west face of
Tiladummati. OR 231

2. Southern spit of the eastern part of the hammer-headed island of Naguri; west face of

Tiladummati.
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

"NOLSOB8 “*Q9 3d4L0115H

‘gb ALVIg *SOAIP| RIN —‘zissesy

~
+
ie]
iS)
5
a

Puate 47.

1. Sand spit at the northern extremity of Naguri forming the eastern face rim of Naguri
Faro; west face of Tiladummati. W., Phot.

2. Looking into bight on southeast face of Naguri. M. A., Phot.

PLATE 47.

Agassiz,—Maldives.

ie i
/ 4 avait i]

, BOSTON,

HELIOTYPE CO

BP nas ei

Piate 48.

1. Gap between Mahafai and Muradu; in basin of northern part of Tiladummati.
- W., Phot.

2. Western face of Kumberidu Island, in basin of central part of Tiladummati.
M. A., Phot.

PLATE 48.

Maldives.

Agassiz,

TON.

BO

HELIOTYPE CO.,

PuatTE 49.

1. Looking into the open lagoon of Baura from the north ; east face of Tiladummati. .
W., Phot.

2. South face of Mahafai; northern part of basin of Tiladummati. M. A., Phot.

‘6b a LVId “SOATP[VIN—‘zissusy

Puate 50.

Puate 50.

1. High old vegetation on the southern part of the east face of Filadu; northeast face of :
Tiladummati. cai = :

2. Looking into the open lagoon of Kelai from the southwest; ‘northeast horn of

Tiladummati.
1, 2, M: A., Phot.

"NOLSO8 09 3dA10173H

‘oS ALVIg “SOAIP[ VIN—‘zisseay

a 8

: ie
of 0 gal ogo ol) akvien naieool ir
an Ar al v

‘ ae

org | ;

ae
a

> om

+ io A: oY ae ; ,
“iit Ot ; beats ot 10 ¢ erie Lerrhtinn tom ~Puate 51.

‘Puate 51.

1. Dedu, seen from the east, showing the old and recent central parts of the island; north-
west face of Tiladummati. W., Phot.

2. Northeast point of the southern island of Warifuri, looking across the open lagoon to —
the islands on the northwest horn. M. A., Phot.

: | Ht en
i
i |
E .
:
:
[ ¥
aS
<
aN
AG, {
ue
i
Aa
ak
Nae iy} i ~

PLATE 52.

PrRATH 52:

1. Southern extremity of Dunacoori, Miledu Island in the distance ; northwest face of

Tiladummati.

2. Northern extremity of Miledu; northwest face of Tiladummati.’
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

“NOLSOB *'09 3dAL0(13H

ial

‘cS ALVIg *SOAIP|LIN—‘zisseny

PLatTE 53.

1. East face of Tukandu from the southeast ; Marandu in line with the north end; north
face of Tiladummati. p

2. Northeast face of Tukandu, showing large undercut rocks.
1, 2, W., Phot.

4

¢

ALV Ig

*SOAIP[BIN—‘ZISSESY

we. aad

i ae

ont). W b in lyfibera vail lounge dead stiecod Dae ubaloWt & rad (rk ot
evedl to sokl Jaay sted npne aioy) “302 .ubiwwwoel Bike Wier
.
5
:

Puate 54.

e

1. Gap between Muladu and Gumati; east face of Ihavandiffulu. W., Phot.

2. South end of Hauwandu, seen from the east; west face of Ihavandiffulu. M. A., Phot.

PLATE

Agassiz,—Maldives.

Puate 55.

1. North point of Beramundu; east face of Ihavandiffulu.

2. Southwest pass leading into Ari, between Ariadu and Mamigeli.
1, 2, W., Phot.

“SS ALVIg “SOAIP|VIN—‘zIssuay

-
a“ ~ - _
a 7 : Lo .
a 7) y
3 4 :

PD Kt

ebse tebwiltuas sift ott Nite usb J
PLATE 56.

ial its A io teaw silt ot 68 1657 a,lF
TONF pede i"

PuLaTE 56.

1. Mamigeli seen entering the southwest pass of Ari.

2. Islet on the reef flat to the west of Mamigeli.
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

= aaa

“oS ALVIG *SOAIP|VIN—‘zissesy

afi tat

AG. are.)

vw
- J
7
ft ~
ci Mie *s%
ith
Ph §

i

1%

rer “a
arene nv oft

y4

too

(ieeda in altro .
‘JUL 20 altos olf

Puate 57.

1. Island on the eastern extremity of a faro three and a half miles south of Furadu ;
southern part of Ari basin. W., Phot.

2. Eastern part of ring, one mile south of Furadu; Ari. M. A., Phot.

"NOLSOB **09 3dALOIISH

SAAT ECOL. DEES

ST REN 7

en eee

“AS ALVA *SOAIP[PIA—‘zissesy

PLATE 58.

1. Islet on the southern part of Wataru Reef rim. W., Phot.

7

Ge aTast
2. Furadu Island; southwestern part of Ari basin. M. A., Phot.

Wy 4

4

PLATE 58.

HELIOTYPE CO., BOSTON.

Agassiz,—Maldives.

phat Jeno ¢ cowl

.C8)..aT)

Saati
PLATE

ie, e
Li
° v
Ris |
riety) ni for ha1s700 fy :

59.

aii“! ee #

Oy Teddies

PuatEe 59.

1. Sand-bar island covered with bushes, south of Farna; east face of North Nil:

2. Southern point of Farna. M. A., Phot.

‘OS ALVIg *SOAIP[PIN—‘zissusy

&
B
=
i)
Oy

Puate 60.

1. East face of Hekara, showing reef rock ledge; east face of North Nilandu.
02 ee 7*|
2. Nipafura, a rocky islet seen looking into pass; east face of North Nilandu.
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

ee
z = = : = = SS ee
- ~ e : SS SSS SS SS SSC
== ee —e ee

A

‘09 ALVIg “SOAIP[VIN—‘zissusy

wo ATA!

z ar > 1 ee Tass nonprid
Bape. 4 1M EVepiarn 6° 98! see

f Néon-loet horaligow molwode asaq fai vciatool inh
ia J P
“i'l =A.
&
, -
Se
‘
‘ , F
‘ .
> ALS

PLATE 61.

1. Pass north of Feartu; east face of North Nilandu. W., Phot.

2. North end of Mawafuri looking into pass, showing weathered reef-rock ledge; Mulaku.
M. A., Phot.

*NOLSOB ‘OD JdALOI9H

+ IS fil ES CR eS Seis.

“Ig ALVIg *SOAIP[LIA—‘zIssusy

“(ui VE: 0240 pop
1

rot ,. tf
.

»

faye

A dane. ; tesedjyoe.s
TE 62,

ies o
ale slice Mi bokt Jee ¢ eaiiibies2l io ddiwu eels:
2 f

ar

es

PLATE 62.

1. Huluwa seen from the southeast; east face of South Nilandu.
me PALS

2. Gap between small islets north of Kandimas ; east face of South Nilandu.
1, 2, W., Phot.

NO1SO8 “'09 34dA10173H

= —— >= = SSS oS er a
= = = —— = — ——== Se 2 —=— — ee —= —S = = =
—— ———— — SS SSS ee SS == a el
. = =—— — : = = =— SSS SS SS ts oS Sa ee
— z SSeS — = =—_—- SS SSS = =
= = — = = —— = = —— SSeS = > — ee - ~ ———
= ae ~ = ee ae SS = = —<~ = = ——
- = SS = ———SSs eta —S Serpe = — ~
= —= _— == — a —— —— = . e
> = =~ — =e = = =~ — = a — - =
~ 3 = Se = SS ie ————— ee a = —_—-
= = = — SS 3 Te eS eS =
~ == = = = ——— SS —— -
= = ss Se je

“9 ALVId “SOAIP[LIA—‘zissusy

2 yr,

CP i

aol Lf Rt *

.

t

haali, 1008 aoe 9 UPLATE EBON Yo tsou ot

) walt ¥
TUT hee JD TT Pte

PLATE 63.

1. Gap between small islets north of Kandimas; east face of South Nilandu.

2. Islet, sand-bar, and ledge in the gap north of Kandimas.
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

: ~ = SS a ee : = SS = =~ - a
——— = * = om = = = = = - - = _ - - — >= = > =
— ls ~ ~ = = eae = — S — ——— = =
= . = = => — - = = = = - - =
a
SN Se Se
I
— = - = $ a ~ —— — = — —— = ae ae
= > a — = = = = = = = = SS er a = js
. = a = = == ——S = —— 2 = —-= =~ me :
= = ——— =e = - — = = = =

‘9 ALVIg

[—"ZISSUs

hart ,

_ - 7
a Se
= = + i: a v :
a eam : -
a 2 , e
. e
PLate 64.

A j ri y ODE TAN

-

PLATE 64.

1. Pass north of sand spit with rocky edge, north of rocky islet; west face of Mulaku.
PO apad W., Phot.

2. Gap north of Kandimas; east face of South Nilandu. M. A., Phot.

“NOLSOB *°09 3dALO113H

‘ho ALWIg *SOAIP[LIA—‘zissesy

ng 4oo1 ilow To 426

PLATE 65.

1. Sand spit and rocky ledge, on the northern part of Kureli reef flat; west face of —
Mulaku. oe

2. Southern point of Kureli showing high rocky ledge deeply undercut.
1, 2, W., Phot.

Sy SEE —

‘Sg ALVIg *SOAIP[VIN—‘zissusy

g Ut PohaiiloW-to. Fpl pes
ia >

wale yu

by. +9 Aves
Y GQeOW AS 5

Prats 66. |

WA) BOAT Bites -

On We

PLATE 66.

1. Islands south of Naraka, seen from the west; west face of Kolumadulu.
OF ATI

2. Narrow gap north of Diyageli ; east face of Kolumadulu.
1, 2, W., Phot.

‘99 ALVIg *SPAIP[VIN—‘zissusy

‘@
‘
,
a -

reer hoderyns irik

Pos

FEL Ik Bq Ricp eNine HEAVY to 2973

dul? ,.£ a et

jaow oft fo wat

~y

PLATE 67.

1. North point of Mavaru; west face of Haddummati.

2. Closed Bay on the west face of Mavaru with cusps of disintegrated reef rock.
1, 2, M. A., Phot.

I) 4 13H

SS eee ereaatrennmensendee ss

——— —.E Li

it ae mS PR eee

See

Ae) ALV Ig “SOAIP[VIN—‘zissv y

herogaionsh Hyd, Cbs obits iy) i val
od » 20dt FE PLATE (68.
" :
faa ulgiw eyed iis j0 im he aut j ~ ty 1. ; r

Pate 68.
1. Islets forming a rectangular bay, with boulder cusps and decomposed reef rock ledges,
north of Kakuni; west face of Haddummati. W., Phot.

2, Islets north of Kakuni, forming the west face of an open bay, with boulder cusps on
the outer edge. M. A., Phot.

"NOLSOB ''0D 3dALON3H

‘89 ALVIg *SOAIP[RPIN—‘zissesy

Piate 69.-°
Ltr 6 - r
bN ay SIT

Ve 2 T

r

ee

. ae

PLATE 69.

1. East face of Karaidu; northern part of east face of Haddummati.

2. Looking across the northeast horn of Haddummati, through the gap south of Isdu to
islet on the north face of the northeast horn of Haddummati.
1, 2, W., Phot.

69 ALVIg

“SOAIP[VIN—ZISSUDY

PLATE 70.

1. South face of Isdu, seen from the eastern point of the island; northeast horn of
Haddummati. OF atacd z

2. North face of Isdu, seen from the east point of the island; the islet to the west of
Isdu, in the rear, is the same islet as is seen on Pl. 69, fig. 2.
1, 2, W., Phot.

"NOLSOB ‘09 3dA10173H

‘ol ALVIg “SOAIP[LIN—‘z1ssus y

sond | APUATE EF

PuAtE 7a.

6
So
Ay
=
=
=)
mM
cH
(o)
fb)
S
ict]
»
n
Oo
E
oe
a
=
os)
=}
oH
°
o
(3)
&
»
na
a}
i)

ALV Tq “SOAIP[VIN —ZISSUSY

Puate 72.

IPGATE) wee

Vegetation on the road across Mafuri; west face of Suvadiva. M. A., Phot.

‘ s : |
a. =< sa

W—zissusy
*SOAIPI LIN Z1s
"th ALY Ig

PLaTH fe};

Pitted and honeycombed elevated reef rock on the west face of Mafuri; west face of
Suvadiva. M. A., Phot.

PLATE 74,

PLATE 74.

1. Pass to the south of Kandu Huludu; east face of Suvadiva. W., Phot.
av apart >

2. South face of Hibadu Island, about two miles east of Mafuri, in the basin of Suvadiva.
M. A., Phot.

ee ES 1 SLY SES Sa
?

tL ALY Iq “SOAIP|VIN—‘zissusy

aS at Sprint 751

,

PuatTEe 75.

Beach on the east side of Dandu; Nilandu Island in the distance; east face of Suv
M.A, Phot.

in
~

ALY Tq “SSATP[ PI —‘zissusy

Puate 76.

Beach on the east side of Gan; west face of Addu. M. A., Phot.

!
“Qh

ILV1q

ISSUS\
ZI
“SOAIP[UN

PATH esl

PuLatE 77.

1. Part of east face of Karaidu, showing the islets on the boulder cusps; east face of
Haddummati. W., Phot.

2. Looking into Addu lagoon across the pass between Gan and Wiringili seen facing t
east face of Gan. M. A., Phot.

"LL ALVIg *SOAIP[ VIN —‘zissusy

Pate 78.

PLATE 78.

1. South point of Farna and pass to the south, seen from the east; east face of North

Nilandu. OY ara

2. Jeweller’s Islands, seen from the southwest; in northern part of lagoon of South

Nilandu.
1, 2, W., Phot.

‘gL ALVIg *SOAIP[VIAN—‘zIssusy

> ‘ ‘
mid eign) |
¥

i«

5 PLATE . 79.

: >> wlalé diye

:
, Stiailinat

> . ¥

PLATE 79.

1. Islets in the lagoon of Suvadiva to the northeast of Mafuri. W., Phot.

2. Clump of cocoanut-trees on the reef flat north of Mafuri (South Male); starting-point
of the line of soundings east of the east face of South Male.

3. East face of Kuludu; east face of Miladummadulu. W. Pigott, Phot. —

SwesVarssvw Se aww Ae

wy ;
e set te "
Se :

oh ferwet

bei
sete

tea
Set

Sitients
to
u

tS Say, ch
rales
{avec Ttcih

a
aytadtte

5 Spee ne

indsenitiiakaite cree)
niger vent et

ete

a

a ‘ paaivens
f sapere ies

bth evel a fS51i7,
nalsegies tha

Td ris
tat

oh ear
eaeeritied he seubas
weit a : a
a

eae

Weis sy oe
Rt

Se

rat
af tgs

its Fe ¢ "4 y
me Sesed Pyucd patra Sta : ie
bet: oe Ses H , x ub
fit bbsigin hatte
sea a Reet

i t Zt

os
hs

3 és
if
i

235

. StF
uaa i
“ss itt

Rae haath tt

} Lape Rt
i : et ord Re
Sane eee Depa ile!
fet i HM eleee bat p re ;

ait
Usa

beh ee
cece
eRe